Home

Service Manual - Photocopieur professionnel d`occasion RICOH

1. 813 QUU 813 DE NE 814 xiii B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Inverter Mechanism ccccccceccececeeeceeceseceeeceecceeceuecaeesaeecseseuessesseeseeseeeseeeseeeseeesees 815 DUDIEX ODE iile 816 Fe UME aseo a REN m m m 818 WEN S 818 acia Ke E se sess ence se eens eaesentteeesenteasstesueasdeowss 820 Controller Functions cccccccccscecseeceeecceeecaeeceueesueecseeceueceaeeseesneesaeeceessesseeeeneeess 820 JOD DONO EE Meri EE EE ee eee ee 821 FNCU IS ees 824 Ef ale 9 og ON EEE EE EEE 824 Printing Function List errnnrnnnorarrnnrrnnrvanrnannrennnernanrnnannnenneennnnnannnernnernnsrnnenneennsennsnne 824 Printing Function Description rrarrnrrnnnrnnnrnnrvnnrvnnnnannnannnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnnnnene 825 Go AEE ea UNI EEE EE EO EE RRS 833 CCN re 833 Mask Type for COPYING ccccceccceecceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeesececeeeesueeseeeteueesaeeseeeseeessueeseeesanss 834 File Format Converter MLB ccccssccceeecceseeceececeneeceuceceueeseeeeseeeesseeecsuseseaeessuseseas 835 Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 rrranennnrnnnnnrannnanennnrnnannnnnennnnrnnnnanennnrnnnnnnanennsn ene 836 TO Erase Memory PCR 836 Ti
2. Rear cover i Rear Cover PSU bracket W PSU Open the controller box Controller Box Development motor MCY A x 4 amp x 1 gt n Io 161 Replacement and Adjustment Development Clutch K 1 Rear cover W Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box W Controller Box 3 Development clutch K A x 2 EP x 1 23 x 1 21 Apr 2006 162 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Fusing Fusing Unit CAUTION Turn off the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any of the procedures in this section The fusing unit can cause serious burns 1 If you will install a lot of new parts in the fusing unit at PM for example then set SP 3902 014 to 1 f you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the fusing unit automatically after you turn the power on again Do not do this if you replace the complete fusing unit This is because the fusing unit has a new detection mechanism Turn off the main power switch Open the right door Release the lock levers A SE AR Fusing unit B 163 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Fusing unit Fusing Unit 2 Fusing upper cover A x 4 4 L
3. Portrait A gt A Selected image printing This function can print two or more images selected from the display on the DSC If landscape and portrait images are mixed in one job the paper feed direction is fixed following the first image direction 825 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 DPOF Digital Print Order Format printing This function is not available in this machine All image printing This function can print all images in the DSC Index printing This function can print all images as thumbnail photos with index format The size of the photos is fixed at 20 mm x 20 mm A3 192 16 x 12 e oom B4 140 14 x 10 Some digital cameras have a limitation on the maximum photo number in a print job If the number of photos in a page is more than the maximum photo number in a job a form feed may be inserted between the thumbnail photos Trimming This function can print a part of an image by specifying a clip area 826 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Multiple number printing This function can print multiple images from the same image according to ordered number and layout If the photos are printed with a multiple number printing function and there are an odd number of photos in a page the photo will not be printed m falayoutis not selec
4. 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 2 High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket 3 Drum Development motor K A x 4 EP x 1 155 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 ITB Drive Motor 1 Rear cover ii Rear Cover 2 High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket 3 ITB drive motor A x4 x 1 Fusing Paper Exit Motor Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Toner supply tube fan duct A 7 x 3 EP x 1 x 1 Fusing paper exit motor B 7 x 4 E7 x 1 DN me 156 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor 1 Rear cover W Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box W Controller Box 3 Transfer belt contact motor A x 2 E x 1 32 x 1 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket iM High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Right rear cover i Right Rear Cover Paper transfer contact motor A x 2 x 1 B5 wg 157 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Duplex Inverter Motor Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Toner supply tube
5. 188 DUE ON E 188 Duplex Transport Motor isscexssasvsatt tea iot mee asl o PbR ick cn ea bat rd prt ei a d a dit dau 188 Electrical Components cccccceecceeceeeteeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeesueteeeteeseeteeeeeeeseetaeees 190 clear 190 Gelre EG t 190 B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 EE BL 191 BOU 193 VB 194 PU aes ere soc see aoc oo pe see 2 cae seseige ate vaste acest ee oa ses poet Soc ns soe we ae essa eee 194 SIO scanner In Out BOBLG serens 195 High Voltage Supply Board ssesssessesssessseenneeenne enne nnn nnn nnns 196 High Voltage Supply Board Bracket ccccccccceecceeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeueeceeeseuessueesaeeseesaees 197 Controler BT eciesquismtetec cancun iont etui i Sion East E E a 198 ig J ee 199 NVRAM Replacement Procedure cccccceecseeceeeeecseeseeeeceeesneteeeeeesueeeesseeaseneeeness 200 Toe 203 Process Control Error Conditions rarrrarernnrrnanevanrnnnnnrannnannnanennnnnnnnnnanennnennnsenanennennne 203 Developer Initialization Result r rrarrarnnrrnarnannnnrnarnannnarnernannnnnnnenernasnneenennannnannnenene 203 Process Control Self Check Result rrrrrrarenanrarnnrrrarevnnrnrennnanennnennnnnnn
6. 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 2 High voltage supply board A x 6 All EFs x 1 196 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 High Voltage Supply Board Bracket NS Kal oN NG A Rear cover i Rear Cover 2 Remove all the connectors and release the clamp A 3 Release all the clamps B 4 Open out the high voltage supply board bracket C P x 3 and then remove it 197 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Controller Board B 1 Controller unit W Controller Box 2 Fan bracket A and grip B 7 x 1 87 x 1 3 Controller board C x 7 x 2 N EI E F 4 Interface rails D NV RAM E and RAM DIMM s F When installing the new BICU Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board Then install it on the new controller board after you replace the controller board Replace the NVRAM iMf NVRAM Replacement Procedure if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective Make sure you print out the SMC reports SP Mode Data and Logging Data before you replace the NVRAM 198 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 A CAUTION Keep NVRAMSs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board Make sure that the DI
7. Rear cover see Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section PSU bracket see PSU in the Replacement and Adjustment section Install the four stud stays A in the PSU bracket Install the key counter interface board B to the PSU bracket with the four stud Oo fs stays 5 Connect the harness C between CN252 on the IOB and the connector of the key counter interface board Cut off the part D of the rear cover Connect the harness to the key counter interface board and install the rear cover Connect the harness to a counter device 58 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Anti Condensation Heater Scanner Installation Procedure Om oc oY S 10 11 Rear cover see Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section Open the ARDF or platen cover Glass cover A x 4 ARDF exposure glass B Rear scale C 2 x 3 Exposure glass with left scale D Move the scanner carriage to the right side by rotating the scanner motor E Install the heater F in the scanner unit x 1 hook Put the connector G through the cutout Connect it to the connector H blue and red cords in the frame of the machine Reassemble the machine 59 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Tray Heater Installation Procedure aoe o I9 c Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine Remove the connector cover A x 1 Connect the connector
8. Connections at the end of this section 65 Installation 21 Apr 2006 File Format Converter A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure The fax unit B786 must be installed before installing this unit This is because the mother board that comes with the fax unit is necessary to connect the file format converter inside the machine N i 1 Remove the slot cover A from I F card slot C F x 2 2 Install the file format converter B into I F card slot C and then fasten it with Screws Plug in and turn on the main power switch Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below SP5 836 001 Capture Function 0 Off 1 On 5 Checkthe operation 6 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 66 Installation 21 Apr 2006 IEEE1394 FireWire Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You cannot install the USB host interface at the same time as the IEEE 1394 unit 1 Remove the slot cover A from I F Card Slot A x 2 Install the FireWire board B Knob screw x 2 into I F card slot A Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 Enter the UP m
9. 21 Apr 2006 2006 Rotation Development Unit Y 7951 38 7951 39 Rotation Rotation Developer Bk Bk 7951 41 Rotation Ned Rotation Developer C 7951 42 Rotation Rotation Developer Y Y Rotation Image 7951 43 Transfer Belt 7951 44 Rotation Rotation Cleaning Unit Unit 7951 45 Rotation Fusing Unit Rotation Fusing Unit Unit Rotation Paper Transfer Unit 7951 46 Measurement Toner 7951 47 Collection bottle PM Yield Setting Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit Rotation Image CTL 0 to 999999999 256597000 1 mm step Transfer Belt 7952 2 Rotation Cleaning Unit 0 to 999999999 128299000 1 mm step 7952 3 Rotation Fusing Unit 0 to 999999999 155595000 1 mm step Rotation Paper Transfer Unit CTL 0 to 999999999 192448000 1 mm step ni Belt 7952 12 Page Cleaning Unit O to 999999 160000 1 sheet step Page Image Transfer 7952 11 CTL 0 to 999999 320000 1 sheet step 622 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7952 13 Page Fusing Unit O to 999999 160000 1 sheet step Page Paper Transfer 7952 14 Day Threshold Development Unit Bk 7952 25 7952 26 7952 27 7952 28 7952 29 7952 30 7952 31 7952 32 7952 33 7952 34 Unit Day Threshold Development Unit M Day Threshold Development Unit C Day Threshold Development Unit Y Day Threshold Developer Bk Day Thres
10. 793 Paper Size Detection Trays 1 amp 2 rrrrrnanrnnnrnnnnnranenanennnnrnanennnrnnannnanenanennnennennnnnennee 794 Paper Height Detection Trays 1 amp 2 rrranrnnrrnnnnnnannnanennnnnnanennnrnnnnnnnnnnanennnsnnnnennnennne 195 Paper End Detection Trays 1 amp 2 rrranrerarnnnnrnrarnranennnennnnnnnnennrnnarnranennnennnsnnnennnennee 796 ROS 197 Paper Feed LINE SPCC ae 797 Tray LOCK MEGANE Ma m enano eka gaaat ee 198 Paper Dust ENER M GREY 799 By pass Paper Separation cccccccccceeccecesseeeseeeeteeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeasessueteeenes 800 By pass Paper Size Detection rrrnrrnnrrnrerarerarerernnrrrnnernnnnnrnnnenanenunenennnernnnennsennsene 800 acl c 801 VE 801 a EsudPc 802 Pressure Release Mechanism ccccccseccscccseceeceeeceeccueceuesaeecueseesseesaeecuesseseeeees 803 FUSING Temperature Control uiii eroi ohio n petente OIERA AEE ERE 804 Energy Saver IVIOC BS Jen 807 New Unit Detection 1 lseesssessseseseeeeeen enne nnne nnne nnne nnn nenne nnne nnne snas 809 xd T OU 811 CONV CCW 811 Junction Gate Mechanism ccccceccceecceeeece cece eeceeeeseeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeeseueesueeseeesaueeseeaes 812 Blei dS cM u
11. 1 Open the front door A GSA model 58 and EU models 67 26 do not require steps from 2 to 7 Skip to step 8 if you install these models 1 Remove the stopper B x 1 This stopper locks the drum positioning plate lever 2 Release the image transfer belt lever C and turn the drum positioning plate lever D counterclockwise Open the drum positioning plate E Remove all tapes F from the four development units When you remove the tape from the development unit hold the development unit with your hand and then pull the tape 5 Close the drum positioning plate Then lock the image transfer belt lever and turn the drum positioning plate lever clockwise Lock the drum positioning plate lever with the stopper B P x 1 Shake each toner bottle five or six times 10 Installation 21 Apr 2006 8 Install each toner bottle G in the machine 9 Close the front door Paper Trays 1 Pull each paper tray out Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size a To move the side guides first pull out the tray fully Then push down the green lock at the rear inside the tray 2 Pull out the feeler A for the output tray full detection mechanism 11 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Emblem and Decals 1 Attach the correct emblem A and the cover B to the front door C of the machine if the emblem is not attached
12. 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Turn the main switch on and off 2 Replace the ROM DIMM 3 Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Self diagnosis error optional RAM XXXX Detailed error code Verification error Slot 1 0401 The data stored in the optional RAM in Slot 1 does not match the data when reading Composition error Slot 1 0402 The result of checking the composition data of the optional RAM in Slot 1 on the controller is incorrect Not specified RAM DIMM installed Defective RAM DIMM Turn the main switch off and on Replace the RAM DIMM Replace the controller board No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures IEEE 1394 interface error The 1394 interface is unusable Defective IEEE1394 Defective controller Turn the main switch off and on Replace the IEEE 1394 interface board Replace the controller 2 1 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Wireless LAN card not detected CTL B The wireless LAN card is not detected before communication is established though the wireless LAN board is detected 1 Check the connection Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Wireless LAN Bluetooth card not detected CTL B The wireless LAN Bluetooth card is not detected after co
13. I mem 1 I m 8 I mm fe _ mm I se fe gt I 86 Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 Item Bearing Rear Cleaning Roller One way Clutch Gear Idle Gear Dry cloth Dry cloth Dry cloth Thermopile Themistor Fusing Roller Themistor Pressure Roller Dry cloth Guide Plate Entrance alcohol Dry cloth Guide Plate Exit C alcohol Dry cloth otripper Plate C alcohol Paper Path Registration Roller C Damp cloth Registration Sensor C Dry cloth Vertical Transport Damp cloth Roller Vertical Transport Sensor Fusing Entrance C Dry cloth Sensor m 00 T Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 emf om m nn sam ew mm fe ene I Le Duplex Unit e pe 2 Blower Inverter Sensor brush E Miscellaneous am TT T TT 1 Clean this thermistor only when it gets paper dust Item EN Remarks Pick up Roller C Damp cloth alcohol ARDF Feed Belt Damp cloth alcohol Separation Roller Damp cloth alcohol Sensors Blower brush Damp cloth alcohol Replace if required White Plate Dry or damp cloth Drive Gear Grease G501 Transport Roller Damp cloth alcohol Platen Sheet Cover 88 Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 Remarks Exit Roller Damp cloth alcohol Inverter Roller Damp cloth alcohol Idle Rollers Damp cloth alcohol Two tray Paper Feed
14. 3 Press Yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier Document Server settings 4 Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset 711 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Firmware Update To update the firmware for this machine you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD Secure Digital Card The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box Type of Firmware There are 16 types of firmware as shown below Location of Type of firmware Message shown firmware Engine System Copy Application Netfile Application Printer Application Scanner Application Fax Application Fax FCU Language 16 languages WebDocBox Printer engine control BICU Flash ROM Flash ROM on the Operating system System Copy controller board Printer scanner Feature application NetworkDocBox SD card uM Printer scanner Feature application SD Printer SD card EE Printer scanner Feature application SD Scanner SD card mE Flash ROM on the Feature application Fax controller board Printer scanner Network Interface Network SD card Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel OpePanel Language firmware Two languages can be Operation Panel selected from 16 languages 712 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Printer scanner Web Service application Web Support SD card Page description
15. Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2751 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2772 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page ENG Separation DC Fine 1st ENG Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd ENG Page Special 1 Switch Timing Lead Edge 2772 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 30 20 2 mm step 138 mm s 2nd Side 419 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Special 1 Trailing Edge Correction Special 1 Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2753 and SP275 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2774
16. ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 1st Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step 2nd Side Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 2nd Side Thick 3 MM Thick 3 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step 1st Side Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step 1st Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step 2nd Side Separation DC Thick 3 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step 414 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thick 3 MH Thick 3 Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 1st Side Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step 1st Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode W
17. Program address CPU Memory Error System firmware problem 0702 Defective RAM DIMM 0709 Defective controller 070A Reinstall the controller system software Replace the RAM DIMM Replace the controller 266 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Self diagnostics error ASIC 821 XXXX Detailed error code ASIC error The write amp verify check error has occurred in the ASIC OBOO Defective ASIC device 1 Replace the controller ASIC detection error The I O ASIC for system control is not detected 0B06 Defective ASIC Defective North Bridge and PCI I F 1 Replace the controller board SHM register error The initialization of bus connection or read for SHM fails The register of SHM is different from specified value 0B 10 Defective connection bus Defective SHM 1 Replace the controller board Self diagnosis error ASIC The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU timer If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range this SC code is displayed D PD System firmware problem Defective RAM DIMM Defective controller Reinstall the controller system firmware Replace the RAM DIMM 267 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 3 Replace the controller board Details Symptom Possible Cause
18. 0 to 1 0 1 step 002 Local Port CTL O Disable 1 Enable On Off 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 5857 1 Switches the debug log feature on and off The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on Target 2 HDD 3 SD 2 HDD 3 SD Card 5857 2 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5 858 are satisfied 2t03 2 1 step Save to HDD Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD 005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to each SD Card 006 Save to SD Card 009 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB 010 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB Any Key 011 Erase HDD Debug Data 012 Erase SD Card Debug Data 013 Free Space on SD Card 014 Copy SD to SD Latest 4 MB 5 N 7 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 015 Copy SD to SD Latest 4 MB Any Key 016 Make HDD Debug 017 Make SD Debug Debug Save When CTL These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002 SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes Turns on off the debug save for SC codes generated by copier engine errors 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 001 Engine SC Error Turns on off the debug save for SC codes
19. 8 155 scanned and sent with Scan to PC These counters count jobs not pages If the job is cancelled during scanning it is not counted If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job 639 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 8 161 T PCFAX TX Jobs These SPs count the number of PC Fax 8 163 transmission jobs A job is counted from when it is registered for sending not when it is sent F PCFAX TX Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identical counts This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application and sending the data out to the destination from the PC through the copier T Total Scan PGS C Total Scan PGS These SPs count the pages scanned by each application that uses the scanner to scan F Total Scan PGS images S Total Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 L Total Scan PGS SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages not the number of physical pages These counters do not count reading user stamp data or reading color charts to adjust color Previews done with a scanner driver are not coun
20. 004 Factory Setting BO BW 4685 Gray Balance Set R DFU 923 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Adjusts the gray balance of the red signal for each scanning mode 001 Book Read 512 to 511 240 1 digit step 002 DF Read Gray Balance Set G DFU Adjusts the gray balance of the green signal for each scanning mode 001 Book Read 512 to 511 240 1 digit step 002 DF Read Gray Balance Set B DFU 4687 Adjusts the gray balance of the blue signal for each scanning mode 001 Book Read 512 to 511 240 1 digit step 002 DF Read DF Density Adjustment Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different White Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning m ener E 524 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 1 0 White Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning E O to 1024 0 1 digit step White Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the white level scanning O to 1024 0 1 digit step Black Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the black level scanning O to 1024 0 1 digit step Black Level Peak Read Displays the peak level of the black level scanning 525 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 003 GE Bk 004 GO Bk Black Level Peak R
21. 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 1st Side S1 Paper Transfer 1st Side S2 Paper Transfer 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer 1st Side S4 Paper Transfer 1st Side S5 Paper Transfer 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer 2nd Side SA Paper Transfer 2nd Side S5 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 Thick 3 ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step 91 size 2 297 mm Paper width 100 to 600 160 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width 100 to 600 260 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width 100 to 600 430 5 step 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width 100 to 600 600 5 step 148 mm 2 S5 size Paper width 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width 100 to 600 160 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width 100 to 600 260 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width 100 to 600 430 5 step 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width 100 to 600 600 5 step 148 mm 2 S5 size Paper width Thick 3 Leading Edge Correction Thick 3 Paper Leading Edge Correction
22. 432 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 2 MH Special 2 Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment ENG 10 to 250 140 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 110 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side 005 008 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is 433 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 detected as MH SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 150 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 2 HH Special 2 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adju
23. 58 Ib Thick 3 220 253 g m 58 5 67 Ib Temperature Corrections Corrections for ambient temperature SP 1112 fthe room temperature is below 17 C the heating roller temperature is increased by 5 C fthe room temperature is above 30 C the heating roller temperature is decreased by 5 C First print of a job SP 1114 The heating roller temperature is increased by 10 C for the first 2 seconds of the job Corrections during the job SP 1116 The fusing temperature can be reduced two times during the job There are adjustments for the temperature at the center and at the ends There are also adjustments for paper wider than 226 mm and less than 226 mm With the default settings fusing temperature at the center for paper widths less then 226 mm is reduced by 5 C after 30 seconds and again reduced by 5 C after 60 seconds Overheat Protection The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp at the following times The heating roller or pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 230 C for one second or more SC 543 and SC 553 for the heating roller or SC 563 for the pressure roller show for this condition The heating roller or pressure roller temperature reaches 250 C SC 544 and SC 554 for the heating roller or SC 564 for the pressure roller show for this condition The following components are used if thermistor or thermopile overheat protection fails Two thermostats f
24. Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2351 and SP2357 are multiplied by these SP values Image Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG Not used FINE 10 to 250 100 5 step P M Pattern When doing the process Image Transfer P M ENG Pattern control or automatic line position adjustment Common MM Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2351 and SP235 are multiplied by these SP values Image Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG Not used FINE 10 to 250 100 5 step ENG P M Pattern When doing the process control or automatic line position Image Transfer P M Pattern 3 2 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Common MH Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2351 and SP2357 are multiplied by these SP values Image Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG Not used FINE 10 to 250 100 5 step P M Pattern When doing the process Image Transfer P M ENG Pattern control or
25. Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Special 1 Switch Timing Trail Edge ENG 420 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 1 LL Special 1 Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2751 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG 421
26. SUb scan direction 0 9 mm A Main scan direction 0 4 mm Adjustment Procedure 1 Enter SP2 109 2 Print out the test pattern 14 1 dot trimming pattern with SP2 109 Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page Print some pages of the 1 dot trimming pattern for step 3 and 4 Then average the leading edge and side to side registration values and adjust each SP mode 3 Do the leading edge registration adjustment 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1 001 2 Select the adjustment conditions paper type and process line speed 3 Input the value Then press the 9 key 4 Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment 4 Dothe side to side registration adjustment 1 Check the side to side registration and adjust it with SP1 002 2 Select the adjustment conditions paper feed station 3 Input the value Then press the 9 key 4 Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment 96 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Erase Margin Adjustment m Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration main scan and sub scan cannot be adjusted within the standard values Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D and then adjust the erase margin A and B 1 Enter SP2 109 2 Print out the test pattern 14 1 dot trimming pattern with SP2 109 3 Checkthe erase margin A and B Adjust
27. The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2572 003 Separation DC 1st Page ENG O to 400 100 5 step 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG Thick 2 Switch Timing Lead Edge 2572 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step 403 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 002 um 2nd Side ENG 003 os DC 1st Page ENG 004 Separation DC 2nd Page DC 2nd Page ENG Thick 2 Trailing Edge Correction Thick 2 Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values J The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2574 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side ENG Thick 2 Switch Timing Trail Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate 2573 2574 at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side ENG Thick 2 LL Thick 2 Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment 100 to 0 0 2 mm step Adjusts the env
28. 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 Black Level Rough Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the Latest BE Color CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the black offset value rough Latest BO Color adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value fine Latest BE Color adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value fine Latest BO Color adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the Latest BE BW CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 t0255 128 1 digit step Displays the black offset value rough Tn adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the black offset value fine nS HER adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the black offset value fine Latest BO BW adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing 508 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 re 001 002 003 004 001 002 003 004
29. 002 ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 004 ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 005 ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 006 ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 008 ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 0 to 255 1 V step 012 ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 013 ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 014 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm kV step 015 ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step Toner Collection Bottle Full Detection Displays adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings These SPs are used for NRS 001 CTL 0 to 4 0 1 step 002 Detection Times CTL 0 to 50 1 step 003 Print Page After Near Full CTL 0 to 1000 0 1 sheet step Pixel Count After Near Full CTL 0 to 200000 1 cm step Pixel Count After Displays the pixel counter after replacement CTL Replacement of toner collection bottle 493 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Enables or disables the calling for NRS Dor 1 1 0 Enable NRS calling 1 Disable NRS calling NOTE 011 Notice Setting If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects used toner near full when this setting is set to O the machine cannot detect toner collection bottle near full In that case set SP3 902 017 to 1 Toner Collection Bottle Full Detection 3900 Turns toner collection bottle full detection on or off Dor 1 1 0 OF
30. 1 step 7803 62 Rotation PCU M 7803 63 Rotation PCU C 7803 64 Rotation 9o PCU Y Rotation 96 Development Unit Bk 7803 65 Rotation 96 Development Unit M 7803 66 Rotation Development Unit C 7803 67 Rotation Development Unit Y 7803 68 Rotation 96 Developer Bk 7803 69 Rotation 96 Developer M 7803 70 Rotation 96 Developer C 7803 71 Rotation 9 6 Developer Y 7803 72 Rotation 96 Image 7803 73 Transfer Rotation 9o Cleaning Unit 7803 74 Rotation Fusing Unit 7803 75 Rotation Paper 7803 76 Transfer Unit 603 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Measurement 7803 77 Toner Collection bottle Displays the value given by the following formula Current printouts Target printouts x 100 This shows how much of the unit s expected lifetime has been used up The Page counter is based on printouts not revolutions If the number of printouts reaches the limit the machine enters the end condition for that unit If the revolution count lifetime is reached first the machine also enters the end condition even though the Page counter is still less than 100 7803 91 Page 9e PCU Bk ENG 0 to 255 1 9o step 7803 92 Page PCU M 7803 93 Page PCU C 7803 94 Page 96 PCU Y Page 9e Development Unit Bk 7803 95 Page 9e Development Unit M
31. 3 Strong 003 Correction Level 4 Strongest APS Operation Check 4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors See Input Check Table 001 APS Operation Check m 497 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 APS Min Size A5 HLT 16K 4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF O to 2 0 1 step 0 No Original APS Min Size 1 A5 Lengthwise 16K SEF if 4305 is set to A5 HLT 16K 3 2 A5 Sideways 16K LEF if 4305 is set to 3 O to 3 0 1 step 0 Normal Detection the machine detects ENG A4 LT size as A4 or LT depending on the 4305 8K 16K Detection paper size setting 1 A4 Sideways LT Lengthwise 2 LT Sideways A4 Lengthwise 3 8K 16K 0 01 This program enables the machine to This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K 16K size recognize the 8K 16K size Set the Mask for Original These SPs set the area to be masked during platen book mode scanning 001 Book Leading Edge 002 Book Trailing Edge 003 Book Left 004 Book Right 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step 005 ADF Leading Edge 007 ADF Right 008 ADF Left 498 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 IPU Test Pattern 4417 Selects the BICU test pattern 0 to 24 0 1 step Test Pattern Selection CON OO BP OO N a O Scanned image Gradat
32. 7803 96 Page 96 Development Unit C 7803 97 Page 9e Development Unit Y 7803 98 Page 96 Developer Bk 7803 99 7803 100 Page 9o Developer M 7803 101 Page 96 Developer C 7803 102 Page 96 Developer Y Page 96 Image 7803 103 29 5 Imag Transfer 604 Service Tables 21 Service Tables O 21 Apr 2006 2006 7803 104 MM 9o Cleaning Unit 7803 105 Page Page Fusing Unit Fusing Unit Page 96 Paper 7803 106 9 CO Pap Transfer Unit 7804 PM Counter Reset PM Counter Clear Unit Color Clears the PM counter Press the Enter key after the machine asks Execute which will store the PM counter value in SP7 906 PM Counter Previous and reset the value of the current PM counter SP7 803 to 0 7804 9 Development Unit C 7804 11 Development Unit All 7804 12 Developer Bk 7804 13 Developer M 7804 14 Developer C 605 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SC Jam Counter Reset 7807 Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams meme TP MF Error Counter Japan Only 7826 1 Error Total 7826 2 Error Staple 7827 MF Error Counter Clear Japan Only Self Diagnose Result Display 7832 Displays the result of the diagnostics Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system 606 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 DF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter
33. 83 Before removing the old PM parts cccccccccccceececececeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeesseeeaseeses 83 After installing the new PM parts cccccccceccceecceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeseceeeseueesueeseeessueeseeesaees 84 Preparation before operation CHECK ccccecceseeeecteecceeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeseeseeteeeeneeseeteeenaes 84 Oberatorn CHE GK oase 84 Maintenance Tables RE EE 85 Preventive Maintenance Tables rrrrrrnnrrarerarrrarrrernnrrnanrrannnarnnnennnnnannnannnernnnennsennennee 85 Others in Mainframe cc cece ceccc cece cececeeeceeeeee cess eeceeecseeeseeeseueesueeseeeseeessueeseeeseeeteeeaees 90 3 Replacement and AdjuStMent cccccccsccceecseeceeeceeeceecasecaeecaeeceeseeesaeeseeeseessesaeesas 91 PN 91 PENT EG 92 pe EO EE 93 SCANN EEE eee eee eee 93 RF O X 94 FN 95 Erase Margin Adjustment rrrrrnnnrnnrrnnrnnnrnanenanrrannrennnernnnrnnnnnarnnsennnnnunnnennnnnnsennsennennee 97 color FRE GIS Wi AMO MER T e 97 Printer Gamma OM SCHON seru nct dasrccctenossteaaumsendeenat EErEE EO sA AET PRENESE 98 EOF COVOR ae enn nee eee TET 104 PORA OE n 104 EER COVO 105 niw fvE 105 ROR COV GP f 106 Operation Pane lisecn iiscssuncecstaendsinssiasevavanniane TA
34. Adjust the offset value so that ID max K the density of level 10 f matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that Middle Middle the density of level 6 matches ID K that of level 6 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that Shadow High ID 11 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 the density of level 8 matches K T that of level 8 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not Highlight Low ID show on the copy and the K density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart Text Letter Mode Full Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart K Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that ID max K C M the density of level 10 and Y matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that Middle Middle 2 ID 14721314 5 617 18 9 10 the density of level 6 matches t that of level 6 on the C 4 K C M and Y chart 101 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Adjust the offset value so that Shadow High ID the density of level 8 matches K C M and Y that of level 8 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not Highlight Low ID show on the copy and the K C M and Y density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart Text Letter Mode Single Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 cha
35. DOCS CA HON Scie Tm 838 General SS CIC AOS seem cider ud Qua a acm cU ME TOS nrU inea orn uM cH EN E PEU HIM EIE 838 Me FN T Doo EET 838 mini geeec 842 Se 1 1 ERE 844 Supported Paper SIZES Jed 845 PAN 845 PTE LL ene ee E E ee eee S 848 Platen ARDF Original Size Detection rrrrarrrarrrnnrrrarevnrrnrennranennnennnnnnanrnnnnnnennnanennee 853 SENNA 856 PEN 856 Scanner and LAN FAX CIivelrs cccecccsecceeecaececeeesaneccecseseeceeesaueeceeesaneseesseseeseeees 856 JURY SONWANE NEIN Tm 857 Machine Configuratio M 858 NE NNN 862 niis 862 Paper Feed UM 863 PSAP SACI AE yz NR tm anes deccasoseseceue ese 863 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher amp Punch Unit rarrrnnrnnarrrarernnennnrrnanennnrnrannnannnnnennnnnnn 864 XIV B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 1000 Sheet Finisher rrnnrnrnnnrnnnrrnnnrnnnvnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnvnnannnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnennnennansnnnsnnennnseenn 865 500 Sheet Finisher cccceecccececaeeceecceeneceeecaececeeesaneseeesesaeceeesageeceeesaeesseesseeeseeess 866 21416 01 Ga T ee 067 MTU 867 Pa i M E 067 XV Installation 21 Apr 2006 1 Installation Installation Requirements Environment Rh 90 80 27C 80 6F 80 Rh 25C 77F 70 Rh e d TF TOR
36. F counter increments 8 011 T Jobs LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the 630 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 C Jobs LS document server by each application to reveal how local storage is being used for input F Jobs LS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 P Jobs LS The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the S Jobs LS operation panel O Jobs LS When a scan job is sent to the document server the S counter increments When you enter document server mode and then scan an original the L counter increments When a print job is sent to the document server the P counter increments When a network application sends data to the document server the O counter increments When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server the O counter increments When a fax is sent to the document server the F counter increments C Pjob LS These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document server originally P Pjob LS 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of jobs S Pjob LS stored from within the document server mode L Pjob LS screen at the operation panel O Pjob LS When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application the C counter increments When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document server with a print job t
37. Laser Safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH prohibits the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required A WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure A WARNING WARNING Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes CAUTION MARKING B230 Service Manual CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN M CAUTION VORSICHT gt PS lt y oymbols Abbreviations and Trademarks 21 Apr 2006 This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows E ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Short Edge Feed SEF Long Edge Feed LEF B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Trademarks
38. Paper Size Type 0 JP Japan 1 NA 2 EU Selection The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives the AB system 0 the LT system 1 and the AF system 2 By Pass Length CTL 0 OFF 1 ON Setting Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by pass tray is used or not Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by pass tray is limited to 600 mm but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm 5162 App Switch Method 0 Soft Key Set 1 Hard Key Set 001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program Fax Printing Mode at Optional Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device This SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device 0 or 1 0 Fax Printing Mode at Oo CTL 0 Automatic printing Optional Counter Off ae 1 No automatic printing CE Login If you will change the printer bit switches you must log in to service mode with this SP before you go into the printer SP mode 00r 1 0 001 CE Login CTL 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 534 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 amp Copy Data Security Setting 5178 Do this SP after installation of the Copy Data Security Unit 0 or 1 0 1 step ENG 0 Copy data security function disabled 1 Copy data security function enabled n The copy data security option will not operate corr
39. RGB image done by Scanner gamma correction 9 RGB image done by Filtering correction 10 RGB images done by Full color ADS 11 RGB image done by Color correction High Light Correction Selects the Highlight correction level 0 to 9 4 1 step 001 Sensitivity Selection 0 weakest sensitivity 9 strongest sensitivity Selects the range level of Highlight 002 Range Selection correction 0 to 9 4 1 step 029 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 0 weakest skew correction 9 strongest skew correction Text Photo Detection Level PUTET E UTI 4994 Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF compression PDF 0 to 2 1 1 step PDF Sensitivity Level 0 Text priority text photo 1 Normal 2 Photo priority SP5 XXX Mode mm inch ey See D a Selection 5024 Display units Display units mm or inch for custom paper sizes or inch for custom paper sizes 0 mm Europe Asia 1 inch USA Accounting Counter Selects the counting method 001 0 mm 1 inch NOTE The counting method can be changed only once regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive 0 or 1 0 001 Counter Method CTL 0 Developments 1 Prints Paper Display 5047 Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD 0 or 1 0 1 CTL 0 OFF 1 ON 530 Service Tables 21 Apr 200
40. Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Separation DC FINE 1st Side Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side Special 1 ML Special 1 Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2753 and SP275 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 90 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2751 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side 2783 Special 1 MM Special 1 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment ENG 10 to 250 170 5 step 422 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2753 and SP275 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coeffici
41. Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 004 the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Last Correct Value BE BW Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value BO rough adjustment for the odd blue signal BW in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Last Correct Value BE BW Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value BO fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in BW the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Gain Adjustment Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red Last Correct Value RE ENG Color Last Correct Value RO ENG Color 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Last Correct Value RE ENG BW Last Correct Value RO 514 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 em 11 LLL Gain Adjustment Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green Last Correct Value GE Color Last Correct Value GO Color O to 255 0 1 digit step Last Correct Value GE BW Last Correct Value GO BW Gain Adjustment Displays the previous gain v
42. Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 document is sent to each destination of the SMB FTP server Due to restrictions on some devices if Scan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to a large number of destinations the count may be divided and counted separately For example if a 10 page document is sent to 200 addresses the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations for a total of 20 T Deliv PGS Svr 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications Deliv PGS Svr 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application he B W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the ocan Router server If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes the counts are not done The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server T Deliv PGS PC 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC with the Scan and LS applications Deliv PGS PC 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan to PC with the Scan application 664 Service Tables 21 Apr 200
43. 10 to 250 120 5 step ENG 408 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 OHP ML OHP ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2603 and SP26068 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2601 is multiplied by these SP values 002 Separation DC ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step OHP MM OHP MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2601 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step OHP MH OHP MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 10 to 250 110 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2601 is multiplied by these SP values 002 ENG 002 Separation DC ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step OHP HH OHP Pa
44. 267 X 8K M M M M M 390mm 195 x 16K SEF M M M M M 26 mm eam 200 mw fw ul f 846 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Size W x North America Europe Asia DT L Custom Com10 Env Monarch 3 875 x Env 7 5 Remarks A Supported the sensor detects the paper size M Supported the user specifies the paper size S 847 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Paper Exit 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher MF Main Frame Prf Proof Clr Clear Shf Shift Stp Staple SS Saddle Stitch 2 3 P 2 3 Holes Punch 4 P 4 Holes Punch N4P North Europe 4 Holes Punch 1000 sheet booklet finisher Paper Size W x L e or am se s eee ar Ton am pee Dv Iv fyr 297 x 420 A3 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y mm 210 x 297 A4 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y mm 297 x 210 A4 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y Y Y mm 148 x 210 A5 SEF Y Y Y Y Y mm 210 x 148 A5 LEF Y Y Y Y Y mm 105 x 148 A6 SEF Y Y Y mm 257 x 364 B4 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 30 Y Y Y mm 182 x 257 B5 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y mm 257 x 182 B5 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 50 Y Y Y mm 128 x 182 B6 SEF Y Y Y Y mm 848 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 1000 sheet booklet finisher Paper Size W x L se oe e 2P ar Ledger 11 x 17 Letter SEF 8 5 x 11 wer free fyre e mur pee frr Government Legal SEF 8 25 x 14 Half Letter SEF 9 5 X8 5 Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 Executive LEF 10 5 x 7 25 F SEF Foolscap SEF omr vivivivio j v eae ete fy fel e
45. A sheet of paper is placed in the by pass feed table The return time from the panel off mode is less than 30 seconds Operation System Fusing Temperature Switch 45V Heating roller 100 C Panel off On Pressure roller 130 C Auto Off Mode There are two Auto Off modes Off Stand by mode and Off mode The difference between Off Stand by mode and Off mode is the machine s condition when it enters the Auto Off mode 808 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Entering off stand by and off modes The machine enters the Off Stand by mode or Off Mode when one of the following is done The auto off timer runs out The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off If one or more of the following conditions exists the machine enters Off Stand by mode If none of these conditions exist the machine enters the Off Mode Error or SC condition Image data is stored in the memory During memory TX or polling RX he handset is off hook An original is in the ARDF The ARDF is open Off Stand by mode The system 5V is still supplied to all components When the machine detects a ringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job the 24V supply is activated At this time the machine automatically prints the incoming message or executes the print job Off Mode The system 5V supply also turns off However 5VE 5V for energy saver mode is still activated When the machine detects a ringing sign
46. Apr 21st 2006 Subject to change B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Read This First safety Notices Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury 1 Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components 4 The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm up period Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the copier starts operation 5 Theinside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands Health Safety Conditions 1 Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident it may cause temporary eye discomfort Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water If unsuccessful get medical attention 2 The copier which use high voltage power source can generate ozone gas High ozone density is harmful to human health Therefore the machine must be installed in a well ventilated room Observance of Electrical Safety Standards The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service re
47. Check the connectors to the front jogger motor and front jogger fence HP sensor 3 Check for problems in the jogger fence mechanism Replace the front jogger motor 5 Replace the front jogger fence HP sensor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Rear jogger motor error The machine does not detect that the rear jogger HP sensor is OFF for 40 ms after the rear jogger fence moved The machine does not detect that the rear jogger fence HP sensor is ON for 830 ms after the rear jogger fence returned to its home position 262 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective rear jogger motor Disconnected connector Overload to rear jogger motor Defective rear jogger fence HP sensor Turn the main power switch off and on Check the connectors to the rear jogger motor and rear jogger fence HP sensor Check for problems in the jogger fence mechanism Replace the rear jogger motor Replace the rear jogger fence HP sensor Paper exit unit lift up down error The paper exit unit HP sensor does not turn off for 650 msec after the paper exit unit has lifted down The paper exit unit HP sensor does not turn on for 650 msec after the paper exit unit has lifted up Disconnected harness Defective paper exit unit contact motor Defective paper exit unit HP sensor 1 Check the harness connection 2 Repla
48. DF Magnification Adj DF Magnification Adjustment 6017 Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for the ARDF 001 DF Magnification Adj 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 9o step Jogger Position Adj Adjusts the jogger position 587 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7 5 to 7 5 0 0 5 mm step North Europe 4Hole North Europe 2Hole 588 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Skew Correction Control Selects the skew correction control for each paper size These are only activated for B793 001 A3T SEF 002 B4T SEF 003 A4T SEF 004 A4Y LEF 005 B5T SEF 0 to 2 1 1 step 006 BSY LEF 0 No No skew correction 1 Roll k i 007 DLT T SEF oller Stop Skew Correction 2 Roller Reverse Skew Correction 008 LG T SEF 009 LT T SEF ENG 010 LT Y LEF ENG 011 12 x 18 ENG 6131 589 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 002 003 Jogger Fence Fine Adj This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack on the finisher stapling tray in the Booklet Finisher B793 The adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed A3T SEF BAT SEF AAT SEF 004 A4Y LEF 005 BST SEF ENG 4 5 to 1 5 0 1 step 006 B5Y LEF Value Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack 007 DLT T SEF Value Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack 008 LG T S
49. ENG 0 2 to 0 4 0 07 0 01 step Correction K2 Lower Limit Correction 014 ENG 0 75 to 1 35 1 0 01 step 017 ENG 0 to 1 0 25 0 001 step 3363 ID Pattern Timing Setting DFU ENG 0 2 to 0 4 0 07 0 01 step Adjusts the detection timing for the process 001 Scan YCMBk ENG control pattern 500 to 500 13 7 1 mm step Adjusts the timing when the paper transfer Paper Transfer Release ENG Start Time unit is kept away from the image transfer ATT Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 belt 0 to 2500 0 1 msec step Adjusts the processing timing for the 003 Delay Time process control pattern 0 to 2500 600 1 msec step Adjusts the processing timing for the pattern 004 MUSIC Delay Time that is used for the line position adjustment 2500 to 2500 300 1 msec step M A Calculation DFU 001 Correction Coefficient Bk ENG 0 5 to 2 0 1 04 0 01 step 002 Correction Coefficient M ENG 0 5 to 2 0 0 98 0 01 step 003 Correction Coefficient C ENG 0 5 to 2 0 1 11 0 01 step 004 Correction Coefficient Y ENG 0 5 to 2 0 0 91 0 01 step Fixed Supply Mode Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode Fixed Rate Bk ENG 001 O to 100 5 1 step These SPs are used only when SP3 044 is Fixed Rate C ENG set to 1 002 Fixed Rate M ENG 003 004 Fixed Rate Y E
50. ENG 0 to 130 20 1 uA step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 1 Bias FC 2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color mode Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 130 30 1 uA step 138 mm s 1st Side 416 Service Tables Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S1 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S1 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S2 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S3 Not used Special 1 Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2753 and SP275 are multiplied by these SP values ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 130 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG 100 to 600 160 5 step ENG 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper w
51. ENG Plain Switch Timing Trail Edge 2424 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain ENG 7100 to 0 0 2 mm step 138 mm s 1st Side 3 8 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Plain LL Plain Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2401 is multiplied by these SP values ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side 379 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Plain ML Plain Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environmen
52. Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side 003 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG 374 ENG 0 to 130 30 1 uA step Service Tables 2411 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side 21 Apr 2006 ENG Plain Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S1 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S1 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S2 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S3 ENG ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width ENG ENG ENG 100 to 600 130 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG 100 to 600 160 5 step 275 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG 100 to 600 200 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width Q 011 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG 375 ENG Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 oide S3 Paper Transfer FIN
53. Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Separation DC FINE 1st oide ENG Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side OPC Drum Brake Time Adjusts the time when the OPC drum motor reverses from normal rotation after job end DFU ENG 001 Plain ENG Thick 1 ENG 100 to 1500 500 10 msec step 002 003 Thick 2 amp FINE ENG OPC Drum Reverse Time 2902 Adjusts the time for how long the OPC drum motor reverses after job end DFU 001 All BW ENG 0 to 200 40 10 msec step 002 All FC ENG Image Transfer Roller Brake Time Adjusts the time when the image transfer belt motor reverses from normal 444 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 rotation after job end DFU 003 Plain ENG 004 Thick 1 ENG 100 to 1500 500 10 msec step 005 Thick 2 amp FINE ENG OPC Drum Reverse Time 2904 i Adjusts the time for how long the image transfer belt motor reverses after job end DFU 003 ENG 0 to 200 30 10 msec step ACS Setting FC to Bk Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color 2907 PCUs This SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCUs when the number of B W image printouts reaches the number of sheets specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in the full color mode If this SP is set to 0 the image transfer belt does not move away 001 Continuous Bk P
54. Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 006 Execute Low M 007 Execute High C 008 Execute Medium C 009 Execute Low C 010 Execute High Y 011 Execute Medium Y 012 Execute Low Y Main Scan Length Detection Target DFU 001 Execute Bk 002 Execute M i Executes the target value for the main scan length detection 003 Execute C 004 Execute Y Displays adjusts the target value for the main scan magnification correction of the line position adjustment After replacing the laser optics housing unit input the standard value for Bk provided with the new unit For details see Laser Optics Housing Unit in the Replacement Adjustment section It is not necessary to input the values for the other colors these are automatically adjusted after doing the line position adjustment Bk ENG 0 to 266667 249449 1 sub dot step M ENG ENG ENG 358 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Main Scan Length Detection DFU 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Selection Enables or disables the main scan length detection for the laser Paper Interval O to 999 1 1 sec step Adjusts the interval of the main scan length detection for the laser ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step Freq Selection 0 D phase 1 D phase and PLL Selects the correction method of the main scan length detection for the laser Line Position Adj Paper Int Mag Subdot Bk ENG Paper
55. Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 1006 Sample Locked Print 0 Linked 1 On Enables and disables the document server When you select 0 the document server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5 967 When you select 1 the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5 967 Data Recall Recalls a set of gamma settings This can be either a the factory setting b the previous setting or c the current setting 11014 ACC Resolution T 1102 Selects the printing mode Selects the printing mode resolution for the printer gamma adjustment for the printer gamma adjustment 2400x600 Photo 1800x600 Photo 600 x 600 Photo 2400x600 Text 1800x600 Text 600x600 Text Test Page Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment 1103 1 Color Gray Scale 1103 2 Color Pattern Gamma Adjustment Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu 705 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 CTL 0 to 30 15 1 step Save Tone Control Value Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj menu item as the current setting Before the machine stores the new current setting it moves the data currently stored as the current setting to the previous setting memory storage location 1105 1 Save Tone Control Value moe Toner Limit 706 Service Tables 21 Apr
56. The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism The shutter F on the pump opens when the development unit is placed in the machine At the same time the pump opens the shutter G in the development unit When both shutters are open toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump The shutter springs pull and close the shutter when the development unit is removed TT Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Toner Cartridge RFID Radio Frequency ID A Each toner cartridge of this machine has a RFID chip A This stores the total on time of the toner supply clutch This is used to calculate the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge The chip is also used to detect whether the cartridge is installed if the cartridge is not installed the machine does not detect a signal from the memory chip The RFID transmits its data to the RFID antenna board B without any contact 778 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Waste Toner Collection Toner Collection Path and Drive From PCU a rc i D The used toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the toner collection duct from the four openings A B C D at the front of the PCUs The toner collection auger E in the duct transports this used toner towards the toner collection bottle F The coil E is driven by the toner transport motor G The openings and PCUs correspond as f
57. The procedure is as follows 1 The machine agitates the developer for 30 seconds 2 The machine adjusts Vent control voltage for TD sensor so that V TD sensor output becomes within 2 7 0 2 3 The machine keeps this as Viger if it is successful SC372 to SC375 is displayed if it fails sequentially 3 times The result of developer initialization can be checked with SP3 014 inside the toner transport tube at installation Then the machine does the process control self During developer initialization the machine forcibly supplies toner because there is no toner check 152 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 scanning Overview IN2 3 4 5 6 7 SSS mur M i ES D 3 wu mo mI ga PE 11 10 9 8 6 Exposure glass 1 Scanner HP sensor 7 Scanner motor 8 Sensor board unit SBU 9 Lens Block 10 Original length sensor 2 ADF exposure glass 3 2nd scanner 2nd carriage 4 Scanner lamp 5 1st scanner 1st carriage 11 Original width sensor The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the light emitted from the scanner lamp The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensor board by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners The sensor board converts the CCD analog signals into digital signals When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass the scanner motor pulls the 1st and 2nd scanner
58. The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 026 Center Temp 2 Duplex 30 to 0 0 1 C step 226 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is 226 mm or more in duplex mode The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 027 Ends Temp 2 Duplex 30 to 0 0 1 C step 226 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is 226 mm or more in duplex mode The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 027 Control Time 1 Duplex 0 to 250 0 1 sec step 226 Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 022 and 023 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper Control Time 2 Duplex 0 to 250 0 1 sec step 226 Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 024 and 025 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding the paper 1117 Idling Time After Heater OFF 329 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 After Ready 0 t010 4 1 sec step DFU temperature Specifies the idling time without the lamp on after reaching the ready After Job End O t010 4 1 sec step 2 eacifies the idling time without the lamp on after job end This idling preve
59. Tray Upper Sensor o o 6141 7 E Not upper limit Upper limit Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Sensor ol uu 61418 Not lower limit Lower limit Stack Near limit Sensor Not home u 6141 9 Belt Sensor P Home position position 6141 10 Staple Slide HP Sensor Not home position Jogger Plate HP Sensor Not home 7 6141 11 7 Home position Jogger Position Sensor position Pick Roller Sensor Not home 7 614112 Home position Pick Up Roller Unit HP Sensor position Not home u 6141 13 Staple HP Sensor 7 Home position position Staple near E 6141 14 Staple Near Empty Sensor i Staple remaining empty 685 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Staple Self Prime Sensor Staple not 6141 15 Staple detected End Fence Detection Sensor detected Staple Cover Sensor Front Cover Switch 6141 17 Table 1 Paper Height Sensor 0 Deactivated 1 Activated actuator inside sensor Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2 Near end Almost empty Table 2 Paper Size Switch Tray 2 Switch 1 is used for tray set detection 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models Switch Location 11 x 17 SEF A3 SEF A3 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF B4 SEF 8 5 x 14 SEF A4 SEF 686 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 mme B5 LEF 10 5 x 7 25 LEF m 1 The machine detects either 11 x 17 SEF or A3 SEF depending on the setting of SP 1 181 003 2 The machine detects eit
60. Tray upper limit sensor turns on even the stack height sensor detects the home position of the output tray Tray upper limit sensor does not turn 303 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Jam Code m Display Description SP Display off after the output tray has lifted down Both tray upper limit and stack near limit sensor turn on when the output tray lifts down Stack near limit sensor does not turn off after the output tray has lifted up Finisher Belt Lift Belt lift sensor does not turn on at power 7504 169 Solenoid on initialization Finisher Exit No The machine does not get paper exit 7504 230 EE Response signal from the finisher Finisher The machine does not detect the 7504 231 Communication Error finisher Paper Size Code 304 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Electrical Component Defects Sensors y LN The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the BICU sensor Name Active CN Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Open Cover is Open displayed Right cover open Shorted cannot be detected Open CN213 SC400 Shorted Jam A an 17 CN212 2 e Right Cover Open CN211 35 Switch ID Sensor Registration Sensor n L Shorted Jam A B Jam1 Open H CN212 5 S C380 Shorted Drum Gear Position Open H CN212 8 S C380 Sensor CMY Shorted Drum Gear Position Sensor K CN214 26 Shorted C293 CN214 29 Shorted C290 CN232 A16 Toner end cannot be Open
61. Vi Drum potential at the strongest exposure to adjust this the machine adjusts the laser power At the same time the machine also determines VREF Reference TD sensor output used for toner supply control If potential control is disabled SP3 041 001 is set to 0 Vp and Vg are fixed by the following SP mode settings SP2 005 for Vp SP2 229 for Vp If LD power control is disabled SP3 041 002 is set to 0 the LD power is fixed by the following SP mode setting P2 221 for Vi Process Control Self Check This machine uses the process control self check method to do the potential control The machine uses seven types of process control self check These are categorized according to their execution timing The counter SP3 510 is reset if a self check is done except for a forced self check AT Temperature change between the temperature of the previous process control and the 745 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 current temperature ARH RH Relative Humidity change between the relative humidity of the previous process control and the current relative humidity AAH AH Absolute Humidity change between the absolute humidity of the previous process control and the current absolute humidity 1 2 Manual execution forced This is done when SP3 011 1 is used Initial This starts automatically when the power is turned on or when the machine recovers from energy saver mode This is do
62. When a fax is received to fax memory the F counter increments but the L counter does not the document server is not used Afax broadcast counts as one job for the F counter the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations If one transmission generates an error then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been completed A printed fax report counts as one job for the F counter The F counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving When a copy job on the document server is printed SP8022 also increments and when a print job stored on the document server is printed SP8024 also increments When an original is both copied and stored on the document server the C and L counters both increment When a print job is stored on the document server only the L counter increments When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server only the L counter increments When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server only the L counter increments When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored the L counter increments When the customer prints a report user code list for example the O counter increments However for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application the
63. generated by GW controller errors 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 003 Any SC Error 0 to 65535 0 1 step Turns on off the debug save for jam errors Jam 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for functions that use common memory on the e d controller board 002 Controller SC Error 9999999 to 9999999 0 578 Service Tables SMTP POP3 IMAP4 CTL Partial Mail Receive Timeout 1 to 168 72 010 020 025 21 Apr 2006 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance 0 to 1 1 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail 0 No 1 Yes SMTP Auth From Field Replacement 0 to 1 0 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated 0 No From item not switched 1 Yes From item switched SMTP Auth Direct Setting 00r 1 0 Selects the authentication method for SMPT Bit switch e Bit 0 LOGIN e Bit 1 PLAIN e Bit 2 CRAM MD5 e Bit 3 DIGEST MD5 e Bit 4 to 7 Not used 579 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode 5866 E mail Alert Not Used E
64. 0 Setup Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit 001 Option Setup Press EXECUTE on the operation panel Then turn the machine off and on 5881 Fixed Phrase Block Erasing semen WIM Coa ass Web Image Monitor Settings Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor or disclose the functions of web image monitor 0 OFF 1 ON Bit Meaning Document Server ACC CTL 0 Forbid all document server access 1 Ctrl 1 Forbid user mode access 1 2 Forbid print function 1 3 Forbid fax TX 1 581 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 4 Forbid scan sending 1 5 Forbid downloading 1 6 Forbid delete 1 7 Reserved Permit ROM Updating DFU 5886 This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated 0 or 1 0 1 step 001 CTL 0 ON 1 OFF Plug amp Play Maker Model Name Plug amp Play Name Selection 5907 specifies the manufacturer and model name These names are registered in the NVRAM If the NVRAM becomes defective these names should be re registered 0 to 11 0 1 step FA RICOH Aficio MP C3000 RICOH Aficio MP C2500 SAVIN C2525 SAVIN C3030 Gestetner MPC 2500 DSc525 Gestetner MPC 3000 DSc530 NRG MP C2500 NRG MP C3000 Infotec ISC2525 9 infotec ISC3030 10 LANIER MP C2500 LD425c 11 LANIER MP C3000 LD430c 001 Plug Play ENG CON O o BP C N a O Switchover Permission Time Print Application Timer 3 to 30 3 1 second
65. 1 g step 004 Toner Replenishment Y 005 008 Displays the consumed amount of each color toner 005 Toner Consumption Bk 006 Toner Consumption M O to 3000 0 0 001 g step 007 Toner Consumption C 008 Toner Consumption Y 009 012 Displays the remaining amount of each color toner These are calculated by the operating times of the toner supply pumps 009 Toner Remaining Bk ENG 010 Toner Remaining M ENG 50000 to 600 0 0 001 g step 011 Toner Remaining C ENG 012 Toner Remaining Y ENG 459 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the threshold of toner near end for each color The toner near end message appears on the LCD when the remaining toner amount reaches this threshold When one of these SPs SP3 101 009 to 012 or 032 to 035 reaches this threshold toner near end is detected 017 020 013 016 0 to 600 50 1 g step Cartridge Error Threshold Bk 017 Cartridge Error Threshold M 018 750000 to 0 50000 1 g step Cartridge Error Threshold C 019 Cartridge Error Threshold Y 020 Delta Vt Threshold 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 V step 021 This SP is the threshold for toner end Delta Vt Vt Vtref When both this SP and SP3 101 026 occur at same time toner end is determined Displays the total delta Vt Vt Vtref value for each color 022 025 These are calculated by pixel counting 022 Delta Vt Sum Bk ENG 023 Delta Vt Sum M E
66. 2131071 to 131071 63398 1 bit step 028 ch 2 Filter Rear bO ENG 7131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 029 ch 2 Filter Rear b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step 030 ch 2 Filter Rear b2 ENG 2 131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 031 Q Format Selection ENG 0 to 3 3 1 step MUSIC Threshold Setting Line Position Adjustment Threshold Setting DFU ch 0 ID sensor at rear ch 1 ID sensor at center ch 2 ID sensor at front 001 ch O 1st ENG 002 ch 0 2nd ENG 0 5 to 3 1 2 0 1 V step 003 ch 0 3rd ENG 004 ch 0 4th ENG 005 ch 1 tst ENG 0 5 to 3 1 2 0 1 V step 006 ch 1 2nd ENG 007 ch 1 3rd ENG 361 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 008 ch 1 4th 009 ch 2 1st 010 ch 2 2nd 0 5 to 3 1 2 0 1 V step 011 ch 2 3rd 012 ch 2 4th MUSIC Condition Set Line Position Adjustment Condition Setting Dor 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Auto Execution Enables disables the automatic line position adjustment Page Job End BW FC 0 to 999 500 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing mode after job end Page Job End FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode after job end Page Interrupt BW FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for
67. 32 33 34 35 36 40 42 43 44 No HDD available for stamp data download Data incorrect for continuous download Data incorrect after download interrupted Incorrect SD card version Module mismatch Correct module is not on the SD card Module mismatch Module on SD card is not for this machine Cannot write module Cause other than E34 E35 Engine module download failed Operation panel module download failed Stamp data module download failed Controller module download failed 21 Apr 2006 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for the download the re start the procedure Execute the recovery procedure for the intended module download then repeat the installation procedure Incorrect ROM data on the SD card or data is corrupted SD update data is incorrect Acquire the correct data Japan Overseas OEM etc then install again SD update data is incorrect The data on the SD card is for another machine Acquire correct update data then install again SD update data is incorrect The data on the SD card is for another machine Acquire correct update data then install again Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the BICU board Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the LCDC Replace the u
68. Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2655 411 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 1st Side 0 to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Thick 3 1st Page ENG Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2655 Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side ENG O to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Thick 3 2nd Page ENG Thick 3 Switch Timing Lead Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Thick 3 1st Side ENG Separation DC Thick 3 1st Page ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side ENG Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 2nd Page Thick 3 Trailing Edge Correction Thick 3 Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values 412 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2657 Paper Transfer Thick 3
69. CN232 B1 detected CN232 B4 Toner end is detected CN232 B7 Shorted when there is enough 305 Shutter Positioning Sensor Open Shutter Positioning Sensor Close Toner End Sensor Y Toner End Sensor C Toner End Sensor M Toner End Sensor K Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No S11 S12 S13 S16 S14 S17 S15 S18 S19 SWO2 522 523 Sensor Name Sensor Board Name Active Condition oymptom CN233 15 SC443 Open Jam A Jam3 11 CN281 2 Shorted Jam A B Jam1 Open CN281 5 Shorted CN281 8 Open SC501 SC502 Shorted Open Jam A Jam4 12 CN281 11 Shorted Jam A B Jam1 Open CN282 2 5 Shorted Open CN282 17 Shorted CN283 A1 Image Transfer Belt Rotation Sensor Paper Feed Sensor 1 Paper end is not detected when there is no paper in the paper Paper End tray Sensor 1 2 Paper end is detected when there is paper in the paper tray Paper Lift Sensor 1 2 Paper Feed Sensor 2 Remaining paper Tray 1 Paper Height volume on the LCD is Sensor 1 2 wrong Tray 1 is not detected when tray 1 is set Tray 1 Set Switch Tray 1 is detected when tray 1 is not set By pass Paper Size Open Paper size error Shorted Sensor A2 A4 A5 By pass Paper L CN283 A7 paveron the by pass Open Paper on the by pass 306 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No 524 525 526 527 528 529 530
70. Counter Toner Bottle Y 7934 Displays the toner bottle information for Y 615 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7934 2 Cartridge Ver 7934 3 Brand ID 7934 4 Area ID 7934 5 Product ID 7934 6 Color ID 7934 7 Maintenance ID 7934 8 New Product Information 934 9 Recycle Counter 7934 10 Date 7934 11 Serial No 7934 12 Toner Remaining 7934 13 EDP Code 7934 14 End History 7934 15 Refill Information Attachment Total Counter 7934 16 Attachment Color 7934 17 Counter 7934 18 End Total Counter 7934 19 End Color Counter 7934 20 Attachment Date 7934 21 End Date 7935 Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 Bk 61 O Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for Bk 7935 2 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for Bk 7935 5 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for Bk 7935 8 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for Bk 7935 11 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter 7935 12 ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for Bk 7935 14 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7935 15 Counter ENG Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 M 7936 2 I Attachment Date ENG Displays the tone
71. Counts the number of occurrences 0 to 65 535 when dust was detected on the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter Counting is done only if SP4 020 1 ADF Scan Glass Dust Check is switched on 7852 1 Dust Detection Counter 0 to 9999 1 step Dust Detection Clear O to 9999 1 step Counter Replacement Counter 7853 Displays the PM parts replacement number 853 1 PCU Bk CTL 0to 255 1 step 607 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7853 15 Fusing Unit 7853 16 Paper Transfer Unit 7853 17 Toner Collection Bottle Records the location where a problem is detected in the program The data stored in this SP is used for problem analysis DFU 7901 2 Number of Lines CTL Prev Unit PM Counter Page or Rotations Unit Color Dev Development Unit Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units 7906 1 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 page step Page Development Unit Bk Page Development Unit M Page Development Unit C Page Development Unit Y 608 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 7906 9 Page Developer Bk 7906 10 Page Developer M 7906 11 Page Developer C 7906 12 Page Developer Y 7906 13 Page Image Transfer 7906 14 Page Cleaning Unit 7906 15 Page Fusing Unit Page Paper Transfer 7906 16 Unit Page Toner Collection 7906 17 Bottle Displays the number o
72. ENG 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF 5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 accounting device disconnection If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to 1 Enable the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops 0 or 1 0 1 step 001 ENG 0 Disable 1 Enable 536 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers A value moves the page number positions to the left edge A value moves the page number positions to the right edge Duplex Printout Right Left 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Position Duplex Printout High Low 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Position Set Time Adjusts the RTC real time clock time setting for the local time zone Examples For Japan 9 GMT enter 540 9 hours x 60 min DOM 540 Tokyo NA 300 New York EU 60 Paris CH 480 Peking TW 480 Taipei AS 480 Hong Kong 002 Time Difference 1440 to 1440 Area 1 min step 5307 Summer Time 0to 1 NA EU ASIA 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled NA and EUR 1 ASIA 0 Setting Enables or disables the summer time mode Make sure that both SP5 307 3 and 4 are correctly set Otherwise this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to 1 537 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode There are 8 digits in this SP For months 1 to 9 the 0 cannot be input i
73. H and I Requires 1000 sheet finisher B408 J one from E and F LCT B801 One from the two Two tray paper feed unit B800 1 bin tray B790 Shift tray B791 One from the two Bridge unit B227 859 Specifications G USB 2 0 Ethernet IEEE 1284 Wireless LAN Bluetooth USB Host IEEE 1394 File Format Converter Hard Disk Drive Copy Data Security Unit 21 Apr 2006 Machine Call uz me You can only install one of these B826 17 OR at a time You can only install one of these NENNEN EN 860 at a time ut A C E F G Specifications 4 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 PostScript 3 B822 04 You can only install one of these Data Overwrite Security Unit 8735 18 18 in the SD slot 2 at a time PictBridge 8824 01 01 Browser Unit B828 01 mo In SD slot 3 861 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Optional Equipment ARDF Simplex Weight 40 to 128 g m 10 to 34 Ib A3 to AB DLT to HLT Duplex Weight 52 to 105 g m 14 to 28 Ib Table Capacity 50 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib Original Standard Position Rear left corner Separation Feed belt and separation roller Original Transport Roller transport Original Feed Order From the top original Supported Magnification Ratios Fax Black amp white 48 9 to 200 Power Source DC 24V 5V from the scanner unit Power Consumption 50 W or less Dimensions W x D x H 550 mm x 491 mm x 120 m
74. Letter SEF 1 ON Legal SEF Fusing Idling Fusing Idling Adjustment Extra Idling Time 0 to 60 0 1 sec step Not used Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed Idling Speed 0 to 3 1 1 step Not used In this machine only the selection of 1 77 mm s is effective Idling Start Temp 0 to 180 100 1 deg step 319 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Specifies the threshold temperature to start the idling Forced Idling Stop ENG 0 or 1 1 DFU Enables or disables the forced idling stop Forced Idling Stop Temp ENG Specifies the threshold temperature to stop the idling Minimum Idling Time ENG Minimum Idling Time ENG 0 to 10 0 1 sec step 015 Recovery Specifies the minimum idling time at recovery 016 Extra Idling Time L Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed for each 017 Extra Idling Time H ENG l environment 0 to 60 0 1 sec step 018 Extra Idling Time M ENG Each environment is determined with SP 1112 001 and 002 1105 Fusing Temperature Fusing Temperature Adjustment Printing Mode Roller Type Color Simplex Duplex Roller Type gt Center and Ends Heating roller Pressure gt Pressure roller Paper Type Plain Thin Thick OHP Middle Thick Special Fusing Ready Temp 120 to 180 170 1 C step 001 Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition Fusing Ready Offset
75. Low Speed M ENG Low Speed C ENG Low Speed Y ENG Polygon Rotation Time Adjusts the time of the polygon motor rotation DFU 001 Warming Up ENG O to 60 10 1 sec step 002 2107 001 Job End ENG Image Parameter DFU Image Gamma Flag ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 340 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Shading Correction Flag ENG 00r 1 1 1 step Test Pattern Generates the test pattern using COPY Window tab in the LCD 0 to 23 0 1 step 0 None 1 dot line pattern Vertical 2 dot line pattern Vertical 1 dot line pattern Horizontal 2 dot line pattern Horizontal 1 dot grid pattern Vertical 1 dot grid pattern Horizontal 1 dot grid pattern Fine 1 dot grid pattern Rough 1 dot slant pattern Fine 1 dot slant pattern Rough 003 Pattern Selection 1 dot pattern 2 dot pattern 4 dot pattern 1 dot trimming pattern None Cross stitch main scan Belt pattern Horizontal Belt pattern Vertical Checkered flag Gray scale Vertical Gray scale Horizontal None Solid Specifies the color for the test pattern 1 to 4 1 1 step 1 All colors 2 Magenta 3 Yellow 4 Cyan 005 Color Selection 006 Density Bk Specifies the color density for the test 341 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 007 Density M pattern 0 to 15 15 1 step 008 Density C 0 Lightest den
76. Panel off timer User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Panel Off Timer Auto off timer User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Auto Off Timer 807 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Panel Off Mode Entering the panel off mode The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done The panel off timer runs out The Clear Mode Energy Saver Key is held down for one second If the value in the panel off timer is larger than that in the auto off timer the machine goes into the auto off mode At this time it does not go into the panel off mode To make the panel off mode effective specify a value smaller than the values in the auto off timer What happens in panel off mode When the machine is in the panel off mode each of the fusing lamps are kept at the temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page The operation panel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the Power LED If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program e g to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC the temperature of each fusing lamp rises to print the data Return to stand by mode The machine returns to stand by mode if one of the following is done The Clear Mode Energy Saver Mode key is pressed Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed An original is placed in the ADF The ADF is lifted
77. Power Requirements arrnrrnnrnannnnrnnrnnrnannnarnnrnnnnannnnnnernasnnsnnnnnernasnnnnnernannannnernernnennsnneenn 2 Optional Unit Combinations rrrareranorannnernnneranerannnnrnnnenunernnenasnnnennenunenunnnennnernnnennsennennn 3 MENN 3 Controler E oed RNC Em m 3 CODIE IDSA O EEE EN EE 5 Power Sockets for Peripherals ccccccceccsseteecceeceseteeeceeeseeeeseeeuerseeteeegeteeeteeeseeeaeeees 9 lwuclciesEmzei m 6 PEC SO CC EEE ENE 7 Installation Procedure ccccccceccecccececeeceecseeceeceeeceeecaeeceeeauesaeesseeseeseeeseeseeecuesaueseeesas 9 MOVING NE Machina RR UU 15 Transporting the Machine RE T TM 16 Paper Feed Unit B800 Lee 17 Accessory CMCC EE 17 AP Proced ra mm 18 LOTBO T eon E epee T 21 ACCES Ge EEE 21 Installation Procedure cccccceccseccececececeecaueceeeceecceeceeesaeesaeecuesauesaeesaeeeeesseeseeeseeeaaes 22 Auto Reverse Document Feeder B789 cccccecccceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeesseeeaeesenaees 25 COMM OMS TE COG aaraa n 25 installation OCC US REN T UT 26 1 Bin Tray Unit B790 ccccccccseccseeccececeeseeeceeecanecaueesaeeceesagecaeesaeesaueseusesaeecueessensees 29 B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Component CIIBOK EEE Koala teat mie itd D 29 Installation Procedure ssssssessssssessseeneennen nennen nenne nenne
78. Replacement and Adjustment section Skew Adjustment Display Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor M ENG C ENG 00 to 50 0 1 pulse step Y ENG ID Sensor Check Result DFU Displays the results of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment Bk ENG 0 to 1024 1 step M ENG C ENG Y ENG 343 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 ID Sensor Check Result Ave DFU Displays the average result values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment Bk ENG ENG ENG ENG 0 to 5 0 0 01V step 005 Front ENG 006 Center ENG Rear ENG ID Sensor Check Result DFU Displays the maximum result values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Maximum Bk ENG 0 to 5 0 0 01V step 002 Maximum M ENG 003 Maximum C ENG 004 Maximum Y ENG 005 Maximum Front ENG 344 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 ID Sensor Check Result DFU Displays the minimum result values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001
79. Side ENG Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Side Thick 1 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in ENG 2502 black and white mode Paper Transfer Thick 1 ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step 77 mm s 1st Side 392 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Not used Side ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step Paper Transfer FINE ENG Not used 2nd Side Thick 1 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color mode Paper Transfer Thick 1 ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step 77 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Not used Side Paper Transfer FINE ENG Not used 2nd Side Thick 1 Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step each paper size SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S1 003 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG 393 ENG Service Tables Side S1 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st S
80. Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode Number of jobs started in Booklet mode If the machine is in staple 8 06x 4 Booklet mode the Staple counter also increments Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode 8 06x 5 Z Fold and set for folding Z fold Number of jobs started in Punch mode When Punch is set for a 8 06x 6 Punch print job the P counter increments See SP8 064 6 634 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 8 06x 7 Reserved Not used T Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages 8 071 8 072 8 073 8 074 8 075 8 076 8 077 in the job regardless of which application was used C Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job F Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job P Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job S Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job L Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the document server mode window at the operation pane
81. Y Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction 009 012 Average M is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3251 018 009 Average M Bk 010 Average M M O to 100 5 0 01 step 011 Average M C 012 Average M Y Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction 013 016 Average L is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3 251 019 O to 100 5 0 01 step 017 019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3 251 005 to 016 024 027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color 024 Latest Coverage Bk ENG 0 to 100 0 01 step 472 ENG ENG ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 025 Latest Coverage M ENG 026 Latest Coverage C ENG 027 Latest Coverage Y ENG ID Sensor Detection Value Vofset 3311 Displays the ID sensor regular offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 001 Voffset reg Bk 002 Voffset reg M 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 003 Voffset reg C 004 Voffset reg Y 005 007 Displays the ID sensor diffusion offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 005 Voffset dif M 006 Voffset dif C ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 007 Voffset dif Y 008 010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments 008 Voffset TM Front ENG 009 Voffset TM Center ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V
82. board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for 022 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Gain Adjustment Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red 001 Factory Setting RE Color ENG 002 Factory Setting RO Color ENG 0 to 255 0 1 digit step 003 Factory Setting RE BW ENG 004 Factory Setting RO BW ENG Gain Adjustment Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green 001 Factory Setting GE Color ENG 002 Factory Setting GO Color ENG 0 to 255 0 1 digit step 003 Factory Setting GE BW ENG 004 Factory Setting GO BW ENG Gain Adjustment Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue 001 Factory Setting BE Color ENG 002 Factory Setting BO Color ENG 0 to 255 0 1 digit step 003 Factory Setting BE BW ENG ENG
83. fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal 506 Service Tables 001 Latest GE Color 002 Latest GO Color 003 GE Color 004 Latest GO Color 21 Apr 2006 Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 507 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 4625
84. if the NVRAM on the old BICU is defective Make sure you print out the SMC reports SP Mode Data and Logging Data before you replace the NVRAM ANCAUTION Keep NVRAMSs away from any objects that can cause static electricity Static electricity can damage NVRAM data Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BICU Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM slot with the half moon C pointing to the left Make sure that the DIP switch settings on the old BICU are the same for the new BICU when Do not change the DIP switches on the BICU in the field 193 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 IOB Rear cover i Rear Cover PSU bracket W RPSU IOB A P x 7 ALL GP s Open the controller box W Controller Box Cover IOB bracket B x 5 x 2 ver omo N ut PSU 1 Rear cover Rear Cover 2 Loosen the seven screws 3 Slide the PSU box cover A to the left side and then remove it 194 Replacement and Adjustment 4 PSU B x 7 All EFs 3l x 3 ja T iier 3 Diil 7 YA L d E L 1 a ri k d VA F Wh 1 I 5 PSU bracket C 2 x 4 23 x 10 SIO Scanner In Out Board 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 21 Apr 2006 195 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 2 Remove the screw of the SBU harness A 3 x 2 3 SIO board with bracket B x 4 All Es High Voltage Supply Board
85. is as follows VSG 4 0 x 0 5 Volts 147 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 This calibration compensates for the transfer belt s condition and the ID sensor condition For example dirt on the surface of the belt or ID sensor VSG adjustment is always done during initial process control But at other times it is only done if the VSG adjustment counter SP3 510 007 is more than the value set with SP3 511 007 default 500 during a job or at job end SC400 is displayed if VSG is out of adjustment range sequentially 3 times SP3 321 Forced VSG Adjustment for each sensor SP 3 325 Shows the results of the VSG adjustment automatic or forced VSG adjustment 7 digits Front Bk C Center M Y Rear Step 2 ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation 12mm 4 CODE NE First the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until the fluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0 3V Second the machine makes the grade patterns see the diagram This 10 grade pattern is made in black yellow cyan and magenta 40 squares in total he machine first makes the first five grades for each color the first 20 squares and then the second five grades for each color the remaining 20 squares The patterns are made by changing the development bias and charge roller voltage The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always the same But the development potential changes fo
86. see PSU in the Replacement and Adjustment section Install the mechanical counter for Bk A in the right frame of the machine Connect the harness B to the mechanical counter for Bk Route the harness as shown with clamps and then connect it to CN260 on the IOB Install the mechanical counter for Full Color C in the bracket D The mark E should be at the lower side as shown in the diagram Connect the harness to the mechanical counter for Full Color Attach the bracket D to the frame of the IOB 2 x 1 Reassemble the machine Plug in the power cord and turn on the main power switch Enter the SP mode Set SP5987 001 to 1 ON Exit the SP mode and then turn the machine off and on 55 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Key Counter Bracket Installation Procedure eS mM T Open the right door Rear cover A x 7 Scanner right cover B x 2 Cut off the part C of the scanner right cover Punch out the small hole D using a screwdriver Hold the key counter plate nuts E on the inside of the key counter bracket F and insert the key counter holder G Secure the key counter holder to the bracket Fx 2 Install the key counter cover H x 2 56 Installation 21 Apr 2006 9 Connect the harness to the connector I inside the machine 10 Install the key counter 11 Reassemble the machine 57 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Key Counter Interface Unit Installation Procedure
87. step 002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode and 582 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 the operation panel keys have not been used before another application can gain control of the display Copy Server Set 0 ON 1 OFF Function Enables and disables the document server This is a security measure that prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD After changing this setting you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting Cherry Server 5974 Specifies which version of ScanRouter Lite or Full is installed 00r 1 0 CTL 001 Cherry Server 0 Lite 1 Full Device Setting 5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller Use this SP to enable and disable these features In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the controller board these SP codes must be set to 1 0 to 2 0 1 step 00 002 0 Disable 1 Enable 2 Function limitation When the Function limitation is set On board NIC is limited only for the NRS or LDAP NT authentication Other network applications than NRS or 1 On Board NIC LDAP NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to 2 Even though you can change the initial settings of those network applications the settings do not work On Board USB 0 or 1 0 1 step 583 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5987 Counter Falsifica
88. tell the customer this setting must be enabled selected before you do the installation procedure 19 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Seal Check and Removal A TAY A CAUTION You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation 1 Check the box seals A on each corner of the box Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks B when you remove each seal In this condition they cannot be attached to the box again 76 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure m You must install the data overwrite security unit in SD Card slot 2 However the Postscript option and the PictBridge option are also installed in SD Card slot 2 You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the postscript or PictBridge option installed and you want to install the data overwrite security unit 1 Turn off the main power switch if the machine is turned on 2 Disconnect the network cable if the NIB is installed 3 Remove the slot cover A of SD card
89. the handle and grips may be damaged 1 F Z ik TH ih N 2 Grasp the handle A and grips B of the machine 3 Lift the copier and install it on the LCT C 22 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Remove tray 2 of the machine Fasten the spring washer screw D using the cutout in the securing bracket E as a tool Reinstall tray 2 7 Attach the securing brackets E M4x10 2 x teach One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool the cutout F is used in step 6 But the cutout G is for attaching the tray heater Therefore attach the securing brackets E after installing the tray heater if you will install the tray heater 23 Installation 21 Apr 2006 9 Attach the front stand cover I right stand cover J and rear stand cover K to the correct sides of the machine M3x6 amp x 2 each 10 Load paper into the LCT 11 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 12 Check the LCT operation and copy quality 24 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Auto Reverse Document Feeder B789 Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list l 1 25 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the copi
90. 001 002 003 004 Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red Latest RE Color Latest RE BW Latest RO BW Latest RO Color m E 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green Latest GE Color Latest GO Color Latest GE BW m 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Latest GO BW Gain Adjustment Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue Latest BE Color Latest BO Color Latest BE BW n 0 to 255 0 1 digit step Latest BO BW Black Level Adj Loop Black Level Adjustment Loop Counter Displays the black level adjustment time for each mode 509 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 The black level adjustment is done twice The 1st adjustment decides the reference value for the 2nd adjustment 2p Adj 1 Number Coor 1st adjustment T ad 1Number BW gt 0 to 20 0 1 step pos Ad 2NumberCoor 2nd adjustment T AdzNmbeBW o 0 to 20 0 1 step White Level Adj Loop White Level Adjustment Loop Counter 4641 Displays the white level adjustment time for each mode 001 Adj Number Color m 0 to 20 0 1 step 002 Adj Number BW m Scan Adj Time Out Error Displays the result of the AGC adjustment If the AGC adjustment fails C141 B W mode or SC142 Color mode occurs 001 Black Offset Correction 1 D 0 or 1 0 1 step dd a nm 0 O
91. 002 Plain M ENG 0 to 700 550 1 V step 003 Plain C ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 009 Thick 2 amp FINE Bk ENG 0 to 700 550 1 V step 010 Thick 2 amp FINE M ENG 011 Thick 2 amp FINE C ENG 488 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Charge DC Control Display Plain 138 mm sec Thick 2 and Fin 77 mm sec Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color 001 Plain Bk 002 Plain M 0 to 2000 690 1 V step 003 Plain C 004 Plain Y 009 Thick 2 amp FINE Bk 010 Thick 2 amp FINE M 0 to 2000 690 1 V step 011 Thick 2 amp FINE C 012 Thick 2 amp FINE Y Charge AC Control Display Plain 138 mm sec Thick 2 and Fin 77 mm sec Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each color 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain M ENG 0 to 3 1 75 0 01 kV step 003 Plain C ENG 004 Plain Y ENG LD Power Control Display Plain 138 mm sec Thick 2 and Fin 77 mm sec Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment 489 Service Tables 001 002 003 004 012 21 Apr 2006 0 to 200 100 1 step 0 to 200 100 1 step 3710 HST Concentration Control Set TD Sensor Toner Concentration Control Setting Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory which is in the TD sensor D
92. 004 Power ON FC ENG 0 to 2000 0 1 page step 005 MUSIC BW ENG 006 MUSIC FC ENG 007 Vsg Adj ENG 008 Charge AC Control ENG Execution Interval Setting Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode Job End Potential ENG 0 to 2000 250 1 page step Control BW Job End Potential Control FC Interrupt Potential ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step ENG 0 to 2000 100 1 page step 480 Service Tables Control BW Interrupt Potential Control FC Initial Potential Control BW Initial Potential Control FC 007 Vsg Adj Counter Charge AC Control Counter Environmental Correction Gamma Correction Non use Time Correction Correction Coefficient 1 JE BW Correction Coefficient 2 JE BW Correction Coefficient 1 JE FC Correction Coefficient 2 JE FC Correction Coefficient 1 Interrupt BW Correction Coefficient 2 Interrupt BW 21 Apr 2006 ENG 0 to 2000 200 1 page step ENG 0 to 2000 200 1 page step ENG 0 to 2000 100 1 page step ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step ENG 0 to 2000 500 1 page step 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Not Correct OFF 1 Correct ON ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Not Correct OFF 1 Correct ON ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Not Correct OFF 1 Correct ON ENG ENG 0 to 1 0 2 0 01 page step ENG 0
93. 006 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 Consumption Pattern LD O to 15 15 1 step DUTY C Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values SP3611 003 exceed the target values SP3611 007 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 Consumption Pattern LD O to 15 15 1 step DUTY Y Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values SP3611 004 exceed the target values SP3611 008 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 Toner Supply Type Toner Supply Type Color Selects the toner supply method type ENG 0 to 3 2 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED with the supply rates stored with M ENG SP 3401 ENG 4 PID Vtref Fixed 458 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2 PID Vtref_Control 004 Y ENG 3 Not used Toner End Detection Set 3045 Enables disables the toner alert display on the LCD 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Detect 1 Not Detect Toner End Near End 3101 Displays the amount of each color toner DFU 001 Toner Replenishment Bk ENG 1 to 600 450 1 g step 002 Toner Replenishment M ENG 001 ON OFF ENG 003 Toner Replenishment C ENG 1 to 600 360
94. 016 Area 15 Bk ENG This is out of the image area This is for the synchronizing detection 033 Area 0 M ENG ee oard 50 to 150 100 1 step This is for the synchronizing detection 065 Area 0 C ENG ve oard 069 Area 4 C ENG 350 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 This is for the synchronizing detection 097 Area 0 Y ENG er oard 098 ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step 351 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 109 Area 12 Y 110 Area 13 Y 111 Area 14 Y 112 Area 15 Y ENG This is out of the image area Line Position Adj Setting Clear Color Regist Main Scan Length Detection MUSIC Result Area Magnification Correction Line Position Adj Result Displays the values for each correction Paper Int Mag Subdot indicates the magnification correction value between two sheets of paper Mag Cor Subdot indicates the magnification correction value M Scan Erro indicates the shift correction value in the main scan direction S Scan Erro Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan direction M Cor Dot indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction M Cor Subdot indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan direction Paper Int Mag Subdot Bk 002 Mag Cor Subdot Bk ENG 32768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step 003 Skew M ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um ste
95. 112 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red 016 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Black Level 2 Rough Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal Last Correct Value GE Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value BW Last Correct Value BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous 2nd bl
96. 2000msec after the shutter motor turns on Defective shutter close sensor Disconnected or broken harness Defective shutter motor 293 Defective shutter Shutter motor overload Defective IOB Check or replace the harness Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit Replace the shutter motor Replace the shutter close sensor Replace the IOB 226 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Shutter overrun error 1 Open The shutter open sensor loses the ON signal after the shutter was closed Defective motor Change of load to shutter motor 1 Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HER Shutter overrun error 2 Open The shutter open sensor detects ON after SC 291 has occurred Defective motor Change of load to shutter motor 1 Replace the shutter on the laser optics t Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit unit Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Shutter open close sensor error Both shutter open sensor and close sensor detect ON at the same time Broken harness es of the shutter open close sensors Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit o femme o eomme o eer 227 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures AC charge outpu
97. 2006 Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development 1106 1 Toner Limit Photo 100 to 400 260 1 step 707 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Scanner Service Mode SP1 XXX System and Others Compression Type 1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing 1 to 3 1 1 step 1 MH 2 MR 3 MMR Erase margin Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image 1004 1 Compression Type 1005 If the machine has scanned the edge of the original create a margin 1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm 0 to 5 0 1 mm step O to 1 0 1 step 0 enable 1 disable 1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan SP2 XXX Scanning image quality Remote scan disable Compression Level Gray scale Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode JPEG for the three settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2021 1 Level 3 Middle Image Quality 5 to 95 40 1 step 2021 2 Level 2 High Image Quality 5 to 95 50 1 step 2021 3 Level 4 Low Image Quality CTL 5 to 95 30 1 step 2021 4 Level 1 Highest Image Quality 5 to 95 60 1 step 2021 5 Level 5 Lowest Image Quality 5 to 95 20 1 step 708 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2024 1 Comp
98. 21 Apr 2006 From A4 LT 8 x 11 LEF to 400mm length There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time The interleave method is used For sheets longer than 400 mm there is no interleaving The drawing above shows the paper movement with the interleave method for two sheets of paper The printing is done as follows Bub aj Pla dst side znd side 817 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Printer Functions Overview IEEE1394 I F IEEE1284 I F USB Host IEEE802 11b Bluetooth MAL PCI I F PCI I F Controller Flash ROM 32 MB Trumpet Shaker Engine I F 1 DDR SDRAM SD Card DIMM x 2 HOR Boot The controller is based on the GW architecture CPU RM7035C 600 MHz ASIC This is one of the GW architecture ASICs GW architecture ASIC It controls the interface with the CPU and controls these functions memory local bus interrupts PCI bus video data HDD SD card for booting and image processing SHAKER IO control ASIC It controls the network operation panel USB port SD cards SDRAM DIMM 2 slots The controller has 10
99. 28 21 19 18 Rivet 2 58 26 Installation 21 Apr 2006 57 67 29 28 21 19 Operating Instructions Holder 58 26 pw 57 67 29 28 21 19 58 26 57 67 29 28 21 19 58 26 Cover Decal Paper Size 57 67 29 28 21 19 58 26 Decal Caution Original Decal Caution Inkjet Sheet Name Tel 21 57 67 29 28 21 19 Power Supply Cord 1 58 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape Put the machine on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time Then install the machine and other options Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location Tapes and Retainers Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine N Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2 and then take out the power cord from tray 1 if applicable Remove the scanner unit stay A Open the front door B and then remove the jam location sheet C Keep the scanner unit stay A inside the front door B Reattach the jam location sheet DUO ME deo e Close the front door Installation 21 Apr 2006 Developer and Toner Bottles C
100. 3902 009 Yellow 3902 010 Cyan 3902 011 Magenta 3902 012 f you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the drum unit automatically after you turn the power on again 2 Turn the machine power off 3 PCU PCU 4 Front cover A x 2 Do not touch the bearing B after removing the front cover The bearing is properly applied with lubricant 127 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 5 Remove the bushing C of the development roller at the rear of the PCU x 1 6 Remove the front joint D 7 x 1 E x 1 he front joint D is firmly set Remove it with a watchmaker s or jeweller s screwdriver 7T Drumunit E and Development Unit F 128 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 When the development unit is removed from the drum unit clean the entrance mylar G with a vacuum 8 If you change the development unit do the ACC procedure Developer 1 Set SP 3902 xxx to 1 Black 3902 005 Yellow 3902 006 Cyan 3902 007 Magenta 3902 008 Turn the machine power off Development unit Drum Unit and Development Unit 4 Hopper cover A hook x 3 Shake a bag of developer and pour it into the development hopper B 6 Reattach the hopper cover hook x 3 129 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 7 Turn the machine power on The machine initializes the developer and resets the PM counter for the developer For details of th
101. 60 Mi eiie 32C 89 6F 545 Rh 40 M 15C 59F 30 Rh 20 10 10C 50F 15 Rh 10 20 30 oC Temperature Range 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 89 6 F Humidity Range 15 to 80 RH Ambient Illumination Less than 1500 lux do not expose to direct sunlight Ventilation 3 times hr person or more a Sy SE Do not let the machine get exposed to the following 1 Cool air from an air conditioner 2 Heat from a heater Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas Install the machine at locations lower than 2 500 m 8 200 ft above sea level Install the machine on a strong level base Inclination on any side must be no more than 5 mm 9 Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations Machine Level Front to back Within 5 mm 0 2 Right to left Within 5 mm 0 2 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Machine Space Requirements A CAUTION This machine which uses high voltage power sources can generate ozone gas High ozone density is harmful to human health Therefore the machine must be installed in a well ventilated room A Over 100 mm 3 9 B Over 100 mm 3 9 C Over 100 mm 3 9 D Over 100 mm 3 9 Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above Power Requirements A CAUTION nsert the plug firmly in the outlet Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord Ground the machine 1 Input voltage level 1
102. 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Special 2 2934 ee Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for special 2 paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Thick 1 Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only 448 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 used for thick 1 paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Thick 2 2 ue Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for thick 2 paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Thick 3 2937 id Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for thick 3 paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB OHP 2 iid Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for OHP paper use in full c
103. 9 7906 77 Toner Collection bottle Displays the value given by the following formula Current count Yield count x 100 where Current count is the current values in the counter for the part and Yield count is the recommended yield 7906 91 Page PCU Bk ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step 7906 92 Page PCU M 7906 93 Page PCU C 7906 94 Page PCU Y Page Development Unit Bk 7906 95 Page Development Unit M 7906 96 611 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Page Development Unit C 7906 97 Page Development Unit Y 7906 98 Page Developer Bk 7906 100 Page Developer M 7906 101 Page Developer C 7906 102 Page Developer Y Page Image 7906 99 7906 103 Transfer 7906 104 Page Cleaning Unit 7906 105 Page Fusing Unit Page Paper 7906 106 9 9 Pap Transfer Unit MEM 7931 7 Maintenance ID 612 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Attachment Total 7931 16 Counter Attachment Color 7931 17 Counter Toner Bottle M Displays the toner bottle information for M 613 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Attachment Total 7932 16 Counter Attachment Color 7932 17 Counter Toner Bottle C Displays the toner bottle information for C 614 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7933 15 Refill Information Attachment Total 7933 16 Counter Attachment Color 7933 17
104. 99 C 11 M 11 K The self check for Cyan failed but the others were successful See the troubleshooting section for details 450 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 History Latest 002 Result Latest 1 003 Result Latest 2 004 Result Latest 3 005 Result Latest 4 11111111 to 99999999 1 step 006 Result Latest 5 007 Result Latest 6 008 Result Latest 7 009 Result Latest 8 010 Result Latest 9 T Sensor Initial Set Execution Developer Initialization Setting 001 Execution ALL m 002 Execution COL MCY m 003 Execution Bk m viene meme EE meme T Sensor Initial Set Result Display Developer Initialization Result Display 0 to 9999 Display YCMK ENG 1 Success 2 to 9 Failure Displays the developer initialization result See section 4 1 1 for details on the meaning of each code 451 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 All colors are displayed Values are displayed in the order Y C M Bk e g 1 Y 2 C 1 M 1 Bk Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded Forced Toner Supply Forced Toner Supply Color 001 Execution ALL 002 Execution COL MCY 003 Execution Bk Executes the manual toner supply to the development unit 004 Execution M 005 Execution C 006 Execution Y Forced Toner Supply Setting Forced Toner Supply Setting Color Specifies the manual toner supply time fo
105. AC Current Adjustment for MM Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MM environment Middle temperature and Middle humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 0 to 3000 980 10 uA step 002 Environmental Target M 0 to 3000 960 10 uA step 003 Environmental Target C 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 1000 10 uA step Charge AC Current MH Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MH Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for MH environment Middle temperature and High humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk O to 3000 960 10 uA step 002 Environmental Target M 0 to 3000 940 10 uA step 003 Environmental Target C 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 970 10 uA step 335 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Charge AC Current HH Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for HH Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for HH environment High temperature and High humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 0 to 3000 940 10 uA step 002 Environmental Target M 0 to 3000 930 10 uA step 003 Environmental Target C 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 960 10 uA step 2012 Charge Output Control Selects the AC voltage control type 0 or 1 0 1 step 001 AC Voltage ENG 0 Process control 1 Manual control AC voltage
106. All four toners are put on the belt at the same time Then the completed four color image is moved to the paper by a negative charge applied to the ITB drive roller D the transfer roller E is an idle roller 1 Drum charge The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge 2 Laser exposure The laser beam from the laser diode LD goes through the lens and mirrors and reaches the drum The machine turns the laser beam on and off to make a latent image on the drum 3 Development The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the drum surface This machine uses four independent development units one for each color 4 Transfer Image transfer Bias rollers opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums to the transfer belt Four toner images are super imposed onto the belt Paper transfer Then the ITB drive roller pushes the toner from the transfer belt to the paper the transfer roller is an idle roller 5 Cleaning for OPC drum The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the 743 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 drum surface after image transfer to the paper 6 Quenching for OPC drum Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the end of every job 7 Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface The grounding roller inside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge
107. Apr 2006 Class 1 SC Code Detailed section mo fom mmm 214 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 SC Table Exposure lamp error 001 Shading at AGC 002 Shading at scanning The peak white level is less than 64 255 digits 8 bits when scanning the shading plate The shading data peak does not reach the specified threshold Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective 101 Exposure lamp connector defective Standard white plate dirty Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty SBU defective Check and clean the scanner mirror s and scanner lens Check and clean the shading plate Replace the exposure lamp Replace the lamp stabilizer Replace the scanner mirror s or scanner lens Replace the SBU No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 120 Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the OFF condition during operation Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SBU and HP sensor disconnected 215 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No 141 2 3 4 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner motor Check the cable connection between the SBU and HP sensor Replace the scanner motor Replace th
108. B tray 2 C It uses clutches and complex trains of gears to do this When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine their pick up rollers E F are always in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack see section However the feed roller G of the by pass tray D stays away until the by pass pick up solenoid H turns on see section When the paper feed clutch I for tray 1 turns on the pick up feed J and separation K rollers start rotating to feed the paper The paper from tray 2 is also fed in the same way For the paper from the by pass tray D the duplex by pass motor drives the feed roller to feed the paper The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates 792 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Paper Lift Trays 1 amp 2 When the tray is installed in the machine the tray bar A pushes the lever B and this lever pushes down the pick up roller C onto the paper Also the rear end of the paper tray pushes the tray set switch see section for tray 2 this is the paper size switch As a result the machine detects that the paper tray is installed When the machine detects that a tray has been placed in the machine the tray lift motor D rotates and the coupling gear E on the tray lift motor engages the pin F on the lift arm shaft G Then the tray lift arm lifts the tray bottom plate H until the paper lift sensor I for the tray detects that the to
109. Copy Data Security Unit When copying on a machine without an optional Copy Data Security Unit 833 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Setting This function can be turned on or off with a user tool User Tools lt System Settings lt Administrator Tool or SP5 178 001 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Related SC If the Copy Data Security Unit is removed when the Copy Data Security Setting is On SP5 178 001 1 SC165 occurs This SC prevents someone from removing the Copy Data Security Unit illegally Mask Type for copying This function can prevent unauthorized copying by making masking patterns with an embedded message when making an original print Masking patterns are good for printing documents that must not be copied The embedded messages appear when the document is Copied Five print densities level 1 to 5 can be selected for the masking patterns Default level 3 and 10 masking patterns can be selected from the RPCS driver Some digital MFPs might not be able to detect the masking patterns If the density of masking patterns on the output print is too light due to the settings of the machine or a mechanical problem the pattern might not be detected 834 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 File Format Converter MLB In this machine this conversion is hardware based using the optional File Format Converter Without the File Format Converter copy and print jobs cannot be downloa
110. DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used 008 Separation DC FINE ENG 389 ENG 10 to 250 170 5 step Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thin MM Thin Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Thin 1st ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step Side Separation DC Thin 2nd ENG 10 to 250 140 5 step Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Thin MH Thin Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values 10 to 250 110 5 step 001 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 390 2484 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain ENG 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Adjusts the en
111. File Application GW Print Service Printer Design Language GW Print Service Print Print Server Module Image Memory Handler oystem Control Service System Resource Memory Control Service Management Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box 133 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD the target selected with SP5857 002 for the events that you selected with SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859 Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy Printer Scanner and Web memory modules The initial settings are all zero These settings remain in effect until you change them Be sure to check all the settings especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10 To switch off a key setting enter a zero for that key You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 or all by entering the corresponding 4 digit numbers from the table You cannot mix settings for the groups COPY PRINTER etc for 006 to 010 For example if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log The size of this area is limited to 4 MB Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD Retrieve the debug log by copying it
112. File page reference function O to 5 2 1 step 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile Net files are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 001 Rate for Copy Color 002 Rate for Copy B amp W Text Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages This function is available only with the MLB Media Link Board option installed 5 to 95 50 1 step 5848 2 sets the 4 bit switch assignment for the access control setting Setting 4 oun of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router 5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images The default is equal to 1 gigabyte ACC Ctrl Netfile Protocol Bit switch settings Lower 4 bits only 0000 No access control 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder Access and deliveries from Scan Router have no effect on capture 002 Access Ctrl Repository only 0000 No access control Lower 4 bits 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder 574 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 0010 No writing control Access Control Doc Svr Print Lower 4 bits Access Control User Directory only Lower 4 bits Access Cntl For Cherry only lower 4bits Access Ctrl Comm Log Fax Lower 4 bits owitches access control on and off 0000 No access control Access Ctrl Job Ctrl Lower 4 0001 Denies access to Des
113. Folio SEF waw yf yfyf y fa fy f fy sexe fyty fy fy fof f fs Jr 267 x 390 8K Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y Y mm 195 x 267 16K SEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y mm we ere Pye PP 849 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 1000 sheet booklet finisher Custom Com10 Env 114 x 162 mm 162 x 229 mm 110 x 220 mm Remarks Je Em Em fue 1000 Sheet Finisher and 500 Sheet Finisher Monarch Env MF Main Frame Prf Proof Clr Clear Shf Shift Stp Staple 500 sheet finisher 1000 sheet finisher n KB SE 0 850 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 a 500 sheet Size 1000 sheet finisher Hx Paper finisher W x L Prt er sw S cir snt stp o LLLLLLLLLI 210 x 297 A4 SEF Y T Y Y 50 Pd Y 50 Y Y mm 297 x 210 A4 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y mm 148 x 210 A5 SEF Y Y Y Y V Y Y Y mm 210 x 148 Ab LEF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y mm 105 x 148 A6 SEF Y Y Y Y mm 257 x 364 B4 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y mm 182 x 257 B5 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y mm 257 x 182 B5 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y mm 128 x 182 B6 SEF Y Y Y Y Y mm seen eae v v v Lv Ide E oe 851 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 oe 500 sheet Size 1000 sheet finisher _ Paper finisher W x L Legal SEF Half Letter SEF Executive SEF Executive LEF F SEF Foolscap SEF Folio SEF 267 x 390 8K Y Y Y Y 30 Y Y 30 Y Y mm 195 x 267 mm 267 x 195 16K LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y 50 Y Y mm m PP PE 4 125 x Com10 Env 9 5 852
114. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel Turn the main switch off Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 10 Turn the main switch on oS a D OT 11 Check that the application programs run normally Undo Exec The menu Undo Exec SP5 873 002 lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card You can use this program when for example you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec SP5 873 001 vad Important Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine If the write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge 1 Turn the main switch off 2 Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 3 The application program is copied 726 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 er a 0 Xr o 10 11 back into this card Insert the SD card having stored the application program to SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied back from this SD card Turn the main switch on Start the SP mode Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec Follow the messages shown on the operation panel Turn the main switch off Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the machine Turn the main switch on Check that the application programs run normally 121 Service Tables Controller Self Diagnostics O
115. I O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals image data and electricity I O Board IOB Contains drivers for motors and other mechanical components Motherboard Connects the FCU board to the BICU This board is supplied with the optional fax unit FCU The FCU fax controller unit controls the fax programs and communicates with the controller to share copier resources 742 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Printing Process This machine uses four PCUs and four laser beams for color printing Each PCU consists of the drum unit and the development unit Each drum unit has a drum charge roller cleaning brush and blade From the left the PCU stations are yellow cyan magenta and black The drum A is charged with a negative voltage and is exposed by the laser from the laser optics housing unit B The laser neutralizes the negative charge on the surface of the drum So the white parts of the image correspond to areas of the drum that still have a high negative charge The toner has a negative charge and it moves to the areas of the drum that have the smallest negative charge i e the areas written by the laser beam The image on each drum is moved to the transfer belt by the positive bias that is applied to the transfer belt C
116. Increasing a value reduces the image in the 003 Y Magnification l EM main scan direction Decreasing a value enlarges the image in the main scan direction Adjusts the main scan registration for each color and speed Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print RT Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print 1 dot 21um 1 pulse 1 3um Dot Rough adjustment Subdot Fine adjustment Adjust dot first then adjust subdot 004 M Scan High Dot M ENG 512 to 512 0 1 dot step 005 M Scan High Subdot M ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 006 M Scan Medium Dot M ENG Not used 355 N gt o O N Oo Service Tables M Scan Medium 007 ENG Subdot M 008 ENG 512 to 512 0 1 dot step 009 ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 010 ENG 512 to 512 0 1 dot step 011 ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step Not used M Scan Medium 013 ENG Subdot C 014 ENG 512 to 512 0 1 dot step 015 ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 016 ENG 512 to 512 0 1 dot step 017 ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step Not used M Scan Medium 019 ENG Subdot Y 020 M Scan Low Dot Y ENG 512 to 512 0 1 dot step 021 M Scan Low Subdot Y ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step Adjusts the sub scan registration for each color and speed 022 039 Decreasing a value makes
117. Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Table of Contents FET This EI SD jonaseeeecec gtd erie E EE MEM exam ees ubl M dU EE dM MIENNE UM Me i SAT INOUE SS serieren Tr EAE AAE A REE a EEE E E n i Important Safety Notices rrrarrrnrrrrnnrraneranrrnanrranrnnnrnnnnnnannnnnennennnannnanennnennanennnennannnnnennee i Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal c ccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeceeeseeeseeeseeesaeeeaeeesanes i AS Ne i Symbols Abbreviations and Trademarks cccccceecceecceecceeceeeceeeceeeseeeeseeseeteeeeeeeneeeaeeees iii TE s m iv ET NNN V LAN 1 Installation Requirements cccceccecceeeseeceeceeceeeseeseeeeeeseeseeseeeseeseeseetsesseeeeeteeseeeseeaeetaees 1 ENN 1 ML 1 Machine Space Requirements rrrarrrrrrnrrranernrrnnrnnnenanernnnnnenunenunenernnernnnenasennennsennnennnene 2
118. Minimum Bk ENG 002 Minimum M ENG 003 Minimum C ENG 004 Minimum Y ENG 0 to 5 0 0 01V step 005 Minimum Front ENG 006 Minimum Center ENG 007 Minimum Rear ENG ID Sensor Check Result DFU Displays the maximum result 2 values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Maximum 2 Bk ENG 0 to 5 0 0 01V step 002 Maximum 2 M ENG 003 Maximum 2 C ENG 004 Maximum 2 Y ENG 005 Maximum 2 Front ENG 006 Maximum 2 Center ENG 345 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 ID Sensor Check Result DFU Displays the minimum result 2 values of the ID sensor check Bk M C Y ID sensors for the process control Front Center Rear ID sensors for the automatic line position adjustment 001 Minimum 2 Bk ENG 002 Minimum 2 M ENG 003 Minimum 2 C ENG 004 Minimum 2 Y ENG 0 to 5 0 0 01V step 005 Minimum 2 Front ENG 006 Minimum 2 Center ENG 007 Minimum 2 Rear ENG Area Mag Correction LD Pulse Area Correction Color Area FA Adjusts the magnification for each area The main scan 297 mm is divided into 8 areas Area 1 is at the front side of the machine left side of the image and area 8 is at the rear side of the machine right side of the image Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print Increasing a
119. Open Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an unattended paper jam This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 Jam Detection Continuous 2 to 10 5 1 step Count Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1 Door Open Time Length 3 to 30 10 1 step Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call This setting is enabled only when SP5 508 004 is set to 1 0 Automatic Call 1 Audible Warning at Machine Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended Jam Operation Continuous 0 Automatic Call Jam Operation Time Length Count 1 Audible Warning at Machine Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur Door Operation Time Length 0 OFF 1 ON Determines what happens if the door remains open 15 min Displays a warning if set to ON Pressing the call button will contact the service center This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set to 4 B 041 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 With NRS New Remote Service in use these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error occurs If this SP is switched off the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs SC Call Service Parts Near End Qor1 1 Call 0 Off 1 Service Parts End Call Sn User Call Communication Test Call Machin
120. Optional paper tray unit trays 1 and 2 0 or 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON If 1 is selected the customer will be able to input a non standard paper size using the UP mode 5113 Optional Counter Type 002 This program specifies the counter type 0 None 1 Key card RK 3 4 Default Optional Counter 2 Key card down 3 Prepaid card Type 4 Coin rack 5 MF key card 8 Key counter Vendor 9 Bar code Printer External Optional Counter This program specifies the external counter 932 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 type 0 None 1 Expansion Device 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 5118 Disable Copying 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled 001 This program disables copying Mode Clear Opt 0 Yes removed 1 Standby installed but Counter Removal not used 2 No not removed This program updates the information on the optional counter When you install or remove an optional counter check the settings 5121 Counter Up Timing 0 Feed 1 Exit This program specifies when the counter goes up The settings refer to paper feed and paper exit respectively 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 8 1 2 x 13 Foolscap 1 8 1 4 x 13 Folio 2 8 x 13 F 001 Selects F size original setting 5127 APS Mode 0 Not disabled 1 Disabled 001 This program disables the APS 5128 Code Mode With Key Card Option Hn 933 F Size Original Setting Service Tables 21 Apr 2006
121. Output Check Table Image Transfer Motor Copier Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor Drum Motor Bk Drum Development Drive Motor K 138 mm s Full Speed Drum Motor Bk Medium Speed Drum Motor Bk Low Speed Drum Development Drive Motor K 77 mm s Drum Motor MCY 5804 14 Drum Drive Motor CMY 138 mm s Full Speed Drum Motor MCY Medium Speed 9804 15 Drum Motor MCY 5804 16 Drum Drive Motor CMY 77 mm s Low Speed Development 5804 17 Motor MCY Full Development Drive Motor CMY 138 mm s Speed Development 5804 18 Motor MCY Medium Speed Development 5804 19 Motor MCY Low Development Drive Motor CMY 77 mm s Speed 689 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5804 20 Toner Relay Motor Toner Transport Motor Paper Transfer 5804 23 Wiot Paper Transfer Roller Contact Motor otor Image Transfer MEM 5804 24 Image Transfer Belt Unit Drive Motor 138 mm s Motor Full Speed Image Transfer 5804 25 Motor Medium Speed Image Transfer 5804 26 Image Transfer Belt Unit Drive Motor 77 mm s Motor Low Speed Fusing Exit Motor 5804 27 Fusing Paper Exit Motor 138 mm s Full Speed Fusing Exit Motor 5804 28 Medium Speed Fusing Exit Motor 5804 29 Fusing Paper Exit Motor 77 mm s Low Speed Development 5804 30 Development Clutch Clutch Bk Toner Supply 5804 36 Toner Supply Clutch Bk Pump Bk Toner Supply 5804 37 Toner Supply Clutch M Pump M Toner Supply 5804 38 Toner Supply Cl
122. Punch Drive Motor 3 Hopper Full Sensor Arm 4 Sub scan Registration Sensor Unit Punch Unit Stay 6 Sub scan Registration Sensor Guide T Hopper 8 Screw 9 Step Screw 10 Spring Cope 49 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure If the 1000 sheet booklet finisher has been installed disconnect it and pull it away from the machine BN NA ING F If the finisher is connected to the machine disconnect it Open the top cover A and then release the guide arm B 0 x 1 Open the front door C Pull the hook D up then remove the knob E Timing belt cover F m Pe p a 6 Rear cover of the 1000 sheet booklet finisher G P X 2 50 Installation 21 Apr 2006 H 7 Cover bracket H x 1 8 Remove the paper guide plate I from the rear side P x 4 9 Install the punch unit stay J from the front side P X 3 10 Install the sub scan registration sensor guide K from the top P x 1 51 21 Apr 2006 Installation 11 Remove the bracket L from the punch unit x 1 N 12 Install the punch unit M along the punch unit stay from the rear side 13 Make sure to put the punch unit stay pin N through the hole 14 Connect the
123. Relay Pulse Motor Paper Transport Motor 6146 2 Front Jogger Pulse Front Jogger Motor 700 Service Tables Rear Jogger Pulse Motor Staple Slide Pulse Motor Stuck Exit Pulse Motor Pick Roller Pluse Motor 21 Apr 2006 Rear Jogger Motor Stapler Unit Movement Motor Paper Reverse Exit Motor Pick Up Roller Contact Motor 6146 7 Staple DC Motor Staple Unit Motor Paper Tray Lift DC Motor Paper Detection SOL Paddle Rotation SOL 6146 10 Output tray motor Stack Height Lever Solenoid Paddle Roller Solenoid 6146 11 Belt SOL Belt Lift Solenoid Test Pattern Printing Printing Test pattern SP2 109 Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for design testing doe Donotoperate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely Otherwise an SC occurs 1 Enter the SP mode and select SP2 109 003 Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press ff When you want to select the single color of Magenta Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern select the color with SP2 109 005 2 Magenta 3 Yellow 4 Cyan 4 When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern select the density with 701 9 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SP2 109 006 to 009 for each color LB Mote f you select 0 with SP2 109 006 to 009 the color to be adjusted to 0 does not come up on a
124. Resolution Print 600 dpi Scan 8 bits pixel Gradation Print 4 bits pixel 2 bits pixel 1 bits pixel Original type Sheets book objects Maximum original A3 11 x 17 size Original reference Left rear corner ad hoc lists position Normal ADF 1 to 1 LT A4 LEF C1a 25 cpm color or 25 cpm black amp white C1b 30 cpm color or 30 cpm black amp white Copy speed OHP Thick C1a 16 cpm color black amp white C1b 16 cpm color black amp white First copy normal Color 9 7 seconds or less A4 LT LEF mode Black amp white 6 7 seconds or less A4 LT LEF Warm up time 45 seconds or less 23 C 5096 Print Paper Capacity Standard tray 500 sheets x 2 80 g m 20 Ib By pass tray 100 sheets 838 ha Specifications Print Paper Size Tray 1 Tray 2 By pass Optional Tray LCT Printing Paper Weight Output Paper Capacity Continuous copy Zoom 90 x 148 mm 305 x 458 mm 12 x 18 o emm p 21 Apr 2006 Optional paper feed tray 500 sheets x 2 LCT 2000 sheets Refer to Supported Paper Sizes Minimum Maximum A4 81 2 x 11 LEF A3 11 x 17 A5 LEF 8 5 x 11 A5 LEF 8 5 x 11 A3 11 x 17 Standard tray 60 to 216 g m 16 to 57 Ib Optional paper tray 60 to 216 g m 16 to 57 Ib By pass tray 60 to 253 g m 16 to 67 Ib Duplex unit 64 to 169 g m 17 to 45 Ib otandard exit tray 50
125. S552R to the front edge A and rear edge B of the pressure roller as shown above Heating Fusing and Tension Roller Fusing belt with rollers W Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Fusing roller A Tension roller B m oN o Heating roller C 169 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Lubricant Roller and Cleaning Roller Cleaning unit Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps 2 Remove the spring A and bushing B at the front and rear side of the cleaning unit 3 Lubricant roller C 4 Cleaning roller D 170 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Fusing Paper Exit Fan Open the right door Rear cover Right rear cover iMf Right Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Fusing paper exit fan A x 1 x 1 hook x 2 Tee qe rt When Reinstalling the Fan Make sure that the fusing paper exit fan is installed with its decal facing to the right side 171 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Heating Roller Thermostats Edi 1 Fusing upper cover Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps 2 Heating roller thermostats A x 2 each Heating Roller Thermistor 1 Fusing upper cover Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps 2 Top frame Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps 3 Release the connector A 4 Heating roller thermistor B x 1 172 Replacement an
126. SD card You have to copy the other application PictBridge DOS Unit to the SD card that stores the PostScript application Move Exec The menu Move Exec SP5 873 001 lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to another SD card Important pur MN Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine If the write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge Turn the main switch off Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied into this SD card Insert the SD card having stored the application program in SD Card Slot 3 The application program is copied from this SD card Turn the main switch on Start the SP mode Select SP5 873 001 Move Exec Follow the messages shown on the operation panel Turn the main switch off 63 Installation 21 Apr 2006 9 Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 10 Turn the main switch on 11 Check that the application programs run normally Undo Exec Undo Exec SP5 873 002 lets you copy back application programs from an SD card to the original SD card You can use this program when for example you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec SP5 873 001 Wincott Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine If t
127. SIO and IOB not supplied No response 5V power to the BICU and DA 250V DA 250V controller is not supplied 5A 250V 5A 250V 5V power to the IOB and finisher is not supplied 10A 125V 10A 125V 24V power to the BICU finisher is not supplied 310 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5 Service Tables service Program Mode ACAUTION Make sure that the data in LED is not on before you go into the SP mode This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine When the LED is on wait for the copier to process the data Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only If this mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason data might be deleted or settings might be changed In such case product quality cannot be guaranteed any more Entering SP Mode 1 Press the Clear Mode key 8 2 Use keypad to enter 107 O 3 Hold down Clear Stop 5 for 3 seconds at least 4 Enterthe Service Mode Exiting SP Mode 1 Press Exit on the LCD twice to return to the copy window Types of SP Modes Copy SP SP modes related to the engine functions Printer SP SP modes related to the controller functions Scanner SP SP modes related to the scanner functions Fax SP SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes Copy Printer Scanner or Fax from the touch panel
128. SP2 101 001 Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length detection Bk Adjust the value with SP2 185 001 C Low image densit Low pattern densit 292 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 After Executing SP2 111 001 on the output 1 Do the forced process control SP3 011 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx Defective ID sensor at center The main scan Deformed center area on the registration is shifted image transfer belt but only at the central Defective BICU area of the image on 1 Replace the ID sensor the output Replace the image transfer belt Replace the BICU Defective laser optics housing unit Defective ID sensor Defective BICU Incorrect SP value The main scan Replace the laser optics housing registrations of M C registration unit Y are shifted errors Replace the ID sensor Replace the BICU Adjust the value with SP2 182 004 to 021 Defective image transfer belt Defective drive units Defective ID sensor Defective BICU The sub scan Incorrect SP value registrations of M C 1 Replace the image transfer belt Y are shifted Replace the ID sensor Replace the drum motor Replace the BICU Adjust the value with SP2 182 022 to 039 The skew of M C Y Defective PCU 293 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 After Executing SP2 111 001 is different Defective laser optics housing unit Defective IOB Reinstall or replace the PCU Replace the laser optics housing uni
129. Side S4 ENG ENG 100 to 600 220 5 step 21 gt S4 size gt 14 P idth Paper Transfer Plain 0mm 2 S4 size 8 mm Paper width 138 mm s 2nd Side S4 ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S4 ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S4 ENG Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S5 ENG 100 to 600 240 5 step 148 mm 2 S5 size Paper width Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S5 019 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG ENG 427 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Side S5 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S5 ENG 2814 Gear Phase Adjustment Bk M Gear 180 to 180 0 5 deg step 001 Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear 2815 Line Speed Hold Time 20 from 7 mm sec 5 to 200 100 5 msec step Start up Time Adjustment 2816 DFU 001 Low Speed to 77mm ENG 5 to 200 100 5 msec step 002 High Speed 77mm from ENG 5 to 200 50 5 msec step Special 2 Leading Edge Correction Special 2 Paper Leading Edge Correction 2821 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2822 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side E
130. Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 1st oide S4 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S5 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S5 Paper Transfer FINE 1st oide S5 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S5 ENG 100 to 600 240 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 370 5 step 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 500 5 step 148 mm 2 55 size Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG Special 3 Leading Edge Correction Special 3 Paper Leading Edge Correction 437 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 002 003 004 005 008 005 006 007 008 Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2852 and SP285 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2872 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2872 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Page ENG 0
131. Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment SP4 011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment Also before lens block replacement enter the SP mode and note the settings of SP4 800 001 to 003 ARDF density adjustments for R G B After lens block replacement do some copy samples with the ARDF then check the copies If the copies have background change SP4 800 001 to 003 to their previous settings or adjust until the background is acceptable These SP codes are also used to adjust the ARDF scanning density if the scanning densities of the ARDF and the platen mode are not the same SBU Test Mode There are two SP codes to create a test pattern which can be used as a diagnostic tool to troubleshoot problems in the SBU SPA4907 001 SBU Pattern Test Pattern SPA4907 002 SBU Pattern Select Fixed Pattern To print the pattern Select the pattern to print Touch Copy Window then press the Start key twice IPU Image Processing Unit The IPU does the following Controls the scanner Processes the image signals from the SBU and sends them over the PCI bus to the controller memory Receives the image processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller memory processes them then outputs them to the VGAVD Outputs the control signals for the ARDF Controls the relay of power and signals Image processing ADS correction and line width correction are done on the BICU board for all the
132. Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Address book error An error is detected in the data copied to the address book over a network CTL Defective software program B Defective HDD Incorrect path to the server 1 Initialize the address book data SP5 846 050 Initialize the user information SP5 832 006 3 Replace the HDD 275 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD Turn the main switch off and on Initialize the HDD partition SP5 832 007 Replace the HDD HDD mail transfer error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective HDD Power failure during an access to the HDD Initialize the HDD partition SP5 832 008 Replace the HDD No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Delete All error 1 HDD An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted physically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 Data Overwrite Security Unit SD card not installed Defective HDD Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 Replace the HDD Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 2 6 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details po Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Delete All error 2 Data area 000 All error 2 Data are
133. Thin Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 80 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values 10 to 250 200 5 step 005 Separation DC Plain ENG 388 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st Side Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side Thin ML Thin Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 90 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation
134. Tray 4 Optional paper feed unit 3 Duplex inverter 10 Finisher stapler Optional 4 Duplex feed 11 Finisher punch Optional 5 By pass tray feed 12 Finisher lower tray Optional 6 Tray 1 feed 13 Finisher proof tray Optional 7 Tray 2 feed 14 Inner Tray The 1000 sheet finisher and 1000 sheet booklet finisher require the bridge unit B227 and one from the two tray paper feed unit B800 or the LCT B801 139 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Drive Layout 1 Scanner motor Drives the scanner unit 2 Drum drive Drives the drums for magenta cyan and yellow motor CM Y 3 ITB Image Transfer Moves the ITB into contact and away from the color PCUs Belt contact motor Drives the toner attraction pumps and the toner collection coils 4 Toner transport motor from the PCUs from the transfer belt unit and inside the toner collection bottle Also rotates the toner bottles 5 Development drive motor CM Y 6 Development clutch K Turns on off the drive power to the development unit K 740 Drives the color development units magenta cyan yellow Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 7 Paper feed clutch Switches the drive power between the tray 1 and tray 2 8 Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed mechanisms tray 1 tray 2 by pass tray 9 Drum Development Drives the blac
135. Under 5857 Save Debug Log touch 1 On Off CUPY Sr 9 89 001 save Debug Log On Off 1 0N 0 0FF Initial 3 On the control panel keypad press 1 Then press 9 This switches the Save Debug Log feature on The default setting is 0 OFF This feature must be switched on in order for the debug information to be saved 730 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 COPY SP 5 857 002 save Debug Log Target 2 HDD 3 5D Initial 4 Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved Under 5857 Save Debug Log touch 2 Target enter 2 with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as the target destination Then press Select 3 SD Card to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the service slot 5 Now touch 5858 and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log SP5858 Debug Save When provides the following items for selection Saves data when an engine related SC Engine SC Error code is generated Saves debug data when a Controller SC Error controller related SC Code is generated Saves data only for the SC code that Any SC Error you specify by entering code number Saves data for jams gue More than one event can be selected Example 1 To Select Items 1 2 4 Touch the appropriate items s Press ON for each selection This example shows Engine SC Error s
136. Unit Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth LCT Relay Roller Damp cloth Bottom Plate Pad Damp cloth 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher Rollers Damp cloth Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush Punch Chads Discard chads 89 Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 1000 Sheet Finisher Rollers Damp cloth Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush 500 Sheet Finisher Rollers Damp cloth Discharge Brush Dry cloth Sensors Blower brush Others in Mainframe Dev Unit C M Y Image Transfer 1 The color development units are considered EM parts because the actual life time of the color development units depends on the usage of color ration 2 The image transfer belt unit is considered EM parts because its expected lifetime is relatively long 90 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 3 Replacement and Adjustment Beforehand A CAUTION Before installing options please do the following 1 If there is a fax unit in the machine print out all messages stored in the memory the lists of user programmed items and the system parameter list If there are printer jobs in the machine print out all jobs in the printer buffer Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord the telephone line and the network cable 91 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Special Tools A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart 3 pcs set m The Loop back Connector Parallel r
137. Weight Tray Capacity 21 Apr 2006 Standard sizes A6 SEF to A3 HLT to DLT Non standard sizes Width 90 to 305 mm Length 148 to 600 mm 52 g m to 253 g m 16 Ib to 78 Ib DC 24 V 5 V form the copier printer 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm 16 3 x 16 2 x 4 4 5 kg 11 Ib Paper Width Less than 305 mm Paper Length Less than 432 mm 52 to 253 g m 14 to 67 Ib 125 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib B4 or larger 250 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib A4 or smaller DC 24 V 5 V from the copier 10 W 2kg 421 mm x 457 mm x 116 mm 16 6 x 18 0 x 4 6 Standard Size A3 DLT to A6 HLT SEF 60 to 169 g m 16 to 45 Ib 125 sheets 80 g m 20 Ib A4 867 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Power Source DC 24 V 5 V from the copier Size W x D x H 520 mm x 395 mm x 120 mm 20 5 x 15 6 x 4 7 868
138. above picture is taken from the rear Otherwise lubricant powder may damage the encoder sensor 144 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Paper Transfer Roller Unit If you will install a new paper transfer unit then set SP 3902 016 to 1 f you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically after you turn the power on again Open the right door Release the two locks A Paper transfer roller unit B Paper Transfer Unit If you will install a new paper transfer unit then set SP 3902 016 to 1 fyou do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically after you turn the power on again 1 Turn off the main power switch 145 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 2 Open the right door 3 Remove the clip ring A 4 Move the vertical transport unit to the left side with lever Z B 4 Remove the pin C and then remove the harness cover D 6 You do not need to remove the pin bushing E from the harness cover 7 Disconnect the connector F and release the clamp G 146 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 9 Slide up the paper transfer unit I and then remove it 147 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 ID Sensor Board K PCU WF PCU Rear cover Rear Cover Right rear cover iM Right Rear Cover Duplex unit Mf Duple
139. after the pick up roller has fed a stack Staple HP sensor does not turn on when stapling movement stars Finisher Staple Staple HP sensor does not turn off after the stapling movement has finished Jogger position sensor does not turn off Finisher Staple Cancel when the stapling movement stars Finisher Jogger Motor Rear jogger fence HP sensor does 3 NO Troubleshooting Jam Code SP 7504 166 7504 167 7504 168 Display Finisher Pickup Lift Motor Finisher Staple Slide Finisher Stack Tray 21 Apr 2006 LCD Description Display not turn off after the rear jogger fence has moved from its home position Rear jogger fence HP sensor does not turn on after the rear jogger fence has returned to its home position Pick up roller HP sensor does not turn off after the pick up roller has moved from its home position Pick up roller HP sensor does not turn on after the pick up roller has returned to its home position Stapler unit HP sensor does not turn on or off at power on initialization Stapler unit HP sensor does not turn off after the stapler unit has moved from its home position Stapler unit HP sensor does not turn on after the stapler unit has returned to its home position Stack height sensor does not detect the home position of the output tray when the output tray lifts up for specified time Tray upper limit sensor turns on when while the output tray lifts up
140. after the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation Defective shift motor Defective shift motor HP sensor Check the connections to the shift motor and the shift motor HP sensor Defective shift motor or the shift motor HP sensor Details re Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Bridge uniteror 00 unit error The machine recognizes the finisher but does not the bridge unit Defective connector Broken harness 1 Check the connections between the bridge unit and the machine 2 Install a new bridge unit Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Fmsheremor 0 Fmsheremor 0 The machine does not recognize the finisher but recognizes the bridge unit Defective connector 261 Troubleshooting 4 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective harness Incorrect installation 1 Check the connections between the finisher and the machine 2 Install a new finisher Front jogger motor error The machine does not detect that the front jogger HP sensor is OFF for 40 ms after the front jogger fence moved The machine does not detect that the front jogger fence HP sensor is ON for 830 ms after the front jogger fence returned to its home position Defective front jogger motor Disconnected connector Overload to front jogger motor Defective front jogger fence HP sensor 1 Turn the main power switch off and on
141. as a book with booklet right left pagination The number of pages printed where stamps were User Stamp mE applied including page numbering and date stamping T PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications C PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application F PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the fax application P PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application S PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application L PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 652 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 O PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications wm a mi RN spe af f ox bo lg oe G a an pel emer Do oo Meu DIM These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF PrtPGS Ppr Tray 0 to 9999999 O 1 These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed stat
142. automatic line position adjustment Common HH Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2351 and SP235 are multiplied by these SP values Image Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG Not used FINE 10 to 250 100 5 step Image Transfer P M P M Pattern When doing the process ENG Pattern control or automatic line position adjustment Plain Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain paper 373 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 0 to 5000 1000 10 V step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC Fine 1st Side Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Side Plain Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in black and white mode Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 130 20 1 uA step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 130 25 1 uA step 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Plain Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color mode ENG Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 130 30 1 uA step 138 mm s 1st Side
143. but Defective BICU with color registration 1 Replace the ID sensor shutter errors solenoid Replace the ID sensor Replace the BICU One of The main scan Defective laser optics housing unit Defective BICU Replace the laser optics housing results 010 registrations of M C 011 012 Y are shifted by more ES than 15 mm from unit Out of the main scan Replace the BICU adjustable registration of Bk range The sub scan Defective image transfer belt registrations of M C Defective drive units Y are shifted by more Defective BICU than 20 mm from Replace the image transfer belt the sub scan 2 Replace the drum motor registration of Bk Replace the BICU The main scan Defective ID sensor at center registration is shifted Deformed center area on the image by more than 0 66 transfer belt mm but only at the Defective BICU CU ntralarea of the 1 Replace the ID sensor 9289 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 After Executing SP2 111 003 image on the output 2 Replace the image transfer belt 3 Replace the BICU Defective PCU Defective laser optics housing unit The skew for M C Y Defective BICU is more than 0 75 Reinstall or replace the PCU mm from the main Replace the laser optics housing scan registration of Bk unit Replace the BICU Skew correction upper limit error Defective BICU Reset the skew correction value Others see the note at the bottom of the
144. by line Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list owitching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing 1 In the SP mode select the test print Then press Copy Window 2 Use the copy window copier mode to select the appropriate settings paper size etc for the test print Press Start to start the test print 4 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1 Selecting the Program Number Program numbers have two or three levels 1 Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin 2 Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust 3 Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that you want to open Then press that number to expand the list 4 Use the center touch panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want to set and press it The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or the current settings 313 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SP Node Service Open ALL Close ALL COPY Window X XXX KXX 1002 W Side to Side Registration COPY SP 1 002 002 py Tabl Side to Side Registration pre duae 4 Paper Tray 1 Paper Tray Paper Tray 2 Paper Tray 3 Paper Tray 4 Le Dup Lex 1005 Paper Buckle 1007 By Pass Size Detection 1103 Fus
145. can be input Facsimile Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables Enter the number and press ew ml Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency Enter the 547 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 mm number and press Remote Service I F Setting Selects the remote service setting O to 2 2 1 step 0 Remote service off 1 CSS remote service on 2 NRS remote service on CE Call Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Start of the service 1 End of the service This SP is activated only when SP 5816 001 is set to 2 Function Flag Enables or disables the remote service function O to 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Device Information Call Display Setting Displays or does not display the device information call content O to 1 0 1 step 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed SSL Disable Uses or does not use the RCG certification by SSL when calling the RCG O to 1 0 1 step 0 Uses the RCG certification 1 Does no use the RCG certification 548 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 RCG Connect Timeout 008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to
146. collection auger B in each PCU is driven by gears F at the end of the drum This toner then goes to the toner collection bottle see section Toner Collection Path and Drive in this section 171 Detailed Section Descriptions Development Development Operation A AG S NA FR 21 Apr 2006 This machine uses a dual component development system and has four development units which are included in the drum units one for each color Each contains 225 g of developer when it is new The developer in each unit is supplied to the development roller A by the two mixing augers B and attracted onto the surface of its roller The TD sensor C in the development unit and four ID sensors above the ITB control toner density Each development unit has a TD sensor The TD sensor contains an ID chip in which some information about the development unit is stored The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm circumference about 56 5 mm 112 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Drive The drum development drive motor K A drives the development roller for black through gears and a clutch The gear trains are shown in the diagram The development drive motor CMY B drives the development unit for magenta cyan and yellow through gears Developer Agitation Two mixing augers A circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer This happens at the following times Du
147. correct range Toner Supply Control Overview Toner supply control determines how long the toner supply clutch turns on This determines the amount of toner supplied This is done before every development for each color 749 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Toner supply control uses the following factors Density of the toner in the developer detected by the TD sensor Vrer Vr Pixel count Determines how much toner was used for the page The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in the development unit At the same time it accommodates changes in the development conditions through the potential control mechanism Environmental changes and the number of prints made are also used in the calculation The amount of toner supplied is determined by the on time of the toner supply clutch The total on time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chip for the relevant toner cartridge The amount of toner supplied also depends on the process line speed for the urrent job The machine supplies the calculated amount of toner for each color Toner Supply Control Modes This machine has three toner supply control modes You can select them with SP3 044 1 to 4 1 Fixed supply mode This mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty You can adjust the amount of toner supply with SP3 401 1 to 4 if the image density is incorrect the default setting is 5 2 PID Proportional Int
148. digital data sent from the SBU Finally the processed data is sent to the printer as digital signals 4 bits pixel 758 Detailed Section Descriptions Laser Exposure 21 Apr 2006 Overview 4 N 3 5 6 A e fan Sp dv jz V y Y h JAM im T E vant p Y aa J Y J PET Fa 14 13 12 11 Ne Synchronizing detector board Y C E LD unit Y LD unit C LD unit Bk LD unit M Synchronizing detector board Bk M S F theta lens Bk M WTL Bk 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 WTL M 10 Synchronizing detector board Bk M E 11 Polygon mirror motor 12 Synchronizing detector board Y C S 13 WTL C 14 WTL Y 15 F theta lens Y C This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latent images on four OPC drums one drum for each color toner There are two hexagonal mirrors Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units Laser exposure for black and magenta starts from the rear side of the drum But for yellow and cyan it starts from the front side of the drum This is because the units for black and magenta are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units for yellow and cyan 759 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Optical Path AY S TE Eesti ay v The laser beams for black A and yellow B are directed to the upper part of the polygon mirror C Laser beams for magenta E and black D are directed to the lower part of the polygon mirr
149. does not receive an OK signal after sending the command 3 times Cable problems BICU problems PSU problems in the machine Main board problems in the peripherals Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected Replace the PSU if no power is supplied to peripherals Replace the BICU or main board of peripherals Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CSS communication error 0 CSS communication error 0 error A communication error occurred A communication error occurred during communication with the CSS communication with the A communication error occurred during communication with the CSS Communication ine error 00 line Communication ine error 00 Logging only Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures MF MF accounting device error4 0 MF accounting device error4 0 error 1 The controller sends data to the accounting device but the device does not an cbse co soma ere This occurs three times Loose connection between the controller and the Loose connection between the controller and the accounting device device Check the connection 249 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures g MF accounting device error 2 After communication is established the controller receives the brake signal from the accounting device Loose connection between the controller and the accounti
150. f you want to change the emblem that has been already attached remove the panel with an object not a sharp object as shown D and then install the correct emblem 2 Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays E Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT Keep these decals for use with these optional units 12 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Fire Prevention Cover A When the copier is installed on the floor without the optional paper tray unit or a table the cover A must be attached to the copier Install the cover A at the right side of the copier 13 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Manual Pocket Attachment 1 2 Attach the manual pocket A to the left side of the copier snap rivet x 2 If any finisher has been installed attach the manual pocket B to the rear side of a finisher snap rivet x 2 Initialize the Developer 1 Plug in the machine Make sure that the platen or ARDF is closed and the main power is turned off Turn the main power switch on The machine automatically starts the initialization procedure The Start button LED turns green when this procedure has finished Make copies of image samples text photo and text photo modes Do the Automatic Color Calibration process ACC as follows 1 2 3 4 D Print the ACC test pattern User tools gt Maintenance gt A
151. fan duct A x 3 EP x 1 x 1 Duplex inverter motor B x 2 x 1 23 x 1 adi La Toner Transport Motor 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 2 Controller box W Controller Box 3 Toner transport motor A x 3 EP x 1 158 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Toner Collection Unit 1 Gear unit W Gear Unit 2 Toner collection unit A x 6 E7 x 3 Paper Feed Clutches Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket PSU bracket W PSU Paper feed clutch 1 bracket A x 2 x 1 bushing x 1 e ox 159 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 6 Paper feed clutch 2 bracket C x 2 x 1 bushing x 1 7 Paper feed clutch 2 CP x1 x 1 160 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Drum Motor MCY Do not remove the PCUs when you replace the drum motor MCY 1 Rear cover M Rear Cover 2 Open the controller box W Controller Box 3 Drum motor MCY A x4 E x 1 Development Motor MCY
152. for each color 001 Current Bk 002 Current M 0 to 5 5 3 0 01 V step 003 Current C 004 Current Y 005 008 Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization DFU 005 Initial Bk 006 Initial M 0 to 5 5 3 0 01 V step 007 Initial C 008 Initial Y 009 012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color DFU 009 Pixel Correction Bk ENG 010 Pixel Correction M ENG 5 to 5 5 0 0 01 V step 011 Pixel Correction C ENG 012 Pixel Correction Y ENG Vtref Upper Lower Set DFU Adjusts the lower or upper limit value of Vtref for each color 001 Lower Bk ENG 0 to 5 2 0 01 V step 002 Lower M ENG 003 Lower C ENG 464 Service Tables 009 Initial TC Upper TC Upper Sensitivity ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG 010 ENG ENG ENG Lower Sensitivity ENG Toner Density Between H and M ENG Toner Density Between M and L ENG 21 Apr 2006 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step Adjusts the initial toner concentration 1to 15 7 0 1 wt step Adjusts the upper limit of the toner concentration 1 to 15 10 5 0 1 wt step Adjusts the lower limit of the toner concentration 1 to 15 4 0 1 wt step Adjusts the upper limit of the TD sensor sensitivity 0 2 to 0 5 0 44 0 001 V wt step Adjusts the lower limit of the TD sensor sensitivity 0 2 t
153. for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2852 and SP285 are multiplied by these SP values 442 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values ENG 005 008 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 3 HH Special 3 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2852 and SP285 are multiplied by these SP values ENG Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 ENG 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st TENG Not used Side 443 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step
154. for process control and 5801 1 All Clear all software counters and returns all modes and adjustments to their default values 5801 2 ENG All Clears the engine settings Initializes default system settings SCS System 5801 3 SCS Control Service settings operation display coordinates and ROM update information No SP modes are cleared But all files stored in the 674 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 HDD are cleared IMH Image Memory Handler No SP modes are cleared MCS Memory Control Service 5801 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings Initializes the fax reset time job login ID all TX RX 5801 5 MCS 5801 7 Fax application settings local storage file numbers and off hook timer The following service settings Bit switches Gamma settings User amp Service Toner Limit The following user settings 5801 8 Printer application Tray Priority Menu Protect System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver I F Setup I O Buffer and I O Timeout PCL Menu Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and 5801 9 Scanner application all the scanner SP modes Deletes the network file application management 5801 10 Netfile application mE files and thumbnails and initializes the job login ID All setting of Network Setup User Menu NCS Network Control Service 5801 12 IPU Clears the BICU settings Initializes the
155. for special paper 2 in full color mode Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 130 30 1 uA step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Special 2 Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for ENG each paper size SP2803 and SP280 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S1 ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S1 ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S1 100 to 600 130 5 step 005 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 426 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 138 mm s 1st Side S2 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side S2 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S2 100 to 600 160 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S3 ENG Paper Transfer Plain 100 to 600 200 5 step 138 mm s 2nd Side S3 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side S3 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st
156. from its home position Punch HP punch movement HP or paper position slide HP sensor does not turn on after each unit has returned to its home position Shift tray position sensor does not turn on after the shift tray has lifted up Shift tray position sensor does not turn off after the shift tray has lifted down Jogger HP sensor does not turn off after the jogger fences have moved from its home position Jogger HP sensor does not turn on after the jogger fences have returned to its home position LCD Display R7 R11 R1 R3 R1 R3 R7 R11 300 Troubleshooting Jam Code SP 7504 142 7504 143 7504 144 7504 145 7504 146 Display Finisher Shift Roller Motor B793 Finisher Folding Plate Motor B793 Finisher Staple Motor B793 Finisher Exit Motor B793 Finisher Stack 1 Release Motor B793 21 Apr 2006 LCD Description Display Shift motor HP sensor does not turn off after the shift roller has moved from its home position R1 R3 Shift motor HP sensor does not turn on after the shift roller has returned to its home position Fold plate HP sensor does not turn off after the fold plate has moved from its home position R7 R11 Fold plate HP sensor does not turn on after the fold plate has returned to its home position Staple HP sensor does not turn off after the staple has moved from its home position R7 R11 Staple HP sensor does not turn on after
157. in this procedure again from Step 1 Auto Erase Memory Setting gt On Exit the User Tools mode Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings gt Administrator Tools gt 1 09 09 2006 14 13 0 0 Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon A shows Make a Sample Copy Check the overwrite erase icon The icon C changes to D when job data is stored in the HDD The icon goes back to its usual shape E after this function has completed a data overwriting in the HDD 78 Installation 21 Apr 2006 USB Host Interface A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure S l If the IEEE1394 unit is installed in I F Card Slot A remove it Remove the slot cover A from I F Card Slot A x 2 Install the USB Host Interface B Knob screw x 2 into I F card slot A Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All e 0 I o Connections at the end of this section 19 Installation 21 Apr 2006 PictBridge A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You must install the PictBridge option in SD Card slot 2 However the Postscript option and the data overwrite security unit option are also installed in SD Card slot 2 You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have the postscript or data overwrite security unit option installed an
158. job login ID SmartDeviceMonitor for 5801 11 NCS 5801 13 R Fax Admin job history and local storage file numbers Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service 5801 14 Clear DCS Settings settings 675 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Initializes the UCS User Information Control 5801 15 Clear UCS Settings Service settings Initializes the MIRS Machine Information Report 5801 16 MIRS Setting Service settings Initializes the CCS Certification and Charge control Service settings 5801 17 CCS Memory Clear All engine related SP modes except for the following 5998 1 ENG Setting Serial number information SP modes related to meter charge Counters and logging data 5998 2 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine Input Check Table When entering the Input Check mode 8 digits display the result for a section Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table II l c c pe Copier Reading Interlock Release Detection 5803 1 o Interlock Release Detection 1 Front door open Front door close Interlock Release Detection 2 Front door open Front door close 676 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5803 2 Right Cover Open Close Close 5803 3 Toner Collection Bottle Set 5803 6 Contact Release Motor Overcurrent Normal 5803 7 Tray 1 Lift Motor Overcurrent Over current 5803 8 Tray 2 Lift Motor Overcurrent Over curr
159. left side fence bar it must be centered 2 Install the by pass paper size detection switch so that the hole A in this switch faces the projection B of the left side fence bar 3 Reassemble the copier 4 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 5 Check this switch operation with SP5803 071 By pass paper size lt Input Check Display on the LCD Paper Size Display Display 10010000 B5 SEF 11100000 11010000 B6 SEF 00110000 11000000 A6 SEF 10110000 186 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 By pass Paper Feed Unit Open the right door 2 Remove the by pass tray unit gear A 69 x 1 and bushing B at the rear of the tray 3 Close the right door 4 Open the by pass tray unit 5 By pass tray cover C 4 hooks 6 By pass paper feed unit D x 1 57 x 2 187 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Duplex Unit Duplex Unit Rear cover i Rear Cover Right rear cover Right Rear Cover Open the right door Duplex unit A x 2 x1 69 x 1 When removing the duplex unit pull it to the rear side i o i ou Duplex Transport Motor Rear cover iM Rear Cover Right rear cover if Right Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Duplex transport motor bracket A x 3 EP x 1 mo xm 188 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 5 Duplex transport motor B x 4 timing belt
160. main switch off Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 3 Turn the main switch on Specify the SP and UP mode settings Do the process control self check Do ACC for the copier application program Do ACC for the printer application program NVRAM on the Controller A CAUTION m oe e D If you change the NVRAM in the controller and the Data Overwrite Security unit is installed this Data Overwrite Security unit must be replaced with a new one Make sure that you have the SMC report factory settings This report comes with the machine Output the SMC data W SP5 990 001 if possible Turn the main switch off Then put a blank formatted SD card into SD card slot 3 Turn the main switch on Copy the NVRAM data iMf SP5 824 001 and the address book data in the HDD SP5846 051 to an SD card if possible Ep An error message shows if local user information cannot be stored in an SD card because the capacity is not enough You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write protected Enter SP mode Then print out the SMC reports W SP5 990 001 if possible Turn off the main switch Then unplug the power cord 201 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Replace the NVRAM on the controller Then reassemble the machine Check if the serial number shows on the operation panel SP5 811 002 Input the serial number if it does not show Contact your
161. must face the rear 6 Do steps 7 through 13 again in the Section 117 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Touch Panel Position Adjustment 4 t is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times When you replace the operation panel When you replace the controller board When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly Do not use items 2 to 9 on the Self Diagnostic Menu These items are for design use only 1 Press press 9 O90 press 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu self Diagnostic Menu 1 Touch Screen Adjust 6 Touch Screen Test 7 LED Test 7 Rom Checksum Test 3 Hard Key Test 4 Buzzer Test 5 LCD Test Taia Les 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark OK Touch Screen Adjust Touch the upper left mark and then the lower right mark of the panel using a pointed tool Press the E key to quit Re input is available using L key Press the lower right mark when shows Touch a few spots on the touch panel to make sure that the marker shows exactly where the screen is touched 6 Press Cancel Then start from Step 2 again if the mark does not show where the screen is touched 7 Press OK on the screen or press when you are finished 8 Touch Exit on the screen to close the Self Diagnostic
162. on one side are not counted 0 to 9999999 0 1 T PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing This is the total for all applications C PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the copier application F PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the fax application P PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application S PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of 649 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 pages processed for printing by the scanner application L PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 426 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of 8 427 pages processed for printing by Other applications mene T alone seine semences prece
163. scanner section image problem exposure glass mirrors scanner movement etc Check the image processing area of the colour specified in the previous step Check the connection between the SBU BICU or replace the SBU Considerable Symptom Toner blasting Check which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias Image density change Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps Dirty Background Check in which condition the problem is reported and follow the required procedure Colour vertical bands lines dirty background Check the OPC drum and or development unit Colour shift Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required Colour lines bands dirty background When the PCU development unit is close to its life end the developer or the cleaning blade of the PCU wears out causing vertical colour lines bands or dirty background Check the related colour unit and replace it if necessary 287 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 From the previous diagram Line Position Adjustment When there are color registration errors on the output do the line position adjustment as follows Ep Use A3 DLT size paper for this adjustment Test 1 Do SP2 111 003 Mode c rough adjustment 2 Use SP2 194 007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct 0 Completed successfully 1 Not completed If the result is 1 refer
164. selection display on the LCD on the LCD Memory Clear NOTE For more information see NOTE 1 following SP8 xxx table 001 All Clear Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters and returns all modes and adjustments to their default values Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM or after the copier has malfunctioned due to a damaged NVRAM mee Clears the engine settings pF Clears the system settings mme 544 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Clears IMH data DFU T 005 Clears MCS data DFU Copier Application m 6 Clears the copy application settings omme Clears the fax application settings 008 Clears the printer application settings cavern E Clears the scanner application settings Web Service Network Application 010 Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails and initializes the job login ID e Jp 011 Initializes the system default and interface settings IP address also SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin WebStatusMonitor settings and the TELNET settings oe EE ooo Initializes the job login ID SmartDeviceMonitor for 012 Admin job history and local storage file numbers moss 014 Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings sfo 545 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Initializes the UCS Use
165. slot Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine This feature does not work if the card is write protected After you do this SP go out of the SP mode and then turn the power off Do not remove the SD card until the 572 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Search Option This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book Bit Meaning O60 0 Checks both upper lower case characters 1 Japan Only 2 Japan Only 3 Japan Only 4 to 7 Not Used Complexity Option 1 Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local address book Specifically this SP limits the password entry to upper case and sets the length of the password 0 to 32 0 1 step note This SP does not normally require adjustment This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to control access to the address book 063 Complexity Option 2 DFU 064 Complexity Option 3 DFU 065 Complexity Option 4 DFU Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution l server address book that is used in the 091 FTP Auth Port Setting identification mode 0 to 65535 3671 1 step Shows the status of the encryption function for 094 Encryption Stat the address book data 573 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5847 1 through 5847 8 changes the default settings of image data transferred externally by the Net
166. slot 2 F x 1 4 Turn the SD card B label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 5 Connect the network cable if the NIB option is installed 6 Turn on the main power switch T Go into the SP mode and push EXECUTE with SP5 878 8 Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch Then turn off the main power switch 9 Turn on the machine power 10 Do SP5990 005 SP print mode Diagnostic Report 11 Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area A of the diagnostic report are the same as those in area B A ROM Number Firmware Version HDD Format Option B Loading Program GW2a zoffy T 12 13 14 15 16 Installation 21 Apr 2006 ROM No Firmware Diagnostic Report Loading Program B Version A Data Overwrite Security HDD Format Option GW2a zoffy Unit B7355060 0 03 B7355060 0 03 Important The ROM number and firmware version number change when the firmware is upgraded However the important thing is to make sure the numbers in A are the same as the numbers in B fthe ROM numbers are not the same or the version numbers are not the same this means the unit was not installed correctly If this happens Make sure the unit type Type D If they do not match 2 Replace the Data Overwrite Security Unit SD card with the correct type 3 Do the installation procedure
167. spem TI some These counts SP8 421 to SP8 427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes 650 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Booklet Original Pages T PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below regardless of which application was used C PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application P PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application L PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below O PrtPGS ImgEadt 0 to 9999999 0 1 651 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted The Cover Slip Sheet count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2 The number of pages printed in series one side or Series Book mE printed
168. step Vofset Error Counter ENG Vofset Threshold ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 V step Vsg Upper Threshold ENG 0 to 5 4 5 0 01 V step Vsg Lower Threshold ENG 0 to 5 3 5 0 01 V step Vsg Adjustment Result 003 004 005 006 Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment 2 ees The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor sensor for Front sensor for Bk sensor for Cyan sensor for Center sensor for Magenta sensor for Yellow and sensor for Rear 475 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 002 Latest 1 9 Unexpected error 3 Offset voltage error 003 Latest 2 2 Vsg adjustment value error 004 Latest 3 1 O K 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 ID Sensor Sensitivity Display Not Used 001 K2K Latest ENG 002 K5K Latest ENG 003 K2M Latest ENG 004 K5M Latest ENG 0 to 5 0 0001 step 005 K2C Latest ENG 006 K5C Latest ENG 007 K2Y Latest ENG 008 K5Y Latest ENG ID Sensor Sensitivity Setting DFU 001 K2 Upper ENG 0 to 1 0 32 0 01 step 002 K2 Lower ENG 0 to 1 0 22 0 01 step 003 K5 Upper ENG 0 to 10 5 0 01 step 476 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 0 to 1 1 1 step O Linear 1 Curve 009 K5 Approximate Method ENG K2 Upper Lower Limit Ba ENG 0 to 1 0 0 01 step Coefficient 1 K2 Upper Limit
169. table Replace the BICU For details about how to reset the skew correction value see Recovery procedure for SC285 and no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit in Laser Optics Housing Unit Replacement in the Replacement and Adjustment section of the manual After Executing SP2 111 001 Result SP2 194 010 011 Test pattern check Possible cause Countermeasure 012 Result Result 1 dics Line pattern White image Defective laser optics housing unit detection Abnormal image shutter Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern 290 Troubleshooting failure Result 5 Out of adjustable range 21 Apr 2006 After Executing SP2 111 001 Normal image but with color registration errors Low image density on the output The main scan registrations of M C Y are shifted by more than 1 4 mm from the main scan registration of Bk The sub scan registrations of M C Y are shifted by more than 1 4 mm trom Defective BICU Replace the shutter motor Replace the high voltage power supply unit Do the forced process control SP3 011 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx Replace the BICU Defective ID sensor shutter Defective ID sensor Defective BICU Replace the ID sensor shutter solenoid Replace the ID sensor Replace the BICU Low pattern density Do the forced process control SP3 01
170. test pattern When you are prompted to confirm your selection touch Yes to select the test pattern for printing Touch Copy Window to open the copy window then select the settings for the test print paper size etc If you want to use black and white printing touch Black amp White on the LCD If you want to use color printing touch Full Colour on the LCD Press the Start key to start the test print After checking the test pattern touch SP Mode on the LCD to return to the SP mode display Reset all settings to the default values 10 Touch Exit twice to exit SP mode 1 dot slant pattern Fine S MNA 1 dot slant pattern Rough None 702 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 703 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Printer Service Mode SP1 XXX Service Mode Bit Switch Bit Switch 1 Settings 1001 2 Bit Switch 2 Settings 1001 3 Bit Switch 3 Settings 10014 Bit Switch 4 Settings CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings DFU 1001 5 Bit Switch 5 Settings 1001 6 Bit Switch 6 Settings 1001 7 Bit Switch 7 Settings 1001 8 Bit Switch 8 Settings Clear Setting Initialize Printer System Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode 1003 3 Delete Program a 1004 Print Summary Print Summary 1004 1 Prints the service summary sheet a summary of all the controller settings 1005 Display Version 1005 1 Displays the version of the controller firmware 704
171. the external line this SP display is completely blank If Cumin M has connected to an internal line then the number of the connection to the external line is displayed If Cumin M has connected to an external line a comma is displayed with the number The comma is inserted for a 2 sec pause The number setting for the external line can be entered manually including commas Dial Up User Name Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up Follow these rules when setting a user name Name length Up to 32 characters Spaces and ft allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks Dial Up Password Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up Follow these rules 157 when setting a user name Name length Up to 32 characters Spaces and ft allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks Local Phone Number 161 Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where Cumin M is 555 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 162 163 164 173 connected This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to return Calls Limit 24 numbers numbers only Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming When the Call Center calls out to a Cumin M modem it sends a repeating ID tone 1 This SP sets the line remains open to send these ID tones after the number of the Cumin M modem is dialed up and connected O
172. the machine waits until the user loads the correct paper in the tray 823 Detailed Section Descriptions PictBridge General Function 21 Apr 2006 The PictBridge function can make a PictBridge standard DSC Digital Still Camera connect with the machine using a USB cable As a result photographs in the DSC can be printed directly with a machine that has the PictBridge application Photo image format Exif JPEG JFIF TIFF MMR Ricoh cameras only tis possible to connect more than one DSC at the same time but it is only possible to print from one DSC If more than one DSC is connected you can only print from the first DSC that was connected Printing Function List Name Single image printing Selected image printing DPOF printing All image printing Index printing Trimming Multiple number printing Date and file name printing Paper size Image print size Requirement for AT C1 PictBridge Standard 824 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Multi Image Layout N up Edge to edge borderless printing _ eae Ao uL Paper type specification Optional Available Form printing Available Camera memo printing Available Printing Function Description Single image printing This function can print an image displayed on the DSC The image is enlarged and rotated to match the paper but the image aspect ratio is not changed Landscape A A gt
173. the paper dust container C 799 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 By pass Paper Separation F A When the paper set sensor detects paper and the machine gets a by pass printing job the by pass solenoid A unlocks the feed shaft stopper at the front end of the by pass feed shaft B The by pass feed shaft has the by pass feed roller C and two cams D These cams move the paper lift plate E up and down This pushes the paper against the feed roller To feed the paper the by pass feed roller makes one turn After this the rollers inside the machine can feed the paper and the solenoid locks the shaft again The by pass tray has the separation pad system The by pass feed roller and separation pad F feed the top sheet of paper stack By pass Paper Size Detection A There are two paper side plates A on the by pass tray These connect with the paper size sensor B through a rack and pinion mechanism 800 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Fusing Overview Thermopile 8 Pressure roller thermostat Tension roller 9 Pressure roller thermistor Fusing roller 10 Fusing belt Pressure roller 11 Heating roller Lubricant roller 12 Heating roller fusing lamps Cleaning roller 13 Heating roller thermostats Pressure roller fusing lamp 14 Heating roller thermistor A belt fusing system is used This has a faster warm up time than a c
174. the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box Open the front door F of the finisher and then pull the locking lever G E Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever Secure the locking lever 1 knob screw M3 x 8 Close the front door Install the copy tray H 1 knob screw M4 x 10 oe a o Connect the finisher cable I to the main machine below the right rear handle am eo m 10 Attach the staple position decal J to the ARDF as shown 11 Turn on the main power switch and check the finisher operation 44 Installation 21 Apr 2006 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher B793 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Rear Joint Bracket 1 2 Front Joint Bracket 1 3 Grounding Plate 1 4 Upper Output Tray 1 Cushion 6 Lower Output Tray 1 7 Short Knob Screw 1 8 Long Knob Screw 1 9 Screw M3 x 8 2 C NO 10 screw M4 x 14 4 45 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure The bridge unit B227 and optional paper feed unit B800 or B801 must be installed before installing this finisher B793 2 Open the front door A of the 1000 sheet booklet finisher and then pull out the jogger unit B 3 Remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside o
175. the test The machine automatically starts the self diagnostics and prints the diagnostic report after completing the test Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors You can check the errors detected during self diagnostics with SP7 832 001 Diag Result 729 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Using the Debug Log This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis Every time an error occurs debug information is recorded in volatile memory But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on To capture this debug information the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine Then ask the user to reproduce the problem Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log The debug information cannot be saved until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target has been selected 1 Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on Press then use the 10 key pad to enter VO Press and hold down for more than 3 seconds Touch Copy SP Onthe LCD panel open SP5857 2
176. them with SP2 103 if necessary Leading edge 1 5 to 5 0 mm Side to side 0 5 to 4 0 mm Trailing edge 0 5 to 0 6 mm Color Registration Line Position Adjustment The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints Do the following if color registration shifts Do Auto Color Registration as follows to do the forced line position adjustment 1 First do SP2 111 3 2 Then do SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A 97 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 You should also do the line position adjustment at these times After you transport or move the machine you should do the forced line position adjustment if you install the machine at the user location if the machine is pre installed at the workshop and moved to the user location When you open the drum positioning plate When you remove or replace the motors clutches and or gears related to the drum development transfer sections When you remove or replace the image transfer belt image transfer belt unit or laser optical housing unit Printer Gamma Correction J The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output You only need the printer gamma correction to fine tune to meet user requirements Use SP modes i
177. to 24 1 1 step The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec For example if you set 2 the line will remain open for 4 sec This is the number of the dial up access point for Cumin M If no setting is done for this SP code then a preset value determined by the country selected is used Default 0 Allowed Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Line Connecting This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer This setting dedicates the line to Cumin M only or sets the line for sharing between Cumin M and a fax unit O to 1 0 1 step 0 Sharing Fax 1 No Sharing Fax ET If this setting is changed the copier must be cycled off and on SP5816 187 determines whether the off hook button can be used to interrupt a Cumin M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction This SP displays the serial number registered for the Cumin M Modem Serial Number 174 Retransmission Limit 556 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Normally it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update requests and for the notification that the certification has been completed However Cumin M generates charges based on transmission time for the customer so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time do this SP to cancel the time restriction 175 Modem Modulation Mode Setting Thi
178. to 250 90 5 step 005 008 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side 431 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Special 2 ML Special 2 Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 90 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 2 MM Special 2 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values ENG 10 to 250 170 5 step 2833 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 138 mm s 1st Side 002 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step
179. value makes the image shift to the right side on the print 1 pulse 1 16 dot Area0 Bk ENG 027 028 Areal Bk ENG 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 029 Area2 Bk ENG 030 Area3 Bk ENG 031 Area4 Bk ENG 346 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Not used 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step Not used 347 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Not used 256 to 255 0 1 sub dot step 192 ENG Not used 348 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2152 Area Shad Correct Setting FA Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power The main scan is divided into 16 areas However the image areas are limited from area 1 to area 14 For BK and Magenta area 1 is at the rear side of the machine left side of the image and area 14 is at the front side of the machine right side of the image For Cyan and Yellow area 1 is at the front side of the machine right side of the image and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine left side of the image This is for the synchronizing detection 001 Area 0 Bk ENG board 002 Area 1 Bk ENG 003 Area 2 Bk ENG 004 Area 3 Bk ENG 005 Area 4 Bk ENG 006 Area 5 Bk ENG 007 Area 6 Bk ENG 008 Area 7 Bk ENG 50 to 150 100 1 step 009 Area 8 Bk ENG 010 Area 9 Bk ENG 011 Area 10 Bk ENG 012 Area 11 Bk ENG 013 Area 12 Bk ENG 014 Area 13 Bk ENG 015 Area 14 Bk ENG 349 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006
180. x 6 121 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 3 Rear fan bracket C for the laser housing optics unit P x 3 EF x 7 4 Front fan bracket D for the laser housing optics unit F X 2 D 5 Remove the old laser optics housing unit E F x 2 EF x 2 122 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit Anew laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units When you replace the laser optics housing unit use caution E 1 Push the new laser optics housing unit A slowly into the copier until the bracket B bumps against the frame of the copier 2 Remove the bracket B and then push the new laser optics housing unit fully into the copier x 2 All x 3 Reassemble the machine After installing the new laser optics housing unit Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser optics housing unit 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch A Input data for SP modes EN Main Scan Length Detection Disp Bk SP 2 185 001 247975 Color Registration Correction Bk SP 2 101 001 xc B TELL HIEL HHHH TELL EP HH HHH WIE HA ETE HT 2 Adjust the main scan magnification only for bla
181. 0 1 step Displays the absolute humidity 0 to 100 0 01 g m step Displays the previous environmental condition which is measured in absolute humidity 1 to 5 1 step 1 LL 2 ML 3 MM 4 MH 5 HH Displays the previous temperature O to 100 1 C step Displays the previous relative humidity O to 100 1 step Displays the previous absolute humidity 0 to 100 0 01 g m step 337 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Color Registration Correction FA These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted at the factory However you must input a value for SP2101 001 after replacing the laser optics housing unit For details see Laser Optics Housing Unit in the Replacement and Adjustment section The value should be provided with the new laser optics housing unit 001 Main Dot Bk ENG 002 Main Dot M ENG 7512 to 511 0 1 dot step 003 Main Dot C ENG 004 Main Dot Y ENG 005 Subdot Bk ENG 006 Subdot M ENG 216384 to 16383 0 1 line step 007 Subdot C ENG 008 Subdot Y ENG Magnification Adjustment DFU Main Mag High Speed Bk ENG These are results of the main scan length adjustment 0 to 560 280 1 step Main Mag Medium Speed Bk ENG Main Mag Low Speed Bk ENG Main Mag High Speed M ENG Main Mag Medium Speed M ENG
182. 0 1 step DC charge bias Development bias x 1 004 Coefficient Y ENG I 0 001 x these vales SP3 241 005 to 008 005 Offset Bk ENG These are additional values for calculating 470 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 006 Offset M ENG the charge bias referring to the development bias at process control 007 Offset C 0 to 255 140 1 V step DC charge bias Development bias x 1 008 Offset Y ENG 0 001 x SP3 241 001 to 004 these values LD Power Setting Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control 001 Coefficient Bk ENG 002 Coefficient M ENG 1000 to 1000 75 1 step 003 Coefficient C ENG 004 Coefficient Y ENG 005 Offset Bk ENG 006 Offset M ENG 1000 to 1000 79 1 step 007 Offset C ENG 008 Offset Y ENG Coverage These 001 to 016 are coefficients for SP3 222 009 to 012 001 Latest Pixel Bk 002 Latest Pixel M ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color 2 003 Latest Pixel C O to 9999 0 1 cm step O04 Latest Pixel Y Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction 005 008 Average S is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the 471 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 number specified with SP3251 017 005 Average S Bk 006 Average S M O to 100 5 0 01 step 007 Average S C 008 Average S
183. 0 Completed successfully 1 Failed 009 Number of Failure ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 step 008 Number of Execution ENG 0 to 999999 0 1 time step 010 Error Result M ENG 0 to 9 0 1 step 0 Not done 1 Completed successfully 011 Error Result C ENG 2 Cannot detect patterns 3 Fewer lines on the pattern than the target 012 Error Result Y ENG 4 Not used 5 Out of the adjustment range 6 to 9 Not used MUSIC Start Time 2197 001 MUSIC Start Time EDT ENG 10 to 40 20 10ms step 002 TM Sensor Position ENG 50 to 500 105 5 0 1mm step i E c 364 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Music A D Interval 2198 DFU 001 ADC Trigger Counter ENG 7 5 to 20 10 0 1 um step Music Error Time Setting 2199 DFU 001 Error Detection Counter ENG 0 5 to 4 2 5 0 1 sec step LD Power LD Power Control Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color These SPs are activated only when SP3 041 002 is set to O 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain M ENG 003 Plain C ENG 0 to 200 100 1 step Increasing this value makes the image 004 Plain Y ENG 009 Thick 2 amp FINE Bk ENG density darker 010 Thick 2 amp FINE M ENG 011 Thick 2 amp FINE C ENG 012 Thick 2 amp FINE Y ENG Development DC Bias Development DC Bias Adjustment Adjusts the development bias Development bias is automatical
184. 0 0 1 mm step 013 Feed Clutch OFF Thick 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 014 Feed Clutch ON Thick 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Exit Stop Position ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 1st 2nd Sheet By pass Solenoid ON Plai ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step ain By pass Solenoid ON ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Thick Paper Bank Feed Timing Adj DFU 001 0 or 1 0 1 step 002 10 to 40 0 2 5 mm step 003 10 to 40 0 2 5 mm step 004 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 005 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 006 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 007 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 332 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SP2 XXX Drum Charge DC Voltage Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment 2005 Paper Type Process Speed Color Paper Type gt Plain Thick 1 Thick 2 Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes Charge bias DC component is automatically adjusted during process control therefore adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode SP3 041 1 Default ON is activated When deactivating process control mode with SP3 041 1 the values in these SP modes are used for printing 001 Plain Bk ENG 002 Plain M ENG 003 Plain C ENG 004 Plain Y ENG 005 Thick 1 Bk ENG 006 Thick 1 M ENG 0 to 1000 690 10 volts step 007 Thick 1 C ENG 008 Thick 1 Y ENG 009 Thick 2 amp FINE Bk ENG 010 Thick 2 amp FINE M ENG 011 Thick 2 amp FINE C E
185. 0 most recently detected original jams 599 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7801 ROM No Firmware Version Displays all versions and ROM numbers in SP7 910 and SP7 911 PM Counter Display Page Unit Color 7801 255 Engine Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit PM counters click up based on the number of A4 LT LEF size sheets printed Therefore the A3 DLT Double Count is activated The Double Count cannot be deactivated When a unit is replaced the machine automatically detects that the new unit is installed Then the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous SP7 906 1 to 10 and is reset to 0 The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7 906 1 to 10 NOTE The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station 7803 1 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 page step 7803 2 Page PCU Bk Page PCU Bk Bk 7803 3 ME PagePOUM M 7803 4 ME PCU C 7803 5 Page POUY PCU Y Page Development Unit Bk 600 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Page Development Unit M 7803 7 Page Development 7803 8 Unit C Page Development Unit Y Page Paper Transfer Unit 7803 9 7803 17 Page Toner Collection Bottle 7803 18 Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit 0 to 9999999 0 1 revolution step When a unit is replaced the machine au
186. 0 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG Stapler Capacity ee 50 sheets A4 B5 LEF LT Paper Capacity No staple mode 1 000 sheets A4 LT or smaller 80 g m 20 Ib 500 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG 80 g m 20 Ib 865 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Staple mode 80 g m 20 Ib number of sets ws 2to9 A4 LT LEF 100 to 20 100 to 20 B5 LEF 100 A4 LT SEF 100 50 to 10 50 to 10 50 i 1 Staple 2 positions Front Rear Staple positions M 2 Staples 2 positions Upper Left Staple Replenishment Cartridge 5 000 staples cartridge Power Source DC 24 V 5 V from the copier printer Power Consumption 50 W Weight 25 kg 55 2 Ibs Dimensions W x D x Hj 527 x 520 x 790 mm 20 8 x 20 5 x 31 1 500 Sheet Finisher Paper Size A3 to B6 SEF Paper Weight 52 to 128 g m 14 to 34 Ib 500 sheets A4 LT or smaller Tray Capacity y Capacity 250 sheets B4 LG or larger 30 sheets A3 B4 DLT LG Staple capacity pe 50 sheets A4 LT or smaller 3 positions Staple position 1 staple 2 positions Top right oblique Top left oblique 2 staples 1 positions Left Staple replenishment Cartridge 5000 staples 866 Specifications Bridge Unit Paper Size Paper Weight Power Source Dimensions W x D x H Shift Tray Unit Paper Size Paper Weight Tray Capacity Power Source Power Consumption Weight size W x D x Hy 1 bin Tray Unit Paper Size Paper
187. 0 sheets face down Shift tray 250 80 g m 125 B4 8 5 x 14 or more sheets 1 bin Tray 125 80 g m 500 sheet finisher 500 sheets 80 g m 1000 sheet finisher 250 1000 sheets 80 g m 1000 sheet booklet finisher 100 1000 sheets 80 g m Up to 999 sheets Arbitrary From 25 to 400 1 step Fixed North America Europe 25 25 50 50 839 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 65 61 73 7196 78 82 85 87 93 93 100 100 121 115 129 122 155 141 200 200 400 400 Memory Standard 1024 MB 120 V 60 Hz More than 12A for North America Power Source 220 V 240 V 50 60 Hz More than 8A for Europe ASIA Power Consumption 120V 220 240V Maximum 1440 W or less 1600 W or less Noise Emission Complete system 1 Model State Standby C1a 65dB A 70dB A Operating or Less or Less 40dB A 44dB A C1b Standby A A or Less or Less Mainframe Sound Power Level 40dB A 44dB A or Less or Less 840 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 67dB A 70dB A Operatin or Less or Less 1 The complete system consists of mainframe ARDF finisher and LCT The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology Dimensions W x D x H Copier 650 x 659 x 740 mm 25 6 x 25 9 x 29 1 Copier PFU or LCT 650 x 659 x 1000 mm 25 6 x 25 9 x 39 4 Weight Less than 120 kg 265 Ib excluding toner 841 iz Specificat
188. 0 to 250 100 5 step Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller between images 0 to 130 5 1 uA step Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller for measuring the resistance of the paper transfer roller when the image processing starts 0 to 130 30 1 uA step Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt during the process control and automatic line position control 0 to 80 22 1 nA step 368 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG Not used FINE 2316 Power ON Bias Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt at warming up mode after a machine has been Image Transfer ENG turned on or any door has been closed 0 to 80 5 1 uA step Transfer Roller CL Bias Transfer Roller Cleaning Bias Adjustment Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller ENG 0 to 200 50 1 uA step Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller Negative Limit Voltage ENG 0 to 5000 2000 1 V step Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller Common BW Bias Image Transfer Belt B W Bias Adjustment Image Transfer Plain O to 80 24 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B W mode for plain paper Image Transfer Thick 1 0 to 80 14 1 uA A
189. 001 ENG 1st Side 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side Thick 3 Switch Timing Trail Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate 002 ENG 2657 at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Thick 3 1st Side ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side ENG Thick 3 LL Thick 3 Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 1st Side Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step 1st Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 2nd Side Separation DC Thick 3 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step 413 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thick 3 ML Thick 3 Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step 1st Side Separation DC Thick 3
190. 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting Used to confirm the current WEP key setting Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used for the WEP Key entry 12 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Bluetooth A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth B C k E Remove the slot cover A from I F Card Slot B A x 2 Install the Bluetooth board B Knob screw x 2 into I F card slot B Insert the Bluetooth card C into the Bluetooth card adaptor D Attach the antenna cap E to the Bluetooth card Install the Bluetooth card adaptor D into Bluetooth board B Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All S M um m Se Connections at the end of this section 13 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Copy Data Security Unit A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure f you install this option you cannot use scanner or fax functions LIBE 1 Loosen the eight screws Slide up the controller box cover B and then remove it Attach the ICIB 2 copy data security board C to CN 504 on the BICU x 2 Reassemble th
191. 03 6 tatests 00 tatests 00 7403 7 tateste 00 6 7403 8 latest 0 7 7403 9 tatest8 8 7403 10 tatest9 0000 9 593 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Total Paper Jam Counter 7502 Displays the total number of jams detected 7502 1 Total Jam 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step Total Original Jam Counter 7503 Displays the total number of original jams 7503 1 Original Jam counter 0 to 9999 0 1 original step Paper Jam Location ON On check OFF Off Check Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected NOTE The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station 7504 1 For details see the Jam Detection in the m Troubleshooting section 4 594 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 595 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7504 102 Finisher Staple CTL 7504 103 Finisher Exit CTL 7504 104 Finisher Drive Motor CTL 7504 105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor CTL 7504 106 Finisher Jogger Motor CTL 7504 107 Finisher Shift Motor CTL 7504 108 Finisher Staple Motor CTL 7504 109 Finisher Exit Motor CTL 7504 130 Finisher Entrance CTL 7504 131 Finisher Proof Exit CTL 7504 132 Finisher Shift Tray Exit CTL 7504 133 Finisher Staple Exit CTL 7504 134 Finisher Exit CTL 7504 135 Finisher Folding CTL 7504 136 Finisher Folding Exit CTL 7504 137 Finisher Guide Motor CTL Finisher Staple Moving 7504 138 CTL Motor 7504 139 Finisher Punch Motor CTL 7504 1
192. 07 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2501 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Thick 2 Bias 2551 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper 001 Separation DC 1st Side ENG 0 to 5000 0 10 V step 002 Separation DC 2nd Side ENG ENG 401 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thick 2 Bias BW 2 223 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black and white mode 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step Thick 2 Bias FC 2 29d Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in full color mode 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step Thick 2 Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper tra
193. 1 Japanese ED LANG 2 2 Exit 0 Touch LANG 1 1 or LANG 2 2 720 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 What it does Touch this button on the screen or press on the 10 key pad to LANG 1 1 open the next screen so you can select the 1st language Touch this button on the screen or press on the 10 key pad to LANG 1 2 open the next screen so you can select the 2nd language Exit 0 Touch this key on the screen or press D on the 10 key pad to quit xi the update procedure and return to normal screen 6 Touch LANG 1 1 to select the 1st Language Touch LANG 2 to select the 2nd Language SDcard gt ROM Page02 d Italian i Spanish 2 Dutch 3 Norwegian Danish 6 7 Touch the appropriate button on the screen or press the number on the 10 keypad to select a language as the 1st or 2nd language If a language is already selected it will show in reverse Touching Exit 0 returns you to the previous screen 8 If you do not see the language that you want to select touch 1 7 or 1 9 on the screen or press or to show more choices The Download Screen opens after you select a language The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows 1 The following show to right of the selection 2 The first column shows the language currently selected The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language The example below sh
194. 1 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx No defective component Defective laser optics housing unit Defective BICU Do SP2 111 003 again Replace the laser optics housing unit Replace the BICU No defective component Defective image transfer belt Defective drive units Defective BICU the sub scan 1 Do SP2 111 003 again registration of Bk 2 Replace the image transfer belt 291 Troubleshooting Result 0 21 Apr 2006 After Executing SP2 111 001 The main scan registration is shifted by more than 0 66 mm but only at the central area of the image on the output The skew for M C Y is more than 0 75 mm from the main scan registration of Bk at the end of the scan line Others The main scan registration of Bk is No color shifted registration errors The main scan length of Bk is shifted Replace the drum motor Replace the BICU Defective ID sensor at center Deformed center area on the image transfer belt Defective BICU Replace the ID sensor Replace the image transfer belt Replace the BICU Defective PCU Defective laser optics housing unit Defective BICU Reinstall or replace the PCU Replace the laser optics housing unit Replace the BICU Skew correction upper limit error Defective BICU Reset the skew correction value see the note at the bottom of the table Replace the BICU Abnormal SP setting value of main scan Bk Adjust the value with
195. 1 to 131071 77 1 bit step ENG 2131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 128596 1 bit step ENG 7 131071 to 131071 63398 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step ENG 2131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step ENG 2131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step ENG 7 131071 to 131071 125869 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 60488 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 77 1 bit step ENG 2 131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step ENG 7 131071 to 131071 128596 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 63398 1 bit step 36 O N gt o z N Oo Service Tables 018 ch 1 Filter Rear bO ENG 7131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 019 ch 1 Filter Rear b1 ENG 131071 to 131071 168 1 bit step 020 ch 1 Filter Rear b2 ENG 7131071 to 131071 84 1 bit step 021 ch 2 Filter Front a1 ENG 131071 to 131071 125869 1 bit step 022 ch 2 Filter Front a2 ENG 7131071 to 131071 60488 1 bit step 023 ch 2 Filter Front bO ENG 7131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step 024 ch 2 Filter Front b1 ENG 7131071 to 131071 77 1 bit step 025 ch 2 Filter Front b2 ENG 7131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step 026 ch 2 Filter Rear a1 ENG 2131071 to 131071 128596 1 bit step 027 ch 2 Filter Rear a2 ENG
196. 114 001 Shift Time 0 to 5 0 0 1 sec step Specifies the start time for adding the first print additional temperature at 138 mm s line speed The machine starts to add the first print additional temperature when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding paper Shift Time Half Speed 0 to 5 0 0 1 sec step Specifies the start time for adding the first print additional temperature at 77 mm s line speed The machine starts to add the first print additional temperature when the time specified with this SP has passed after feeding paper Stand by Idling Specifies the interval between idling during stand by mode This idling during the stand by mode prevents the roller deformation Idling Time 1 to 60 2 0 1 sec step opecifies the length of each idling operation during stand by mode Idling Speed 0 to 3 1 1 mm sec step Not used 326 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 1116 Ends Temp Correction Center Temp 1 226 30 to 0 0 1 C step 010 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is 226 mm or more The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 018 Ends Temp 1 226 30 to 0 0 1 C step 011 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is 226 mm or more The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 018 Center Temp 2 226 30 to 0 0 1 C step 0
197. 12 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is 226 mm or more The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 019 Ends Temp 2 226 30 to 0 0 1 C step 013 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is 226 mm or more The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 019 Center Temp 3 226 30 to 0 5 1 C step 014 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is less than 226 mm The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 020 Ends Temp 3 226 30 to 0 5 1 C step 015 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is less than 226 mm The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 020 Center Temp 4 226 30 to 0 5 1 C step opecifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the 016 paper width is less than 226 mm 327 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 021 Ends Temp 4 226 30 to 0 10 1 C step 017 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is less than 226 mm The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 021 Control Time 1 226 0 to 250 0 1 sec step Specifies the start time of the temperat
198. 2 20 30 lt T 80 lt H lt 100 Operation Env Log Clear 7954 Clears the operation environment log ILI SP8 XXX Data Log2 Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available such as sending color faxes and so on However here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others can provide useful information SP Numbers What They Do SP8 211 to SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server SP8 401 to SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server SP8 691 to SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server Specifically the following questions can be answered Howis the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation the mode of operation is referred to as an application Before reading the Group 8 Service Table make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean 625 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Prefixes What it means Grand total of the items counted for all applications Total Grand Total C F P etc Copy application Fax application Totals pages jobs etc executed for each application when the job was not stored on the Print application document server Scan application To
199. 20 V 60 Hz More than 12A 220 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz More than 8 A 2 Permissible voltage fluctuation 10 Do not put things on the power cord Installation 21 Apr 2006 Optional Unit Combinations Machine Options 2 tray paper feed unit One from No 1 or No 2 2 Large capacity tray One from No 3 or No 4 4 ARDF Bridge unit One from No 6 or No 7 Shift tray 8 1000 sheet booklet finisher OT O N One from No 8 No 10 or No 11 Requires No 6 and one from No 1 and No 2 Punch kit 3 types No 8 required One of the three types One from No 8 No 10 or No 11 Requires No 6 and one from No 1 and No 2 cO 10 1000 sheet finisher One from No 8 No 10 or No 11 Requires No 6 11 500 sheet finisher Child options Child options require a parent option Controller Options IEEE 1394 One from the two I F Slot A USB Host Interface Unit IEEE 802 11b One from the three I F Slot B IEEE 1284 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Bluetooth I F Slot C Requires fax unit option B786 File Format Converter PostScript 3 PictBridge Option One from the three SD card slot 2 Data Overwrite Security Unit Browser Unit SD card slot 3 during installation only Installation 21 Apr 2006 Copier Installation A CAUTION Make sure that the image transfer belt is in its correct position before you move the machine Otherwise the image transfer belt and the black PC
200. 2006 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 008 MUSIC 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 009 MUSIC Skew Correction 0 or 1 0 1 step 010 Charge AC Control 0 OFF 1 ON Blade Damage 0 or 1 0 1 step Prevention 0 OFF 1 ON Toner End Prohibition Setting Enables or disables each adjustment at toner near end 001 Process Control ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Permit adjustment is done even toner 002 MUSIC ENG u near end condition 1 Forbid adjustment is not done at toner 003 TC Adj ENG near end condition Initial Process Control Setting Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation the process control at power on is executed 002 Non use Time Setting ENG 0 to 1440 360 1 minute step 003 Temperature Range ENG 0 to 99 10 1 C step 004 Relative Humidity Range ENG 0 to 99 50 1 RH step 005 Absolute Humidity Range ENG 0 to 99 6 1 g m step 48 O Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Non use Time Process Control Setting Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand by When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation the process control at stand by is executed Adjusts th
201. 24 MB resident SDRAM Flash ROM 32 MB flash ROM programmed for the boot system SD card Boot The 32 MB SD card installed in the SD card slot 1 includes the program for system network application printer PCL5c PS3 and RPCS applications and internal printer fonts 818 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 NVRAM 128 KB for the machine parameters logged data and a record of the number of pages printed for each User Code Network Interface 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB Interface USB2 0 IEEE 1394 Interface option Supports a data transfer speed of up to 400 Mbps IEEE 1284 Interface option This is a parallel printer port IEEE 802 11b option This lets you connect the machine to a wireless network Bluetooth option This lets you connect the machine to a Bluetooth network USB Host option This is for the connection of an external device digital camera etc IEEE 1394 or USB Host IEEE 1284 or IEEE 802 11b or Bluetooth File format converter HDD 3 5 HDD 40 GB can be connected using the IDE interface SD Card slots Slot 1 Boot SD cardl standard printer scanner application SD card Slot 2 Optional application for PostScript 3 Data Overwrite Security Unit or PictBridge Slot 3 Firmware upgrade or Browser Unit RDS Ricoh Document Server 819 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Hard Disk Overview The capacity of the hard disk is 40 GB The controller
202. 3 Open the duplex unit at the right side of the machine 4 Remove the standard tray B 5 Remove the front right cover C P x1 6 Remove the connector cover D x 1 36 Installation 21 Apr 2006 T 10 11 12 Install the bridge unit E in the machine Secure the bridge unit with the knob screw F and screw G Reinstall the front right cover in the machine Then close the right door of the machine Open the bridge unit cover H when installing the front right cover Otherwise the bridge unit cover is an obstacle for attaching the front right cover Install the optional finisher refer to the finisher installation procedure f you will not install the finisher at this time install the holder bracket I Otherwise the customer will damage the bridge unit if they pull up the bridge unit tray When you install the finisher you will need this bracket during the installation procedure Turn on the main power switch of the machine Check the bridge unit operation 37 Installation 21 Apr 2006 500 Sheet Finisher B792 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Output Tray 1 2 Unit Holder 1 3 Support Bracket 2 4 Support Bracket Cover 2 Screws 6 Knob Screws 4 T Snap Rings 2 8 Bracket Cover 1 9 Paper Guide 1 OT Oo 38 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure CAU
203. 338 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 006 Main Mag Low Speed M Main Mag High Speed C Main Mag Medium Speed C 009 Main Mag Low Speed C 010 Main Mag High Speed Y Main Mag Medium Speed Y 012 Main Mag Low Speed Y Erase Margin Adjustment Area Paper Size Adjusts the erase margin by changing the activation timing of the registration clutch 001 Lead Edge Width ENG 0 to 9 9 4 2 0 1 mm step 002 Trail Edge Width ENG Left ENG O to 9 9 2 0 1 mm step 004 Right ENG Lead Edge Width Thin ENG 0 to 9 9 5 0 1 mm step Duplex Trail L Size ENG 005 006 007 Duplex Trail M Size ENG 0 to 4 0 0 1 mm step 008 Duplex Trail S Size ENG 009 Duplex Left Edge ENG 0 to 1 5 0 3 0 1 mm step 010 Duplex Right Edge ENG 339 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2105 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 2106 LD Power Adj Process Speed Color Displays the LD power of each color for each process speed Each LD power setting is decided by process control High Speed Bk ENG High Speed M ENG High Speed C ENG High Speed Y ENG Middle Speed Bk ENG 50 to 120 100 1 step Decreasing a value makes lines thinner on Middle Speed M ENG the output Middle Speed C ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker on Middle Speed Y ENG Me output Low Speed Bk ENG
204. 38 mm s 1st Side S5 ENG ENG 100 to 600 240 5 step 14 gt ize P idth Paper Transfer Plain E a 138 mm s 2nd Side S5 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side S5 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S5 Thin Leading Edge Correction Thin Paper Leading Edge Correction 2471 ENG Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading 385 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 edge in each mode SP2453 and SP245 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2472 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 001 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side 002 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side 003 Not used Paper Transfer FINE 004 2nd Side Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values 2471 The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2472 Separation DC Plain 005 ENG 138 mm s 1st Page 0 to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Plain 006 ENG 138 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st 007 ENG Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd 008 ENG Page Thin Switch Timing Lead Edge 2472 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Tr
205. 40 Finisher Tray Lift Motor CTL 7504 141 Finisher Jogger Motor CTL Finisher Shift Roller 7504 142 CTL Motor 7504 143 Finisher Folding Plate CTL 596 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7504 144 Finisher Staple Motor 7504 145 Finisher Exit Motor 7504 146 7504 147 7504 148 Finisher Stopper Motor 7504 160 Finisher Entrance ON 7504 161 Finisher Entrance OFF 7504 162 Finisher Stack Exit 7504 163 Finisher Staple 7504 164 Finisher Staple Cancel 7504 165 Finisher Jogger Motor 7504 166 7504 167 Finisher Staple Slide 7504 168 Finisher Stack Tray 7504 169 7504 230 7504 231 7505 Motor CTL CTL Finisher Stack 1 Release Motor CTL Finisher Stack 2 Release Motor Finisher Pickup Lift CTL CTL CTL CTL CTL CTL CTL CTL CTL Motor CTL CTL Finisher Belt Lift Solenoid CTL Finisher Exit No CTL Response Finisher Communication CTL Error Original Jam Detection 097 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Jam Count by Paper Size 7506 Displays the number of jams according to the paper size 7506 5 A4 LEF CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 sheet step 598 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 7506 172 HLT SEF 7506 255 others Plotter Jam History Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams CTL Original Jam History Displays the 1
206. 41 Shorted CN257 9 Open SC551 Shorted Open CN257 30 SC561 Shorted Open Jam C Jam 20 CN218 12 Shorted Jam C Jam 1 CN218 15 Open Paper overflow message IS not SC498 Printed image has some problems such as rough image dirty background weak image or poor fusing 30 Co Troubleshooting No 538 539 540 541 542 543 S44 M6 M8 Sensor Name Sensor Board Name Original Width Sensor 1 Original Width Sensor 2 Original Length Sensor 1 Original Length Sensor 2 Original Length Sensor 3 Scanner HP Sensor Platen Cover Sensor Paper Transfer Roller HP Sensor Image Transfer Belt Contact Sensor 21 Apr 2006 Active CN Condition Symptom displayed when the paper overflow condition still remains Paper overflow message is displayed Shorted when the paper overflow condition does not remain Open Shorted Original paper size CN313 2 cannot be detected CN313 5 CN313 8 Open Shorted Original paper size cannot be detected CN313 11 CN313 14 Open SC120 Shorted SC121 Platen cover open CN318 2 Open Shorted CN318 5 cannot be detected Open Shorted CN214 19 5C452 5C442 309 Open Shorted CN215 2 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Blown Fuse Conditions Power Supply Unit Symptom when turning on the main switch 115V 220V 240V 5A 250V 5A 250V SVE power to the
207. 5 seconds the initial version update screen appears on the LCD in English 7 On the screen touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update ROM NEW What it means Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently ROM installed The first line is the module number the second line the version name Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card The first line is the module number the second line the version name 8 Touch UpDate or to start the update The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch OpPanel The power on key flashes on and off at 0 5 s intervals when the LCDC firmware is updating The power key flashes on and off at 3 s intervals when the update is finished 9 The Update is Done message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated 10 Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the Update is Done message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel 11 Press in the SD card to release it Then remove it from the slot 12 Switch the copier on for normal operation Error Messages An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download The error code consists of the letter E and a number The exa
208. 5 to 30 10 1 C step 002 Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the printing ready condition Ready temperature Target temperature specified in SP1 105 1 Temperature specified in this SP mode 320 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Pressure Ready Temp 0 to 100 20 1 C step 007 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition Fusing Limit Temp 0 to 30 15 1 C step 008 Specifies the limit temperature for the heating roller The paper can be fed when the heating roller temperature is lower than the specified temperature print ready temperature the value specified with this SP Printable Pressure Temp 0 to 100 50 1 C step 009 Specifies the print ready temperature for the pressure roller Stand By Center 130 to 180 165 1 C step 010 opecifies the stand by temperature for the heating roller Stand By Ends 130 to 180 165 1 C step 011 opecifies the stand by temperature for the heating roller Stand By Pressure 130 to 160 150 1 C step 012 Specifies the stand by temperature for the pressure roller opecifies the temperature of the panel off mode for the heading roller Panel Off Mode 015 Pressure Specifies the temperature of the panel off mode for the pressure roller Low Power Center 30 to 180 40 1 C step 016 opecifies the temperature of the low power mode for the heading roller 017 Low Power Ends 30
209. 6 Toner Refill Detection p D 5051 Enables or disables the toner refill detection Enables or disables the toner refil detection display 0 or 1 0 Alphanumeric Toner Refill Detection Display Display IP Address 5055 Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD D or 1 70 1 CTL 0 Not display 1 Display Coverage Counter Display 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD D or 1 70 1 CTL 0 Not display 1 Display Eye Catch Icon ON OFF 5057 Display or does not display the color mode icon on the LCD Dor 1 1 1 CTL 0 Not display 1 Display Toner Remaining Icon Display 5061 Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD Oor1 0 1 CTL 0 Not display 1 Display 531 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Parts PM Display Setting 5062 Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD Not used in this model Dor 1 1 0 ON 1 OFF A3 DLT Double Count SSP Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for A3 DLT size prints When you have to change this SP ask your supervisor 0 t0 2 0 1 step O Normal count Double Count 1 Double count 2 Normal count for unknown size Non Std Paper Sel Non Standard Paper Selection Determines whether a non standard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays Tray 2 and
210. 6 8 681 T PCFAX TXPGS These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC 8 683 Fax These SPs are provided for the Fax application only so the counts for SP8 681 and F PCFAX TXPGS CTL SP8 683 are the same 0 to 9999999 0 1 This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application from the PC through the copier to the destination When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting the pages are only counted once For example a 10 page fax is sent to location A and location B The counter goes up by 10 not 20 T TX PGS LS These SPs count the number of pages sent from the document server The counter for the C TX PGS LS CTL l application that was used to store the pages is F TX PGS LS incremented 0 to 9999999 0 1 P TX PGS LS CTL Paxecsas Dons The L counter counts the number of pages stored S TX PGS LS from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Pages stored with the Store L TX PGS LS CTL File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C counter Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count If several documents are merged for sending the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast the F count is done for the number of pages sent to each destination 8 701 TX PGS Port 0 to 9999999 0 1 665 Service T
211. 90 10 1 second step RCG Write Timeout opecifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step RCG Read Timeout opecifies the read timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step Enables disables access via port 80 to the SOAP method 00r 1 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled RCG C Registed 021 This SP displays the Cumin installation end flag 009 010 011 0 Installation not completed 1 Installation completed RCG C Registed Detail This SP displays the Cumin installation status 022 0 Basil not registered 1 Basil registered 2 Device registered Connect Type N M This SP displays and selects the Cumin connection method 0 0r 1 0 1 step 0 Internet connection 023 1 Dial up connection 549 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 061 Cert Expire Timing DFU Proximity of the expiration of the certification This SP setting determines if the proxy server is 062 Use Proxy used when the machine communicates with the service center Proxy Host This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin N and the gateway Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server address The address is necessary to set up Cumin N 4 The address display is limited to 128 characters Characters beyond 063 the 128 character are ignored This address is customer information an
212. Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub scan direction 2 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA Side to Side registration Adjustment Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the main scan direction 2 5 to 2 5 0 0 1 mm step FA Scanner Erase Margin Scale Scanner Erase Margin Scale Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap between the original and the scale Book Leading Edge Book Trailing Edge ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA Book Left Book Right ADF Leading Edge ADF Right ENG 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step FA ADF Left Scanner Free Run Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode Full color mode Full Size A3 or DLT 496 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Execute the scanner free fun with each mode 001 HP Detection Enable m Scanner free run with HP sensor check 002 HP Detection Disable m Scanner free run without HP sensor check Dust Check Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on off ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Selects the detect level O to 8 4 1 step ENG 0 lowest detection level 8 highest detection level Selects the level of the sub scan line 001 Detection ON OFF 002 Dust Detect Level correction when using the ARDF O to 4 0 1 step 0 Off ENG 1 Weakest 2 Weak
213. B of the heater to the connector of the main machine Install the heater C inside the machine x 1 Reassemble the machine 60 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Controller Options Overview This machine has I F card slots and SD card slots for optional I F connections and applications After you install an option check that the machine can recognize it see Check All Connections at the end of this section A Born Extemal CTL File Format Converter 2 I F Card Slots Slot Ais used for the IEEE1394 FireWire or USB Host only Slot B is used for one of the optional I F connections only one can be installed IEEE1284 IEEE802 11 Wireless LAN or Bluetooth Slot C is used for the file format converter only Only one of these cards IEEE1284 IEEE802 11 and Bluetooth can be installed at same time in this machine 61 Installation 21 Apr 2006 SD Card Slots Slot 1 is used for the standard printer scanner application only Slot2 is used for one of the optional applications PostScript 3 Data Overwrite Security Unit PictBridge Slot 3 is used for installing the Browser Unit or for service only for example updating the firmware SD Card Appli Move Overview The service program SD Card Appli Move SP5 873 lets you copy application programs from one SD card to another SD card Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs But there
214. BW and color printing mode during job Page Interrupt FC ENG 0 to 999 200 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs Page Stand By BW ENG 0 to 999 100 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand by mode The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the 362 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 007 008 009 010 011 012 condition of SP2 193 008 or SP2 193 009 is satisfied Page Stand By FC ENG 0 to 999 100 1 page step Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand by mode The line position adjustment is done when the number of outputs in color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the condition of SP2 193 008 or SP2 193 009 is satisfied Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment Mode b adjustment once The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions For details see Automatic Line Position Adjustment in the Detailed Section Descriptions section ENG 1 to 1440 300 1 minute step Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment Mode b adjustment once The timing for line position adjustment depends on the comb
215. Bias FC 435 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in full color mode Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Special 3 Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for ENG each paper size SP2852 and SP285 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step 1 size 2 297 P idth Paper Transfer Thick 1 ee HUNE pendet 77 mm s 2nd Side S1 ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S1 ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S1 ENG Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S2 ENG 100 to 600 150 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 1st TENG Not used Side S2 436 ENG Service Tables Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S2 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S4 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd
216. C s screen are different from the names displayed on the machine So it is possible to match the paper type names with this function Default Auto tray selection Plain paper Plain or recycled paper 831 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Form printing This function can print images in a predetermined layout format B C E A Image size A4 170mm x 128mm LT 174 5mm x 120mm B Image size A4 120mm x 90mm LT 112 5mm x 92mm C Image size A4 86mm x 65mm LT 88mm x 61mm D Image size A4 86mm x 65mm LT 88mm x 61mm E Image size A4 152 4mm x 108mm LT 156 7mm x 102 6mm Camera memo printing This function can print text data with an image if it is attached to the image 832 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Copy Data Security Unit General Function This function can prevent unauthorized copying by making a special masking pattern with an embedded message when an original is printed This enables the machine to make grayed out output when it is copied Confidential documents can never be duplicated on a machine that has the optional Copy Data Security Unit The embedded messages appear when a confidential document is copied on a machine without an optional Copy Data Security Unit However some MFP functions are disabled if this function is enabled Reduction less than 50 is disabled Scanner Fax application is disabled When copying on a machine with an optional
217. CC gt Start Put the printout on the exposure glass Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart Close the ARDF or the platen cover Press Start Scanning on the LCD panel The machine starts the ACC Check that the sample image has been copied normally 14 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Settings Relevant to the Service Contract Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract 4 You must select one of the counter methods developments prints in accordance with the contract iMif SP5 045 001 opecifies if the counting method used in meter charge mode is based on Counting developments or prints NOTE You can 0 SP5 045 001 method set this one time only You cannot Developments change the setting after you have set it for the first time Specifies whether the counter is doubled A3 11 x 17 double SP5 104 001 counting for A3 11 x 17 paper When you have to No Single change this setting contact your counting supervisor 5812 002 programs the service station fax number The number is printed on Service Tel SP5 812 001 the counter list when the meter charge No Setting through 004 mode is selected This lets the user fax the counter data to the service station Moving the Machine This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor See the section Transporting the Machine if you ha
218. Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure roller Pressure roller lamp consecutive full power2 consecutive Pressure roller lamp consecutive full power2 power 2 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition the pressure roller fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 8 seconds or more Broken pressure roller lt lt lt lamp Related Related SCcode SC545 code SC 545 1 Replace the pressure roller fusing lamp 2 Replace the PSU No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Zero cross frequency error When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11 detections the machine determines that input 60 Hz and SC557 occurs Noise High frequency 245 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures WT 1 Check the power supply source Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Consecutive fusing jam The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times The paper jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly 559 A This SC is activated only when SP1159 001 is set to 1 default 0 Paper jam in the fusing unit Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit Then make sure that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roller thermopile er
219. D card after you copy the application program from one card to another card 2 Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used 3 Remove the cover A F x 2 Keep the SD card in the place B after you copy the application program from one card to another card This is done for the following reasons 1 The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application 725 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 program 2 You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future 5 You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card You have to copy other data to the same SD card that stores PostScript data Move Exec The menu Move Exec SP5 873 001 lets you copy application programs from the original SD card to another SD card Important Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine If the write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge Turn the main switch off 2 Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied into this SD card 3 Insert the SD card having stored the application program to SD Card Slot 3 The application program is copied from this SD card Turn the main switch on Start the SP mode Select SP5 873 001 Move Exec
220. D sensor A in the development unit has an ID chip that contains the new unit detection flag The machine detects that a PCU is new if the flag in the ID chip is activated The machine automatically does the following adjustments when detecting the new unit detection flag PM counter clear for items related to the PCU Developer initialization Charge roller voltage control Process control Line position adjustment If the PM counter clear fails clear the following SPs manually SP3 902 1 to 4 SP3 902 5 to 8 SP3 902 9 to 12 Toner Supply Overview 1 Toner bottle each color 4 Toner attraction pump each color 2 Memory chip each color 5 Development unit each color 3 Toner end sensor each color 6 TD sensor each color 119 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 This machine uses four toner bottles Each bottle has a spiral groove in it and its groove moves toner to the toner attraction pump And the toner attraction pump transports the toner to the development unit The toner end sensor is attached to the toner supply tube The toner end sensor and the output from the process control define when the machine detects toner end Toner Supply Mechanism Toner supply from toner bottle to toner attraction pump The toner transport motor A rotates the toner bottle Bk via gears and a clutch It also rotates the toner bottle Y C M via gears clutches and timing belts Each bottle has a s
221. DC Voltage Output Drum Charge DC Voltage Output Drum Charge DC Voltage Output K 138 mm s Drum Charge AC Voltage Output K 77 mm s Drum Charge AC Voltage Output M 138 mm s Drum Charge AC Voltage Output Drum Charge AC Voltage Output M 77 mm s Drum Charge AC Voltage Output C 138 mm s Drum Charge AC Voltage Output C 77 mm s 693 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5804 91 9804 92 9804 93 5804 94 5804 95 5804 96 5804 97 5804 98 5804 99 5804 100 5804 101 5804 102 5804 103 5804 104 5804 105 5804 106 5804 107 Charge AC Output Drum Charge AC Voltage Output Y 138 mm s Y Full Speed Charge AC Output Y Medium Speed Charge AC Output Drum Charge AC Voltage Output Y 77 mm s Y Low Speed Development Development Bias Output Bk Output Bk Development Development Bias Output M Output M Development Development Bias Output C Output C Development Development Bias Output Y Output Y Paper Transfer u Paper Transfer Roller Output Positive current Output Paper Transfer Output foeni oerte oerte oerte Paper Transfer Roller Output Negative current Polygon Motor LL Polygon Motor 77 mm s Polygon Motor L DFU Polygon Motor H Polygon Motor 138 mm s 694 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Feed Motor 5804 109 Paper Feed Motor 77 mm s 77mm s Feed Motor 115mm s 5804 110 Feed Motor 138mm s Feed
222. Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white 511 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value RO fine adjustment for the odd red signal in BW the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Black Level Rough Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even green Last Correct Value GE signal in the CCD circuit board color Color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value GO rough adjustment for the odd green Color signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal Last Correct Value GE in the CCD circuit board color printing Color speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value GO fine adjustment for the odd green signal Color in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even green Last Correct Value GE Bu si
223. Do not take it back to your location Upload 1 2 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine Remove the slot cover 3 at the left rear side of the machine PF x 1 719 OM NAO BS w Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Install the SD card which has already been uploaded into the SD card slot 3 Turn on the main power switch Enter the SP mode Do SP5 846 052 Restore All Addr Book Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 3 Install the slot cover 3 Rae The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded If there is no data of address book information in the SD card an error message is displayed Installing Another Language Many languages are available But you can only switch between two languages at a time Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want You can select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel 1 2 3 Switch the copier main power switch off Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3 Switch the copier main power switch on The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds Touch Language Data 2 on the screen or press Download Language LCDC ROM B2315370 Lang Card Select Lang Now Lang LANG 1
224. E ENG 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S4 ENG 100 to 600 220 5 step 21 gt S4 size gt 14 P idth Paper Transfer Plain 0 mm 2 4 size 2 148 mm Paper width 138 mm s 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG oide S4 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S5 ENG ENG 100 to 600 240 5 step 148 mm 2 S5 size Paper width Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S5 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side S5 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S5 Plain Leading Edge Correction Plain Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2403 and SP240 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422 ENG 2421 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG 0 to 400 150 5 step 3 6 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422 Sep
225. EAE A EAER EE EnA AAE 106 DUSE RING RU mN 107 TU E E E E EE 108 vii B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 EXpos re GlaSS EE EEE EEE EE 108 Original Length Width Sensors rrrrarerarernnrrnnrrrarrrnnrnraneranennnennasennnennennranenanennnennnnen 109 EU 109 SE MOOT 112 ST B ard Unit SBU area 112 Exposure Lamp Stabilizer eeseesseessseseeeseenennnnnn nennen nnns 113 Front Scanner IE ar 114 Res MATER 117 Touch Panel Position Adjustment cc ccec cece ceeec eee seeeeeeee esse eeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeseeeaeees 118 BAS SO lcm T c 119 Caution Decal IO CATON ce uoi aoi settima EAEN ste c oru Kad Ed eU UN E 119 Laser 9 eu e in odi eoi 119 Polygon Mirror MOTOI NR UU M A 125 Tr 0 KO 2 0 EE 126 xn 126 Drum Unit and Development Unit rerrannnnrnarnarnannnnrnarnnnnnnrnnenannnnnnennannnnnnennennnannsenene 126 Toner Collection Bottle ccc ccccecccccccscceeeeece cece aE ERTA E EaR 130 Toner Supply Tube Fan ccceccceccseeceeeteeeeeeeeeeceeeseeseeeeeeseeeseeeeseteeeteeeeaeeseeteeeneeaaess 131 s duinsel m s mm 131 TOn r ENC SEI O t eee 137 mads EG EEE 138 Image Transfer Belt Unit rrrranrranrranrrnnnrnanrnnnnrannnanennnnnnannnanennannnanenanennnsnnanennsnnnn 138 I
226. EF 1299 009 010 011 012 001 LT T SEF LT Y LEF ENG 12 x 18 ENG Staple Position Adjustment Adjusts the staple position for each finisher B408 B793 B792 Value Moves the staple position to the rear side Value Moves the staple position to the front side Finisher 1 B408 B793 3 5 to 3 5 0 1 step 002 Finisher 2 B792 2 0 to 2 0 0 1 step 6134 Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment 590 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B793 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 2 mm step 003 A4 SEF Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 004 B5 SEF DLT T SEF 006 LG T SEF LT T SEF 12 x 18 Folder Position Adj This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B793 User SP 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 2 mm step 003 A4 SEF Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 004 B5 SEF Feed Out 005 DLT T SEF 006 LG T SEF BA 0 LT T SEF p 12 x 18 591 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Finisher Free Run These SPs are used only for B793 finisher 001 Free run for paper edge stapling 002 Free run for booklet stapling Shipping free r
227. ERNI Um 159 SE 159 PEN 760 Laser Synchronizing Detectors rrarrrnnrrnanrvnnnnrnrnnnnevanennnnnnannnanennnsnnnnennnennennnnnennne 761 LD Safely WICC verv 762 Automatic Line Position Adjustment cece cece cece eeeceeeeeeca esse eeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseeeaeees 763 Snutter WIC GM AIA SIM EEE ta 767 PCU Photo Gond clor Dni suere euet atus rh Stra Eno Ea 768 OE 768 TENNIS 169 PG Cl 6 6 031 RR m UU T m 172 Xil B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 TOTNES M 775 NU 775 Toner Supply Mechanism sasiscncicncvcinsisnnsusedunsaisnwabastesndneeai Kx Ea cen Ra ciu c I o nO V dl 716 TONE 21 g 1 6 0 REE EEE NE 778 L AI Meo eie uu 779 Toner Collection Path and Drive ccccccccseccceeeceeeceeceseeeeeeeeu cece eecaeeeseeeseeseeeeaneeaes 1719 Toner Collection Bottle Set Near Full Full Detection esses 781 Image Transfer and Paper Separation cccccecceccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeesseeeeeteeeneeeseeeseeeeeeaaers 782 AS TSO Mmmm 782 Paper Transfer and Separation cccccccssccseccececeecseeceeeseeeseeeeseteeeeeeseeeseeeseeseeeaeeees 788 PP 791 GE EEE EN EEE EEE ENE NE 791 Drive Tray 1 Tray 2 and By Pass Tray rrrnrrnnrrnnoranrrarnrernnrrnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnannnnennnnnn 192 Paper Lift Trays 1 amp 2 EE
228. End Sensor 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 2 Controller box W Controller Box 3 Toner end sensor A E x 1 2 hooks each 21 Apr 2006 137 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Image Transfer Belt Unit Open the right door Open the front door Open the drum positioning plate Ml PCU Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever A counterclockwise Te ce qe xt Pull out the image transfer belt unit B halfway C agro RES ae 6 Grasp the handles C and then pull out the image transfer belt unit fully 138 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit eae QI DE d sl R If you will install a new belt cleaning unit then set SP 3902 015 to 1 4 If you do this then the machine will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit automatically after you turn the power on again Do not use SP3902 015 or 013 if you replace the complete ITB unit Turn off the main power switch Open the right door Open the front door Open the drum positioning plate W PCU Loosen the screw A Turn the lock lever B clockwise Pull out the image transfer belt cleaning unit C 139 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Belt Image transfer belt cleaning unit W Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit Image transfer belt unit W PCU Turn the image transfer unit contact lover A counte
229. Exit Sensor Paper not 6138 22 Paper detected Proof Tray Exit Sensor detected 6138 23 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not home position Proof Full Sensor 6138 24 Not full Full Proof Tray Full Sensor Door SW 6138 26 Close Open Front Door Switch 682 Service Tables 6138 28 Clincher HP Sensor i position 21 Apr 2006 Not home 6138 30 Staple Near End Staple remaining Staple near end 6138 31 Self Priming 6138 32 Driver HP Sensor Punch Registration Detection HP 6138 33 Sensor Punch Moving HP Sensor 6138 34 Punch Movement HP Sensor Punch HP Sensor Punch HP Sensor 6138 35 Punch Pulse Count Sensor 6138 36 Punch Encoder Sensor Punch Chad Full Sensor Punch Hopper Full Sensor 6138 37 Punch Registration Detection 6138 38 Sensor Paper Position Sensor 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 Description 6139 1 Entrance Sensor Staple not detected Not home Home position 7 position Not home position Home position Staple detected Not home position Home position 7 Not home Home position 7 position Not full Full Paper not Paper detected detected Paper not Paper detected detected 6139 2 Shift Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 683 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Staple Entrance Sensor Paper not 6139 3 Paper detected Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor detected Staple Moving HP Sensor 7 7 6139 4 Not home po
230. F 1 ON New PCU Detection 3901 Turns new PCU detection on or off 001 ON OFF Setting ENG Dor 1 1 001 ON OFF Setting ENG 0 OFF 1 ON Manual New Unit Set 3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant parts of section 3 Replacement and Adjustment 001 Development Unit Bk ENG 00r 1 0 494 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 002 Development Unit Y ENG 0 OFF 1 ON 003 Development Unit C ENG 004 Development Unit M ENG 005 Developer Bk ENG 006 Developer Y ENG 0 or 1 0 007 Developer C Te MR 008 Developer M ENG 009 PCU Bk ENG 010 PCU Y ENG 0 or 1 0 011 PCU M es 012 PCU C ENG 013 Image Transfer Unit ENG 0 or 1 0 014 Fusing Unit ENG 0 OFF 1 ON Do not use 3902 013 if you only change the 015 Cleaning Unit ENG cleaning unit 016 Paper Transfer Unit ENG 3902 015 This is for the image transfer belt cleaning unit 017 Toner Collection Bottle ENG SP4 XXX Scanner Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment 4008 Adjusts the sub scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed Sub Scan Magnification 1 0 to 1 0 0 0 1 step FA Adjustment 4010 Leading Edge Registration Adjustment 495 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 4011 001 002 003 004 005 007 008 001
231. Feed roller C Separation roller D and torque limiter E 1 x 1 21 Apr 2006 181 Replacement and Adjustment Tray Lift Motor Rear cover i Rear Cover PSU bracket W PSU Open the controller box Controller Box IOB bracket iMf IOB Tray lift motor 1 A x 2 x 3 Tray lift motor 2 B x 2 E7 x 3 Ss PS Du mt 21 Apr 2006 182 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Overflow Sensor and Paper End Sensor et eS SP Rear cover i Rear Cover Right rear cover i Right Rear Cover Paper feed unit W Paper Feed Unit Paper overflow sensor A and paper end sensor B hook E x 1 each Paper end feeler C Vertical transport sensor bracket D x 1 x 1 Vertical transport sensor E E x 1 hook 183 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Registration Sensor eomm mc Rear cover iMf Rear Cover Right rear cover iM Right Rear Cover Paper feed unit Paper Feed Unit Paper guide plate 1 A and 2 B x 2 each Registration sensor C E x 1 hook 184 Replacement and Adjustment By pass Paper Size Detection Switch Open the by pass tray A 2 By pass tray cover B 4 hooks Close the by pass tray By pass paper size detection switch C E x 1 21 Apr 2006 185 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 When reinstalling this switch GN 1 Adjust the projection B of the
232. GainAdjust Gain Adjustment of OPC MCY Drum Motor 154 mm sec ENG 001 002 138 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 TGAIN High 1 GAIN Low 003 115 mm sec ENG 004 77 mm sec ENG ilii H C SecondaryFB Threshold Paper Transfer Roller Feed back Threshold Adjustment 2930 Adjusts the threshold between high resistance division 1 and low resistance division 2 at the paper transfer roller This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939 001 Voltage ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step 447 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SecondaryFB Plain 2931 did Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for plain paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Thin 2932 i Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for thin paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Special 1 2 ids Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for special 1 paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to
233. Id setting for enumeration 5839 010 Unique ID on the standard IEEE 1394 bus Determines how successive initiator login requests are 0839 011 Logout m handled during login in for SBP 2 0839 012 Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP 2 Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP 2 Range 5839 013 Login MAX 14555 o 62 68 Installation 21 Apr 2006 IEEE1284 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth A K l Remove the slot cover A from I F Card Slot B x 2 Install the interface board B Knob screw x 2 into I F card slot B Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 69 Installation 21 Apr 2006 IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN IEEE1284 Bluetooth L l B D 1 Remove the slot cover A from I F Card Slot B F x 2 2 Install the wireless LAN board Knob screw x 2 into I F card slot B 3 Install the wireless LAN card B in the wireless LAN board C Make sure the
234. Int Mag Subdot M ENG Not used Paper Int Mag Subdot C ENG Paper Int Mag Subdot Y ENG 005 M Scan Mag Subdot M ENG 006 M Scan Mag Subdot C ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 Disable correction 1 Enable correction 007 M Scan Mag Subdot Y ENG 008 Area Mag Subdot M ENG 009 Area Mag Subdot C ENG Not used 010 Area Mag Subdot Y ENG DFU 359 Service Tables 011 S Scan Cor Setting 21 Apr 2006 DFU 0 or 1 1 1 step ENG 0 Adjusted with Bk 1 Adjusted in minimum shift among four colors 2191 MUSIC Coefficient Setting Line Position Adjustment Coefficient Setting DFU ch 0 ID sensor at rear ch 1 ID sensor at center ch 2 ID sensor at front 001 ch O Filter Front a1 002 ch O Filter Front a2 003 ch O Filter Front bO 004 ch O Filter Front b1 005 ch O Filter Front b2 006 ch O Filter Rear a1 007 ch O Filter Rear a2 008 ch O Filter Rear bO 009 ch O Filter Rear b1 010 ch O Filter Rear b2 011 ch 1 Filter Front a1 012 ch 1 Filter Front a2 013 ch 1 Filter Front bO 014 ch 1 Filter Front b1 015 ch 1 Filter Front b2 016 ch 1 Filter Rear a1 017 ch 1 Filter Rear a2 ENG 7131071 to 131071 125869 1 bit step ENG 7131071 to 131071 60488 1 bit step ENG 2131071 to 131071 39 1 bit step ENG 7 13107
235. Junction Gate HP Sensor Stack Feed Out HP Sensor Jogger HP Sensor Jogger Fence HP Sensor Staple Tray Paper Sensor Staple Tray Paper Sensor Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Paper Stack Stopper HP Sensor Saddle Stitch Exit Sensor Stuck Relay2 Roller HP Sensor Clamp Roller HP Sensor Folder Tray Full Sensor 1 Bottom Tray HP 1 Sensor Reading Interfered Not home Not interfered Not home position Not home position Home position position Paper detected Paper not detected Not home position Paper not detected Not home position Paper detected Not home position 681 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Folder Tray Full Sensor 2 6138 11 Not full Full Bottom Tray HP 2 Sensor Folder Plate HP Sensor E 6138 12 Not home position Home position Fold Plate HP Sensor Saddle Stitch Arrival Sensor 6138 13 Paper not detected Paper detected Fold Unit Entrance Sensor Folder Cam HP Sensor 7 6138 14 Not home position Home position Fold Plate Cam HP Sensor Staple Exit Sensor Paper not 6138 15 Paper detected Stapler Tray Exit Sensor detected Shift Tray Paper Sensor Shift tray not Shift tray 6138 16 Shift Tray Paper Position Sensor detected detected 6138 18 Shift Roller HP Sensor Not home position Entrance Sensor Paper not 6138 20 Paper detected Finisher Entrance Sensor detected Shift Exit Sensor 6138 21 Paper not detected Paper detected Shift Tray Exit Sensor Proof
236. K 1 AGC adjustment failure 003 White Offset Correction E Read Hard Error 4647 Displays the result of the SBU connection check 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OK 1 SBU connection check failure If the SBU connection check fails 5C141 001 002 or 003 occurs 001 Power ON 510 Service Tables 4654 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 Black Level Fine Adj Display 21 Apr 2006 RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value BW Last Correct Value BW Last Correct Value BW Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step
237. LCD It shows which color has an error M Y or C Line position adjustment has not been done Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been successfully done Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for 7 see Note patterns line position adjustment Fewer lines on The patterns which ID sensors has detected the pattern than 7 See Note are not enough for line position adjustment the target More lines on the pattern than the Not used in this machine target Out of the ID sensors has correctly detected the patterns adjustment for line position adjustment but a shift of See Note range patterns is out of adjustable range mm pp For details see the Troubleshooting Guide Line Position Adjustment section 208 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Scanner Test Mode VPU Test Mode Output the VPU test pattern with SP4 907 001 to make sure the scanner VPU control operates correctly The VPU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal and the VPU test pattern is normal The following can be the cause if the copy is normal and the VPU test pattern is abnormal The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the BICU The BICU IPU or SBU board may be defective BICU IPU Test Mode You can check the BICU IPU board with the SP mode menu SP4 904 1 or 2 I
238. Mixed Sizes for copying in the platen mode the Mixed Size count is enabled Inthe SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with SADF the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3 T Scan PGS Org CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs regardless of which application was used C Scan PGS Org These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy 0 to 9999999 0 1 jobs These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs L Scan PGS Org 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the 643 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 24x 1 Text 8 24x 2 Text Photo 8 24x 3 Photo 8 24x 4 GenCopy Pale 8 24x 5 Map 8 24x 6 Normal Detail 8 24x 7 Fine Super Fine 8 24x 8 Binary 8 24x 9 Grayscale 8 24x 10 Color 8 24x 11 Other If the scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode features have been selected at the operation C Scan PGS ImgEdt CTL mE panel for each application Some examples o
239. Motor 5804 116 DFU 220mm s 5804 118 Feed CL 1 Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch 5804 119 Feed CL2 Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch 5804 120 By Pass SOL By pass Tray Solenoid 5804 111 Paper Feed Motor 138 mm s Regist Motor 5804 123 Registration Motor 77 mm s 77mm s Regist Motor 5804 125 Registration Motor 138 mm s 138mm s 5804 135 Junction Gate SOL Junction Gate Solenoid Duplex Motor CW 7 mm s Duplex Motor CW 5804 139 DFU 115mm s 5804 140 Duplex Motor CW Duplex By pass Motor CW 138 mm s 695 5804 138 Duplex By pass Motor CW 77 mm s Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 138mm s Duplex Motor CW 220mm s 9804 142 Duplex Motor 5804 143 Duplex By pass Motor CCW 77 mm s CCW 77mm s Duplex Motor CCW 115mm s 5804 144 Duplex Motor 5804 145 Duplex By pass Motor CCW 138 mm s CCW 138mm s Duplex Motor 5804 149 CCW 220mm s Inverter Motor CW 5804 150 Duplex Inverter Motor CW 77 mm s 77mm s Inverter Motor CW 115mm s 5804 151 Inverter Motor CW 5804 152 Duplex Inverter Motor CW 138 mm s 138mm s Relay Motor 5804 153 Bridge Unit Transport Motor 77 mm s 77mm s Relay Motor 5804 155 Bridge Unit Transport Motor 138 mm s 138mm s Relay Junction 5804 158 Bridge Unit Junction Gate Solenoid gate Solenoid Relay Cooling Fan 5804 159 Not used Strong Relay Cooling Fan 5804 160 Not used weak 5804 162 Shift Tray Motor Shift Tray Moto
240. NG Toner Supply Rate Display 3411 Displays the current toner supply rate 001 Latest Bk ENG 0 to 100 1 step 002 Latest M ENG 478 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 003 Latest C ENG 004 Latest Y ENG Toner Supply Range 001 Upper Limit Bk ENG 002 Upper Limit M ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during printing 0 to 100 100 1 step 003 Upper Limit C ENG 004 Upper Limit Y ENG 005 Minimum Supply Time Bk ENG 006 Minimum Supply Time M ENG Agjusts the minimum toner supply time O to 1000 0 1 msec step 007 Minimum Supply Time C ENG 008 Minimum Supply Time Y ENG Toner Supply Carry Over Display DFU Bk ENG ENG 0 to 10000 0 1 msec step C ENG Y ENG Toner Supply Carry Over Setting DFU 001 Maximum Bk ENG 002 Maximum M ENG 0 to 10000 1000 1 msec step 003 Maximum C ENG 004 Maximum Y ENG 479 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Process Control Target M A Adjusts the target M A 001 Maximum M A Bk ENG 002 Maximum M A M ENG 0 to 1 0 42 0 001 mg cm step 003 Maximum M A C ENG 004 Maximum M A Y ENG 0 to 1 0 43 0 001 mg cm step Image Quality Adj Counter Display Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode 001 Potential Control BW ENG 002 Potential Control FC ENG 003 Power ON BW ENG
241. NG 0 to 400 150 5 step 428 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2822 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page ENG Separation DC Fine 1st ENG Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page ENG Special 2 Switch Timing Lead Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 30 20 2 mm step 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG 429 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Special 2 Trailing Edge Correction Special 2 Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the
242. NG 012 Thick 2 amp FINE Y ENG Charge AC Voltage Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment Paper Type Process Speed Color Paper Type gt Plain Thick 1 Thick 2 Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes Charge bias AC component is adjusted by environment correction 333 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SP2 007 xxx to SP2 011 xxx These SPs are activated only when SP2 012 1 is set to 1 manual control 005 Thick 1 Bk 0 to 3000 2100 10 V step Charge AC Current LL Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for LL Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for LL environment Low temperature and Low humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 002 Environmental Target M ENG 0 to 3000 1060 10 n A step 003 Environmental Target C 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 1100 10 uA step 2008 2008 Charge AC Current ML Charge Roller AC Current Adjustment for MM 334 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Color Displays sets the AC current target of the charge roller for ML environment Meddle temperature and Low humidity DFU 001 Environmental Target Bk ENG 0 to 3000 1040 10 uA step 002 Environmental Target M 0 to 3000 1030 10 uA step 003 Environmental Target C 004 Environmental Target Y ENG 0 to 3000 1070 10 uA step Charge AC Current MM Charge Roller
243. NG 0 to 655 0 0 01 V step 024 Delta Vt Sum C ENG 025 Delta Vt Sum Y ENG 460 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 026 Delta Vt Sum Threshold ENG 0 to 255 10 1 V step Gamma Threshold 027 ENG Not used Coefficient Displays the consumed toner amount calculated with the pixel count for each 028 031 color 028 Pixel Consumption Bk 029 Pixel Consumption M O to 3000 0 0 001 g step 030 Pixel Consumption C 031 Pixel Consumption Y 032 035 Displays the remaining toner amount for each color using pixel count 032 Pixel Remaining Bk 033 Pixel Remaining M 50000 to 600 0 0 001 g step 036 039 Adjusts the threshold of toner end for each color 039 End Threshold Y Not used 040 043 Displays the pixel M A for each color 040 Pixel M A Bk ENG 041 Pixel M A M ENG 0 to 1 0 4 0 001 mg cm step 042 Pixel M A C ENG 043 Pixel M A Y ENG 461 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner end ENG before toner near end is detected 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 V step Delta Vt Threshold Before Near End Adjusts the total delta Vt Vt Vtref of toner ENG end before toner near end is detected 0 to 255 10 1 V step Delta Vt Sum Threshold Before Near End Toner End Recovery Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor continues
244. North Europe A3 11 x 17 to B6 5 5 x 8 5 SEF Staple mode A3 11 x 17 to B5 8 5 x 11 No punch mode 52 to 256 g m 14 to 68 Ib Shift tray 52 to 105 g m 14 to 28 Ib Proof tray Punch mode 52 to 163 g m 14 to 43 Ib Staple mode 64 to 90 g m 17 to 24 Ib Label Thick paper OHP cannot be stapled Proof tray 100 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or less 90 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or more Shift tray 1000 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 LEF or smaller 500 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Single size 90 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 30 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger 3 positions 1 staple 2 positions Top Left Top Right 864 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 2 staples 1 positions Staple replenishment Cartridge 5000 staples Power consumption 60 W Dimensions W x D x H 535 mm x 600 mm x 930 mm 21 1 x 23 6 x 36 6 Without punch unit 48 kg 105 8 Ib Weight With punch unit 50 Kg 110 3 Ib 1000 Sheet Finisher Upper Tray A3 to A6 Paper Size 11 x 17 to 5 5 x 8 5 Paper Weight 60 to 157 g m 16 to 42 Ib 250 sheets A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF or smaller Paper Capacity 50 sheets A4 8 5 x 11 or smaller 30 sheets B4 8 5 x 14 or larger Lower Tray No staple mode A3 to B5 DLT to HLT Staple mode A3 B4 A4 B5 DLT to LT Paper Size No staple mode 60 to 157 g m 16 to 42 Ib Paper Weight Staple mode 64 to 90 g m 17 to 24 Ib 3
245. P switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the new controller board Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field HDD 1 Controller unit W Controller Box 2 HDD unit A x4 E x2 B 3 HDD unit upper cover B and lower cover C x 5 4 HDD D 199 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 5 Turn the main switch on The disk is automatically formatted 6 T Install the stamp data using SP5853 Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use Disposal of HDD Units Never remove an HDD unit from the work site without the consent of the client If the customer has any concerns about the security of any information on the HDD the HDD must remain with the customer for disposal or safe keeping The HDD may contain proprietary or classified Confidential Secret information Specifically the HDD contains document server documents and data stored in temporary files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with ilegal methods Reinstallation Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is replaced Document server documents Custom made stamps Document server address book he address book and document s
246. P5816 152 If the execution succeeded SP5816 153 will display the result for confirmation and SP5816 154 will display the telephone number for the connection to the outside line Line Type Judgment Result Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151 Here is a list of what the numbers mean 0 Success In progress no result yet Please wait Line abnormal Cannot detect dial tone automatically Line is disconnected Insufficient electrical power supply Line classification not supported Error because fax transmission in progress ioctl occurred Other error occurred O GON Oo 7 Aa C N gt Line classification still in progress Please wait Selection Dial Push This SP displays the classification tone or pulse of the telephone line to the access point for Cumin M The numbered displayed 0 or 1 is the result of the execution of SP5816 151 However this setting can also be changed manually 0 to 1 0 1 step 954 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 0 Tone Dialing Phone 1 Pulse Dialing Phone Inside Japan 2 may also be displayed 0 Tone Dialing Phone 1 Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS 2 Pulse Dialing Phone 20PPS Outside Line Outgoing Number The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for Cumin M in a system that employs a PBX internal line If the execution of SP5816 151 has succeeded and Cumin M has connected to
247. PGS Rez 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings S Scan PGS Rez 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings Note At the present time SP8 311 and SP8 315 perform identical counts me menn omme me coe Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted The Fax application does not allow finely adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for the Fax application 647 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 T Total PrtPGS These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer The counter for the C Total PrtPGS CTL application used for storing the pages F Total PrtPGS increments 0 to 9999999 0 1 P Total PrtPGS CTL ota ono The L counter counts the number of pages S Total PrtPGS stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Pages stored L Total PrtPGS with the Store File button from within the Copy O Total PrtPGS mode screen go to the C counter When the A3 DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104 1 A3 DLT page is counted as 2 When several documents are merged for a print job the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them These counters are used p
248. PS3 SD card Option PS3 language PostScript3 Printer Scanner l Security control Security Module SD card ARDF control ARDF Finisher B793 Finisher B793 Finisher control Finisher only only Before You Begin An SD card is a precision device Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card Never insert the SD card into the slot with the power on Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature high humidity or exposure to direct sunlight Always handle SD cards with care Do not bend or scratch them Do not let the SD card get exposed to shock or vibration Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an application to it If not downloading fails and a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software Upload means to send data from the machine to the SD card Download means to send data from the SD card to the machine To select an item on the LCD touch the appropriate button on the soft touch screen of the LCD or press the appropriate number key on the 10 key pad of the operation panel For example
249. R 081 Format for Copy Color This SP is not used in this model 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 082 Format for Copy B amp W Text 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 083 Format Copy B amp W Other 084 Format for Printer Color This SP is not used in this model 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR 085 Format for Printer B amp W 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF MR Default for JPEG 5 to 95 50 1 step 091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document 086 Format for Printer B amp W HQ management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed Carin e LE 007 Cycle Master Turns the cycle master function on off 564 Service Tables BCR mode IRM 1394a Check Unique ID Login MAX 21 Apr 2006 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Selects either Standard IRM Color Copy or Always Effective Turns the IRM 1394a check on off 00r 1 0 0 OFF 1 ON If the IRM is not defined as 1394a standard its node is used as IRM Dor 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Prevents initiators from logging on or makes initiators log off Dor 1 1 0 OFF Prevents the initiators having already logged on to log on if they try to log on 1 ON Makes initiators ha
250. S31 S32 Sensor Name Active CN Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name tray is not detected when paper is set Detection Sensor Paper on the by pass Shorted tray is detected when paper is not set pen SC372 Shorted pen SC374 Shorted pen SC375 Shorted Open CN21 7 31 SC373 Shorted Open Jam C Jam 19 Shorted Jam C Jam 1 Fusing Entrance CN283 B6 Sensor Duplex Entrance CN283 B9 Sensor Duplex Exit Sensor CN283 B12 CN217 7 CN217 15 CN217 23 Fusing Exit Sensor CN253 2 Waste toner near full Open indicated when it is not CN251 A2 Waste Toner Sensor near full Shorted Waste toner near full 307 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No SWO3 533 534 935 TH1 TH2 536 537 Sensor Name Sensor Board Name Waste Toner Bottle Set Switch Tray 2 Paper Size Switch Temperature Humidity Sensor Thermopile Thermistor Heating Roller Thermistor Pressure Roller Paper Exit Sensor Paper Overflow Sensor 21 Apr 2006 Active Condition Symptom cannot be detected when the waste toner bottle is nearly full Open L CN251 A4 Shorted CN251 B8 Waste toner bottle is not detected when the waste toner bottle is set Waste toner bottle is detected when the waste toner bottle is set Open Shorted B9 B10 Paper size error B12 Open CN286 1 3 Shorted Open CN286 8 SC5
251. SP values 003 Separation DC 1st Page ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG Thick 2 MH Thick 2 Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 405 2584 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values 002 003 Separation DC 1st Page ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG Thick 2 HH Thick 2 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side 10 to 250 120 5 step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values 003 Separation DC 1st Page ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG OHP Bias 2601 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP 001 Separation DC ENG 0 to 5000 1500 10 V step OHP Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller
252. Scan to PC then it is counted twice once for Scan to Email and once for Scan to PC T Deliv Jobs Svr CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white scanned and sent to a Scan Router server S Deliv Jobs Svr 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of jobs color or black and white scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server 638 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These counters count jobs not pages The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router server cannot be confirmed If even one color image is mixed with black and white images then the job is counted as a Color job fthe job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be delivered the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job T Deliv Jobs PC 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 151 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white scanned and sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC Note At the present time 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts S Deliv Jobs PC 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white
253. Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side EN 007 Separation DC FINE 1st ENG 382 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC FINE 2nd Side ENG Thin Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper Separation DC Plain ENG 0 to 5000 1000 10 V step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain ENG 0 to 5000 1500 10 V step 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC Fine 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Side Thin Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black and white ENG mode Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 130 20 1 uA step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Not used Side Paper Transfer FINE ENG Not used 2nd Side 2457 Thin Bias FC 383 ENG 0 to 130 25 1 uA step Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 130 30 1 uA step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG 0 to 130 30 1 uA step Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Not used Side Paper Transfer FINE ENG Not used 2nd Side Thin Pape
254. Simplex 110 Middle Thick FC Duplex 120 to 180 170 1 C step Middle Thick BW Simplex 120 to 180 170 1 C step 120 to 180 170 1 C step Middle Thick BW 120 to 180 170 1 C step Duplex Fusing Temperature Display Fusing Temperature Display Heating or Pressure Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers 001 Fusing Center n 20 to 250 1 C step The heating roller has two lamps One heats 002 Fusing Ends l the center of the heating roller and the other 003 Pressure heats both ends of the heating roller Fusing Nip Band Check Executes the nip band measurement between fusing belt and pressure roller Execute If the nip band width is not 8 mm and fusing is not good replace the pressure roller or install a new fusing unit Pre ldling Time O to 120 0 1 sec step opecifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1109 001 Stop Time 5 to 30 10 1 sec step opecifies the time for measuring the nip 324 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 003 004 002 Environmental Correction Fusing Temp Threshold Low 10 to 23 17 1 C step opecifies the threshold temperature for low temperature condition Temp Threshold High 24 to 40 30 1 C step opecifies the threshold temperature for high temperature condition Low Temp Correction 0 to 15 5 1 C step opecifies the temperature correction for the heati
255. TION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure Before you install the 500 sheet finisher the optional bridge unit B227 must be installed Beforehand Installing on a machine with the optional paper feed unit or LCT When you install this unit on a machine with the optional paper feed unit or LCT you must install support brackets on the optional paper feed unit or LCT These support brackets can prevent the machine from falling to the left side You do not need to install support brackets on machines without the optional paper feed unit or LCT kae MP a ht AG NT c GP B 1 Install the two support brackets A on the left side of the machine x1 each 2 Install the two support bracket covers B on the support brackets P X 1 each Installation of the 500 Sheet Finisher 39 Installation 21 Apr 2006 1 Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and retainers 2 Attach the paper guide A 3 Attach the unit holder B and the holder bracket C knob screw x 4 The holder bracket C must be placed outside the unit holder B The holder bracket is provided with the bridge unit B227 4 Install the 500 sheet finisher D on the machine E x 1 40 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Dl Attach the bracket cover E Install the output tray F on the 500 sheet finisher 2 sn
256. The application Copy Fax Scan Print peony used to store the job on the document server for example s FIN Post print processing i e finishing punching stapling etc Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does BC not count up For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 71 627 Service Tables Abbreviation IFax ImgEdt LS LSize MC NRS Org OrgJam Palm 2 PC PGS PJob Por PrtJam PrtPGS 21 Apr 2006 Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI e g Internet Fax border removal adding stamps page numbers etc Black YMCk Local Storage Refers to the document server Large paper Size Magnification One color monochrome New Remote Service which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely NRS is used overseas CSS is used in Japan Original for scanning Original Jam Print Job Manager Desk Top Editor A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network and allows files to moved around combined and converted to different formats Personal Computer Pages A page is the total scanned surface of the original Duplex pages count as two pages and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3 DLT counter SP is switched ON Print Job
257. These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application F FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only The finishing method is 633 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 specified by the application Note Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time P FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only The finishing method 8 064 is specified by the application S FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application Note Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time L FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode O FIN Jobs CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application over the network The finishing method is specified by the application Number of jobs started in Sort mode When a stored copy job is 8 06x 1 Sort set for Sort and then stored on the document server the L counter increments See SP8 066 1 8 06x 2 Number of jobs started out of Sort mode 8 06x 3
258. Threshold SP3 531 003 50 RH 746 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 c AAH is greater than or equal to Absolute Humidity Threshold SP3 531 004 6 g m3 d Non use Time is greater than or equal to SP3 531 001 default 6 hours It is not done if the machine is in energy saver mode The default non use time is 6 hours see condition 4 below so normally it will only be done if the user disables energy saver mode 6 After Toner End Recovery This starts after recovery from a toner end condition 7 After Developer Initialization Developer initialization occurs automatically in the following conditions After a new development unit has been installed After new developer is installed and 3902 005 to 008 is done depending on the color see Maintenance for details Process Control Self Check Procedure Start VsG adjustment Step 1 ID sensor solid pattern generation Step 2 sensor pattern density detection Step 3 Toner amount calculation lt Step 4 VD V B VL selection and V REF adjustment Step 5 End Step 1 VSG Adjustment This machine uses four ID sensors direct reflection type for the process control Each sensor detects a pattern for each color see the Printing Process section The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt s reflectivity Then the machine calibrates the ID sensor until its output when reading the bare transfer belt known as VSG
259. Troubleshooting Procedures Self diagnostic error HDD Hard Disk Drive XXXX Detailed error code Timeout error Command error When the main switch is turned on or starting the self diagnostic the 3003 3004 HDD stays busy for the specified time or more CTL B Loose connection Defective HDD Defective controller 1 3 Check that the HDD is correctly connected to the controller Replace the HDD Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CTL Self diagnostic error NIB B XXXX Detailed error code MAC address check sum error 6101 The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM PHY IC error 6104 The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized PHY IC loop back error 6105 An error occurred during the loop back test for the PHY IC on the controller 268 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures m 1 Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1401 Self diagnosis error Standard NVRAM The controller cannot recognize the standard NVRAM installed or detects that the NVRAM is defective Loose connection Defective standard NVRAM Defective controller Check the standard NVRAM is firmly inserted into the socket Replace the NVRAM Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Tro
260. U can be damaged Power Sockets for Peripherals A CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max DC24V Rating voltage output connector for accessory Max DC24V Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Flow Chart This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation Unpack the copier Does the user require the Paper Tray Unit LCT or Finisher Yes Place the copier on the Paper Tray Unit or LCT Install the Paper Tray Unit or LCT Install the copier Does the user require any controller options Yes Install the required controller options Does the user require the 1 Bin Tray Yes Install the 1 Bin Tray Does the user require the Shift Tray Yes No Install the Shift Tray Does the user require the Finisher Yes No Install the Bridge Unit Install the Finisher Install the ARDF or Platen Cover if required You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher B408 or B793 The punch unit is for 1000 sheet booklet finisher B793 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of these accessories eem rp semen if frem 57 67 29 28 21 19 16 Cloth Holder 1 58 26 57 67 29 28 21 19 17 Exposure Glass Cleaning Cloth 1 58 26 57 67 29
261. Y See SC 230 for troubleshooting details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures EN FGATE OFF error Y 222 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position Y The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts See SC 230 for troubleshooting details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error M The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position M See SC 230 for troubleshooting details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE OFF error M The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position M The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts See SC 230 for troubleshooting details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error C The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position C See SC 230 for troubleshooting details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures EN FGATE OFF error C 223 Troubleshooting 4 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible C
262. Y 7938 2 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for Y 7938 5 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for Y 7938 8 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter ENG 619 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for Y 7938 11 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7938 12 Counter Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for Y 7938 14 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7938 15 Counter ENG Displays the replacement date of each PM unit Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit 7951 1 ENG 0 to 255 255 1 day step Page Development Unit Bk 620 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Page Development 7951 6 Unit M Page Development 7951 7 Unit C Page Development 7951 8 Unit Y 7951 9 Page Developer Bk 7951 10 Page Developer M 7951 11 Page Developer C 7951 12 Page Developer Y Page Image Transfer 7951 13 Belt 7951 14 Page Cleaning Unit 7951 15 Page Fusing Unit Page Paper Transfer 7951 16 Unit 7951 31 ENG 0 to 255 255 1 day step Rotation Development Unit Bk 7951 35 Rotation Development Unit M 7951 36 Rotation Development Unit C 7951 37 621 Service Tables 21 Service Tables
263. a An error is detected while all of the HDD or NVRAM are formatted logically by the Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 The agree format for the HDD fails Turn the main switch off on and Ht Tum the main switch offfon and try the operation again the operation again Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Log Data Error An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 O is off 1 Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 Disable the log encryption setting with SP9730 004 O is off Log Data Error 4 Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data 217 T hal Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 1 Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD Initialize the HDD with SP5832 004 Log Data Error 99 Other than the above causes 1 Ask your supervisor Details 07 Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Data Overwrite HDD Data Overwrite Security SDcarderor 0 SD card error The all delete function cannot be executed but the Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 is installed and activated Defective SD card B735 SD card B735 not installed 1 Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card B735 2 Check and reinstall the SD card B735 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubl
264. ables 21 Apr 2006 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them For example if a 3 page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4 the count for ISDN G3 G4 is 12 Soa 0 to 9999999 0 1 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 715 1 JPEG JPEG2000 8 7153 PDF RX PGS Port 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive them ses 666 Service Tables 8 771 8 781 21 Apr 2006 These SPs count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners 87711 Total 8 7712 K 8 7713 Y 87714 M 87 15 C Toner Bottle Info 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles NOTE Currently the data in SP7 833 011 through 014 and the data in SP8 781 001 through 004 are the same This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for LS Memory Remain storing documents 0 to 100 0 1 These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color This SP allows the user to check the toner supply at any time 667 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Note This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply 1 steps is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in increments of 10 10 steps Coverage Count 0 to 9999999 0 1 0 10 These SPs disp
265. ach operation mode These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards Engine operation time Does not include time while Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD while engine is not operating Engine not operating Includes time while controller Standby Time saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes Includes time while the machine is performing Energy Save Time o background printing Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background printing Includes time while machine is performing Off Mode Time background printing Does not include time machine remains powered off with the power switches 671 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Total time when SC errors have been staying Total time when paper jams have been staying 8 941 7 PrtJam during printing Total time when original jams have been staying 8 941 8 OrgJam during scanning 8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration 8 951 1 User code registrations 8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations 8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations 0 to 9999999 0 8 9514 Group destination registrations 1 Transfer Fax relay
266. achine by turning the Turn the operation switch or main operation switch or main switch power switch off and on off and on If the error occurs again the same SC code is displayed After you turn the main power switch off wait for one second or more before you turn the main power switch on W SC 672 All SCs are logged The print log data SP5 990 004 in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected 211 Troubleshooting eNotes 21 Apr 2006 fthe problem concerns electrical circuit boards first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs fthe problem concerns a motor lock first check the mechanical load before you replace motors or sensors SC Code Classification The table shows the classification of the SC codes Class 1 Scanning Laser exposure Image development 1 Image development 2 SC Code Detailed section 212 220 230 240 260 280 300 330 350 380 400 420 430 440 460 Troubleshooting Class 1 SC Code Detailed section DXX DXX 6XX 1 XX OXX 21 Apr 2006 Paper feed Fusing Paper feed Fusing Communication 640 CSS 670 Internal data processing 680 Unique for a specific model Controller Diagnostics error 860 Hard disk 880 Unique for a specific model NO O I 21 QD Troubleshooting 21
267. ack level adjustment fine adjustment for Factory Setting RE Color the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the Factory Setting RO Color black level adjustment fine adjustment for 519 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting RE BW for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting RO BW mM for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for Factory Setting RE BW the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Factory Setting RO BW Black Level Rough Adj Display GE Green Even signal GO Green Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting GE Color ENG for the even green
268. ack offset value rough adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 517 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal Last Correct Value GE Bw in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value Last Correct Value GO fine adjustment for the odd green signal in BW the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Black Level 2 Rough Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal Last Correct Value mE o Cal ENG in the CCD circuit board color printing olor speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value Last Correct Value co ENG rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in olor the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value Last Correct Value ENG fine adjustment for the even blue signal in Color the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value Last Corr
269. age transfer belt contact motor Paper feed clutch Tray 2 12 Drum drive motor CMY There are some motors and clutches which are not shown in the above drawing ray lift motor 1 and 2 Shutter motor Duplex inverter motor Development clutch Duplex By pass Motor 150 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Drive Unit Fan Rear cover i Rear Cover Right rear cover iMf Right Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Remove the drive unit fan A x 1 9 x 1 hook x 2 E dE a When installing the drive unit fan Make sure that the drive unit fan is installed with its decal facing to the right side Gear Unit Do not remove the drum motor MCY from the gear unit It is not easy in the field to adjust the gear position between the drum motor MCY and the gear unit Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket iMl High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Controller box Controller Box Toner supply tube fan duct W Toner Supply Tube Fan Do sl ox 151 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 16 17 Release the four hooks of the duct from the frame Remove the drive unit fan duct A 7 x 1 EP x 1 x 1 PSU bracket W PSU IOB bracket W IOB Drum development motor K if Drum Development Motor K Image transfer belt contact motor Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor Toner tran
270. ages ENG 0 to 10 0 1 sheet step GainAdjust Gain Adjustment of Image Transfer Belt Motor DFU 001 154 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 0 High speed Low level 115 mm sec ENG 1 Low speed High level 002 138 mm sec ENG 003 004 2909 Motor Start Control 77 mm sec ENG 445 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Not used 0 to 1 0 1 sheet step 001 On ENG 0 normal 1 synchro Motor Stop Control 2910 Not used O to 1 0 1 sheet step 0 normal 1 synchro Drum Stop Timing OPC Drum Motor Stop Timing Adjustment 2911 Not used 0 to 360 30 6 deg step Gear Phase Control Result 2912 DFU Gear Phase Control 2913 Enables or disables the OPC gear phase adjustment after job end 001 On ENG 0 or 1 1 1 step 001 Job End ENG 0 OFF 1 ON 2914 Dust Shield Shutter Motor 001 Stop Delay Open ENG DFU 002 Stop Delay Close ENG 1 to 50 38 1 ms step 446 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Opens the shutter on the laser optics 003 Open Execution housing unit manually for test purposes Closes the shutter on the laser optics 004 Close Execution housing unit manually for test purposes GainAdjust Gain Adjustment of OPC Bk Drum Motor 154 mm sec ENG 002 138 mm sec ENG 0 or 1 07 1 step 0 TGAIN High 1 GAIN Low 003 115 mm sec ENG 004 77 mm sec ENG ilii H C
271. al off hook signal or receives a print job the machine returns to the Off Stand by mode and the system 5V and 24V supplies are activated Returning to stand by mode The machine returns to stand by mode when the operation switch is pressed The return time is less than 45 seconds Operation Energy System Fusing Lamp 24V Switch Saver LED 5V Off Off On when Stand by printing 5VE is supplied New Unit Detection Fusing Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit The fusing unit and image transfer belt unit each have a fuse When the machine detects that 809 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 the fuse is intact the machine determines that a new unit is installed Then a short time later the fuse blows PCU Development Unit The development unit as part of the PCU or as a separate development unit contains an ID chip The ID chip contains information that tells the machine that the unit is new 810 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Paper Exit Overview 1 Junction gate l l 5 Paper exit roller 2 2 Paper exit roller 1 6 To the inverter tray 3 Paper overflow sensor 7 To the standard tray 4 Paper exit sensor After fusing the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or the inverter tray The junction gate solenoid controls the junction gate as follows To the standard paper tray The junction gate solenoid is off default To the inverter tray The junction g
272. al covers When one or more covers are open the messages Cover is open and Close the indicated cover show with a diagram The diagram shows which cover is open 762 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Automatic Line Position Adjustment Overview CC KK YY MM Spaces between two lines of the same color KC KY KM Spaces between a black line and a color line Front Center LZ LL GC VS e GO KC GG KC K eee 4 CD er o tee 4 rw EEAUA gt KK KY KK KY Y u ee e accen CD oto YY KM YY KM M roo eee v gele GEEE Y During automatic line position adjustment the line patterns above are created eight times on the transfer belt The spaces between the lines CC KK YY MM KC KY KM are measured by the front center and rear ID sensors The controller takes the average of the spaces Then it adjusts the following positions and magnification Sub scan line position for CMY Main scan line position for CMY Magnification ratio for CKMY Skew for CMY The transfer belt cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns are measured SC285 shows if an error is detected four times consecutively Summary of Each Adjustment Sub scan line position for YCM The adjustment of the sub scan line position for YCM is based on the line position for K color registration The machine measures the gaps between the lines of each colo
273. alled For non standard paper sizes if they are not visible on the user tool screen for selecting paper sizes then set SP 5112 to 1 If the user selects one of these sizes auto paper size selection is disabled Paper Height Detection Trays 1 amp 2 Two paper height sensors A B and actuator C are built into the paper tray lift motor The paper height sensors detect the amount of paper in the tray The actuator C has two semicircles and it is engaged with the lift arm shaft via gears The paper height sensors detect the paper size depending on the position of the two semicircles The list shown below shows the detection combination of the two sensors The paper remaining status bar is displayed in the tray selection icon on the LCD 795 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 A Paper height sensor 2 B 100 Status bar x 4 30 Status bar x 2 10 7 Status bar x 1 OFF No actuator 70 an Status bar x 3 FF Paper End Detection Trays 1 amp 2 The paper stack raises the paper end feeler A and the paper end sensor B deactivates if there is some paper in the paper tray When the paper tray runs out of paper the paper end feeler A drops into the cutout in the tray bottom plate At this time the paper end sensor B activates 796 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Registration The registration motor A drives the regi
274. alue of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue Last Correct Value BE Color Last Correct Value BO Color O to 255 0 1 digit step Last Correct Value BE BW Last Correct Value BO BW Black Level 2 Rough Adj Display RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal Last Correct Value RE Color Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even red 515 Service Tables 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value Color Last Correct Value BW Last Correct Value BW Last Correct Value BW Last Correct Value BW ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG 21 Apr 2006 signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255
275. and an external device IP Address Secondary Range 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 opecifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting Delivery Server Model 0 to 4 0 1 step Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I O device 0 Unknown 1 SG1 Provided 2 SG1 Package 3 SC2 Provided 4 SG2 Package Delivery Svr Capability 0 to 255 0 1 step Bit7 1 Comment information exits Changes the H capability of Bit6 1 Direct specification of mail address possible l the registered Bit5 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible that the I O 568 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Bit4 1 Address book automatic update function exists device registered Bit3 1 Fax RX delivery function exists Bit2 1 Sender password function exists Bit1 1 Function to link MK 1 user and Sender exists BitO 1 Sender specification required if set to 1 Bit6 is set to 0 Delivery Svr Capability Ext 0 to 255 0 1 step Changes the capability of the registered that the I O device registered 011 Bit7 1 Address book usage limitation Limitation for each authorized user Bit6 1 RDH authorization link Bit5 to 0 Not used Server Scheme Primary 013 NIA Server Port Number Primary 014 NIA Serve
276. ansfer Plain ENG 386 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Thin Trailing Edge Correction Thin Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Ke The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2474 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used 004 Paper Transfer FINE ENG 387 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thin Switch Timing Trail Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Thin LL
277. ap rings Pull out the tray extension G of the bridge unit Turn on the main power switch and then check the finisher operation 41 Installation 21 Apr 2006 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty B230 B237 1 Front Joint Bracket 2 Rear Joint Bracket 3 Rear Joint Bracket 4 Grounding Plate Copy Tray Staple Position Decal T Screw M4 x 14 Knob Screw M4 x 10 9 Screw M3 x 8 10 Knob Screw M3 x 8 O Necessary Not necessary O OT NO I CO Co 6 42 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure If this finisher will be installed on the B230 or B237 copier the following options must be installed before installing this finisher Bridge Unit B227 Paper Feed Unit B800 or LCT B801 1 Unpack the finisher and then remove the stopper A and tapes P x 1 2 Install the front joint bracket B holder bracket C P x 2 M4 x 14 and rear joint bracket D x 2 M4 x 14 The holder bracket C must be placed outside the front joint bracket B The holder bracket is provided with the bridge unit B227 43 Installation 21 Apr 2006 3 Install the grounding plate E on the finisher P x 2 M3 x 8 Use
278. aration Overview 1 Paper transfer roller 4 Image transfer roller 2 Discharge plate 5 Image transfer belt 3 ITB drive roller 6 OPC drum The paper transfer unit consists of the paper transfer roller and discharge plate This unit completes the toner transfer to the paper 788 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 PTR Paper Transfer Roller Drive C PP PPL Oye EN B D P P Power Pack The toner is moved from the OPC A onto the surface of the image transfer belt B by a positive charge from the image transfer roller immediately above the drum not shown here The ITB drive roller C which is given a negative charge pushes the toner to the paper D The paper transfer roller E presses the paper against the image transfer belt B with a spring that is under tension from the paper transfer roller contact motor and grounds the charge from the ITB drive roller C The paper transfer roller does not have a drive mechanism This roller is driven by the image transfer belt Finally the discharge plate E which is given an AC charge discharges the paper The discharge plate receives its charge from a different high voltage power supply board than the ITB drive roller 789 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 PTR Paper Transfer Roller Contact and Separation C The paper transfer contact motor A keeps the paper transfer roller B in contact with the image transf
279. aration DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page ENG Separation DC Fine 1st ENG Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page ENG Plain Switch Timing Lead Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 30 20 2 mm step 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG 3 7 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Page 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Plain Trailing Edge Correction Plain Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side
280. are 3 possible applications PostScript 3 DOS unit PictBridge You cannot run application programs from Slot 3 However you can move application programs from Slot 3 to either Slot 1 or Slot 2 with the following procedure Slot 1 has the priority in this procedure if both Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used Make sure that the target SD card has enough space 1 Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move 2 Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 3 to the card in slot 1 Ere Do steps 1 2 again if you want to move another application program 3 Exitthe SP mode Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to another SD card Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you copy the application program from one card to another card Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used 62 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Remove the cover A P x 2 and then keep the SD card in the place B after you copy the application program from one card to another card This is done for the following reasons 1 The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application program 2 You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future You cannot copy PostScript application to another
281. as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode This section explains the functions of the Printer Copy Scanner SP modes Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes 311 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 System Status SP Mode Button Summary Here is a short summary of the touch panel buttons SP Mode Service Open ALL Close Att COPY Window Sg X XOO XXKX Exit Exi RSS COPY SP 1 001 001 Leading Edge Registration Tray Plain Drum Process Scanner ia m Per iphs Initial 0 0 Data Log APR 2006 1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels e Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display Opens the copy window copy mode so you can make test copies Press SP Mode highlighted in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number Then press 9 The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing O If not just press the required SP Mode number 312 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal operation 3 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display page Press to scroll the show the previous or next line line
282. at has been input with the printer driver Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel The partition can hold up to 100 files including files stored using sample print The partition can hold a log containing up to 30 errors excluding logs stored using locked print The maximum number of pages is 2 000 including jobs using sample print and collation Locked print uses the same hard disk partition 16 8 GB as sample print and collation Hold Print Using this feature the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until the user inputs an ID at the machine s operation panel This ID must match the ID that has been input with the printer driver Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed Stored Print Store and Print Using this feature the same stored files can be printed repeatedly without PC operation or stored files can be printed during receiving files even the file data has not been received completely Job Spooling Print data can be spooled stored in the machine s HDD and the machine starts to print when data transfer is complete Since the machine stores all data first before printing the host computer is freed up more quickly he supported print protocols are IPP and LPR The default setting for this feature is off The user must switch it on using UP mode to enable this feature T
283. at were later C TX Jobs LS CTL accessed for transmission over the telephone F TX Jobs LS line or over a network attached to an e mail or as a fax image by I Fax P TX Jobs LS CTL ono 0 to 9999999 0 1 S TX Jobs LS Note Jobs merged for sending are counted 632 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 8 046 L TX Jobs LS separately 8 047 The L counter counts the number of jobs O TX Jobs LS CTL scanned from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a stored copy job is sent from the document server the C counter increments When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e mail the O counter increments T TX Jobs DesApl mE These SPs count the applications used to send C TX Jobs DesApl files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network attached to F TX Jobs DesApl CTL an e mail or as a fax image by I Fax Jobs P TX Jobs DesApl merged for sending are counted separately 0 to 9999999 0 1 I The L counter counts the number of jobs sent L TX Jobs DesApl from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel O TX Jobs DesApl fthe send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor for example then the O counter increments T FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total the finishing methods The finishing method is specified by the application C FIN Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1
284. ate solenoid is on The fusing paper exit motor drives the paper exit rollers 811 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Junction Gate Mechanism To the Standard Tray The paper exit rollers A feed paper to the standard tray These rollers are driven by the fusing paper exit motor B When a sheet of paper stays in the paper exit unit the paper exit sensor C detects the paper jam and xxxxx is displayed When outputs push up the tray full actuator D the paper overflow sensor E detects that standard trays is full of outputs and xxxx is displayed after a job end To the Inverter Tray When paper is fed to the inverter tray the junction gate A closes the paper path to the standard tray And then the inverter roller B feeds paper to the inverter tray This roller is driven by the duplex inverter motor C 812 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Duplex Unit Overview Duplex inverter roller 6 Duplex exit sensor Junction gate 7 Duplex transport roller 3 Duplex entrance sensor 8 Standard tray 9 Inverter tray Duplex transport roller 1 Duplex transport roller 2 To print on the second side the duplex inverter roller inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the dupl
285. ation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Plain MH Plain Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment ENG 10 to 250 140 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 110 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is 381 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 detected as MH SP2401 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 150 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Plain HH Plain Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2401 is multiplied by these SP values
286. ause Troubleshooting Procedures The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position C The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts See SC 230 for troubleshooting details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures LD error Bk LD error Y The BICU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit turns on after LDB initialization E Worn out LD Disconnected or broken harness of the LD Replace the harness of the LD Replace the laser optics housing unit Replace the BICU Pattern sampling error insufficient image density Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment Defective image transfer belt unit Defective PCU s Defective laser optics housing unit No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 285 Line position adjustment MUSIC error Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times 224 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures No Details poc D Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 291 Do the recovery procedure for SC285 see Laser Optics Housing Unit in Replacement amp Adjustment Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCUs Check if each toner bottle has enough toner Replace the ID sensor Replace the image transfer belt unit Rep
287. can print in black and white only if cyan magenta or yellow are in a toner end condition during standby mode At this time the machine cannot do color print jobs m If the yellow cyan or magenta toner ends during a color printing job the job is suspended until toner is supplied If new color toner is not installed the user can print black and white jobs only 751 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Toner End Recovery The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of the following occurs when the near end or end status exists The front door is opened and closed he main switch is turned off and on Then the machine starts to supply toner to the development unit After supplying toner the machine clears the toner near end or end status if the following condition is detected Toner end sensor detects that toner is supplied The machine tries to supply toner for a maximum of 5 times SP 3 102 Developer Initialization When is it done When you install new developer you must set the following SPs to 1 before you turn the power off Then the machine will reset the PM counters automatically Developer initialization will also be done automatically Black SP3902 005 Yellow SP3902 006 Cyan SP3902 007 Magenta SP3902 008 When a new development unit or PCU is installed the machine detects the new unit automatically and initializes the developer How is it done
288. card label faces to the front of the machine Attach the cover D to the wireless LAN card Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear 1 Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that generates strong magnetic fields 2 Putthe machine as close as possible to the access point UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN Enter the UP mode Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 802 11b These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on Me You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet 70 Installation 21 Apr 2006 1 Press the User Tools Counter key 2 On the touch panel press System Settings The Network I F default Ethernet must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN 3 Select Interface Settings Network tab Network I F Setting Press IEEE 802 11b Only the wireless LAN options show Communication Mode Select either 802 11 Ad hoc Ad hoc or Infrastructure SSID Setting Enter the SSID setting The setting is case sensitive Channel You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected Range 1 to 14 default 11 The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries 8 WEP Encryption Setting The WEP Wired Equivalent Priva
289. ce the paper exit unit contact motor 3 Replace the paper exit unit HP sensor No Details re n Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 796 Transport belt solenoid eror 00 belt solenoid error Disconnected harness Defective transport motor Transport belt HP sensor 263 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Check the harness connection 2 Replace the transport motor 3 Replace the transport belt HP sensor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures EEPROM data error Defective EEPROM on the main board 1 Check the harness connection 2 Replace the main board Watch dog error While the system program is running other processes do not operate at all Defective controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CTL B A Software error See Note 1 at the end of the SC table 1 Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CTL Fatal error D System completely down Defective RAM DIMM 264 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 766D 4361 Defective ROM DIMM Defective controller Software error Check and or replace the RAM DIMM Check and or replace the ROM DIMM Replace the controller See Note 1 at the end of the SC table Memory error Unexpect
290. ck Bk 123 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 1 Input the standard value A provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main scan magnification adjustment with SP2 185 001 The value A is different for each laser optics housing unit Print the test pattern 14 1 dot trimming pattern in the SP2 109 003 Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 x 1 mm If not change the standard value for the main scan magnification adjustment 3 Adjust the main scan registration only for the black Bk q Input the registration value B provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main scan registration adjustment with SP2101 001 The value B is different for each laser optics housing unit Print the test pattern 14 1 dot trimming pattern in the SP2 109 003 Check that the left trim margin is within 2 1 mm If not change the registration value for the main scan registration adjustment Select 0 with SP2 109 003 after printing the 1 dot trimming pattern Do the line position adjustment 1 2 First do SP2 111 3 Then do SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 6 Exit the SP mode m 124 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Polygon Mirror Motor 1 Laser optics housing unit W Laser Optics Housing Unit 2 Shutter A of t
291. color or black and white sent by counted fax either directly or using a file stored on the document server on a telephone line Note Color fax sending is not available at this time F FAX TX Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent by fax directly on a telephone line Note Color fax sending is not available at this time 636 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These counters count jobs not pages This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application including documents stored on the document server fthe mode is changed during the job the job will count with the mode set when the job started If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I Fax at a destination where both are available then this counter increments and the I Fax counter 8 12x also increments he fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending not when the job is sent T IFAX TX Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white sent 8 121 either directly or using a file stored on the document server as fax images using I Fax Note Color fax sending is not available at this time F IFAX TX Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 123 These SPs count the number of jobs color or black and white sent not stored on the document server as fax images using I Fax Note Color
292. ctive BICU Defective LD controller board 1 Turn the main switch off and on 255 Troubleshooting 2f1 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 2 Checkthe cable connection 3 Replace the laser optics housing unit 4 Replace the BICU board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Finisher exit guide plate motor error After moving away from the guide plate position sensor the exit guide is not detected at the home position within the prescribed time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Guide plate motor disconnected defective Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction Guide plate position sensor disconnected defective Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above Check for blockages in the guide plate motor mechanism 3 Replace the guide plate position sensor and or guide plate motor Replace the finisher main board Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the prescribed time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from the home position The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd
293. cy setting is designed to protect wireless data transmission The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys WEP Selects Active or Inactive Inactive is default Range of Allowed Settings 64 bit 10 characters 128 bit26 characters 9 Transmission Speed Press the Next button to show more settings Then select the transmission speed for the mode Auto 11 Mbps 5 5 Mbps 2 Mbps 1 Mbps default Auto This setting should match the distance between the closest machine or access point This depends on which mode is selected For the Ad Hoc Mode this is the distance between the machine and the closest PC in the network For the Infrastructure Mode this is the distance between the machine and the closest access point 11 Mbps 140 m 153 yd 5 5 Mbps 200 m 219 yd 2 Mbps 270 m 295 yd 1 Mbps 400 m 437 yd 10 Press Return to Default to initialize the wireless LAN settings 71 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Press Yes to initialize the following settings Transmission mode Channel Transmission Speed WEP SSID WEP Key SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802 11b Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the 5840 006 Channel MAX country Sets the minimum range of the channels settings 5840 007 Channel MIN allowed for your country 5840
294. d and press the Execute key Ere The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the n Dx machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully The download fails if the serial numbers do not match This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM Total Count C O P O Count 718 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Address Book Upload Download Information List The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded Information Registration No Select Title User Code Folder E mail Local Authentication Protection Code Folder Authentication Fax Destination Account ACL Fax Option New Document Initial Group Name ACL Key Display LDAP Authentication Download 1 Prepare a formatted SD card 2 Make sure that the write protection on the SD card is off 3 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine 4 Remove the slot cover 3 at the left rear side of the machine P x 1 5 Install the SD card into the SD card slot 3 for service use 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Enter the SP mode 8 Do SP5 846 051 Backup All Addr Book 9 Exit the SP mode and then turn off the main power switch 10 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 3 11 Install the slot cover 3 fthe capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information an error message is displayed Carefully handle the SD card which contains user information
295. d Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Pressure Roller Thermistor and Thermostat 1 Fusing upper cover Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Front and rear side stay Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Pressure roller fusing lamp rear stay A Yr pM M 4 Pressure roller fusing lamp front stay B P X 1 and screw C for the pressure roller lamp terminal 5 Pressure roller Mf Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps 173 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 6 Pressure roller thermostat D FP x 2 T Pressure roller thermistor E P x 1 Thermopile Open the right door 1 2 Front right cover W Operation Panel 3 Fusing unit Mf Fusing Unit 4 Remove the inverter tray A 5 Release the hook D of the inner cover at the inside frame and then remove the inner cover B 6 Disconnect the connector C 174 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 8 Thermopile F x 2 x 1 175 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Fusing Gear and One way Clutch T D E o740 O ir Fusing unit Fusing Unit Fusing upper cover Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Release the pressure roller lamp cord A P x 1 Rear side stay B x 2 a mm Release the idle gear C Release the One way clutch gear D C ring x 1 176 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Heating Roller Bearing and Insulating Bus
296. d is not printed in the SMC report Proxy Port Number This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between Cumin N and the gateway This setting is necessary to set up 064 Cumin N This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report Proxy User Name This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name The length of the name is limited to 31 characters Any character 065 beyond the 31st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report Proxy Password 066 This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password 4 The length of the password is limited to 31 characters Any character 950 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 beyond the 31st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report 067 CERT Up State Displays the status of the certification update The certification used by Cumin is set correctly The certification request setAuthKey for update has been received from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the successful update The certification update failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failed update The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL EJ A resc
297. d on the printer drivers CD ROM The PS drivers are provided on the Scanner PostScript Drivers and Utilities CD ROM The printer drivers for Windows NT 4 0 are only for the Intel x86 platform There is no Windows NT 4 0 printer driver for the PowerPC Alpha or MIPS platforms The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers except for Windows 2000 XP 2003 Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS A PPD file for each operating system is provided with the driver The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10 1 or later versions Scanner and LAN FAX drivers Printer Windows Windows Windows Language 95 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP 2003 Network TWAIN Yes Yes The Network TWAIN and LAN FAX drivers are provided on the scanner drivers 856 Specifications CD ROM 21 Apr 2006 This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well These require the optional fax unit Utility Software Software Font Manager 2000 Win9x ME 2000 XP 2003 NT4 SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Win9x ME 2000 XP 2003 NT4 Desk TopBinder SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Win9x ME 2000 XP 2003 NT4 IEEE1394 Utility Win2000 XP Printer Utility for Mac Mac Desk TopBinder Lite Win9x ME 2000 XP 2003 NT4 A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer This is provided on the printer drivers CD ROM A printer management util
298. d you want to install the PictBridge unit You must install the USB Host Interface when using the PictBridge unit Remove the slot cover A from SD card slot 2 F x 1 2 Turn the SD card B label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 3 Attach the slot cover A x 1 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 80 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Browser Unit Type B A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure SD card slot 3 is basically used only for service maintenance Do not leave an SD card in slot 3 after installing an application 13 14 15 16 17 18 N DB SI oo Lo mma Remove the slot cover A from SD card slot 3 F x 1 Turn the SD card B label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 3 until you hear a click Plug in and turn on the main power switch Push the User Tools key Push the Login Logout key Login with the administrator user name and password Touch Extended Feature Settings on the LCD Touch Install on the LCD Touch SD Card Touch the Browser line Under Install to touch Machine HDD and touch Next When you see Ready to Install check the information on the screen to confirm your previous selecti
299. ded to a PC or e Cabinet from the document server Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can be selected by the SP modes These are JPEG and TIFF In scanner mode users can select file format from TIFF JPEG or PDF The time to create TIFF and JPEG files is shortened with the File Format Converter especially for high scanning resolution and large image size When the customer selects PDF the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned image first Then it converts it to PDF Therefore the total time to create a PDF is also shortened with the File Format Converter 835 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 Auto Erase Memory A document scanned in the copier or scanner mode or data sent from a printer driver for printing is stored temporarily on the hard disk of the machine The document stays in the hard disk as temporary data even after the copy or print job is completed Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk by writing over it Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by Auto Erase 1 Print jobs Printer 2 Sample Print Locked Print jobs 1 3 Spool Printing jobs Memory 1 Scanned files sent by e mail Data overwritten by 2 Files sent by Scan to Folder Auto Erase Memory scanner 2 3 Documents sent or retrieved by using Web Imag
300. destination registrations Request for relay TX 8 9516 F Code box registrations Copy application registrations with 8 951 7 Copy Program the Program job settings feature Fax application registrations with 8 951 8 Fax Program the Program job settings feature Printer application registrations 0 to 255 0 255 8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program job settings feature Scanner application registrations Scanner 8 951 10 with the Program job settings Program feature 672 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adomin Counter List 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 999 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color Coverage Color Print Page 8 999 16 Coverage BW Print Page 8 999 17 Transmission Total 8 999 101 Color Transmission Total 8 999 102 BW 6 N 3 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Scanner 8 999 104 Transmission Color Scanner 8 999 105 Transmission BW SP9 XXX Others 9 511 1 M Skew Motor These SPs reset the skew correction value iudi baud SP2 119 001 to 003 to 0 9511 3 Y Skew Motor Page Correction Not used in this machine Setting 0 to 9999999 0 1 Memory Clear SP5 801 The following tables list the items that are cleared The serial number information meter charge setting and meter charge counters SP8 581 582 583 584 and 586 are not cleared Memory Clear Resets all correction data
301. detected as LL SP2501 is multiplied by these SP values ENG Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Thick 1 ML Thick 1 Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values ENG Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 ENG 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st TENG Not used Side 398 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2501 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Thick 1 MM Thick 1 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values ENG Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77
302. djusts the current for the image transfer belt in B W mode for thick 1 paper ENG ENG Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG 0 to 80 12 1 uA FINE 369 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B W mode for thick 2 paper or FINE mode Common FC Bias Image Transfer Belt Full Color Bias Adjustment Image Transfer Plain Bk ENG 0 to 80 20 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Plain M ENG 0 to 80 20 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Plain C ENG 0 to 80 22 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Plain Y ENG 0 to 80 30 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for plain paper Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 0 to 80 11 1 uA Bk Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for thick 1 paper Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 0 to 80 11 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for thick 1 paper Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 0 to 80 12 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for t
303. dy temperature while 60 seconds after the heating lamp on 542 A The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 30 seconds after the both edge temperature of the heating roller has reached the ready temperature Dirty or defective thermopile Defective thermistor Defective heating roller lamp Checkifthe heating roller thermistor is firmly connected Replace the thermistor Check or replace the thermopile Replace the heating roller lamp No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 543 pue Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 software error The detected The detected fusing temperature stays at 290 C for 1 second temperature stays at 230 C for 1 second DL PSU 241 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective IOB Defective BICU Related SC code SC 553 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replace the IOB 3 Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Replace the PSU 2 Replace the IOB 3 Replace the BICU Heating roller fusing lamp overheat 1 hardware error During stand by mode or a print job the detected heating roller temperature reaches 250 C Defective PSU Defective IOB 944 A Defective BICU Defective fusing control system Related SC code SC 543 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Proced
304. e Folder plate motor disconnected defective Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction Check the connections and cables for the folder plate motor and HP sensor Check for blockages in the folder plate motor mechanism Replace the folder plate HP sensor and or folder plate motor Replace the finisher main board Punch movement motor error Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Motor harness disconnected loose defective Defective motor Check the connections to the punch movement motor Defective punch movement motor Paper position sensor slide motor error The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Motor harness disconnected loose defective Defective motor 260 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 BH Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Check the connections to the paper position sensor slide motor 2 Defective paper position sensor slide motor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Shift motor error The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1 86 seconds
305. e T VA TA d SOS D C The WTL positioning motors for magenta A cyan B and yellow C adjust the angle of the WTL D respectively based on the WTL position for black This mechanism corrects main scan skew ID Sensors There are seven ID sensors Three of them are for the line position adjustment Four of them are for process control The ID sensor shutter A covers the sensors when the machine is idle When the ID sensor shutter solenoid B is activated ID sensor shutter A slides to the left This mechanism prevents the ID sensors from becoming dirty with toner or dust 766 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Shutter Mechanism The laser optics housing unit has a shutter As a result toner and other dust do not fall on the glass of the laser optics housing The shutter motor A moves the shutter B in the direction of the arrow with the cam C to open black arrow direction to close white arrow direction First the actuator D stays at the shutter closed sensor E The shutter motor opens the shutter and the actuator moves to the shutter open sensor position F after the polygon motor has turned on Finally the shutter motor closes the shutter and the actuator moves back to the shutter closed sensor position E after the polygon motor has turned off One of SC290 to 297 occurs if the output of the shutter open F or closed sensor E does not change after the shutter motor turned
306. e HP sensor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Scanner home position error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the ON condition during operation Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between SBU and HP sensor disconnected Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner motor Check the cable connection between the SBU and HP sensor Replace the scanner motor Replace the HP sensor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Black level detection error 001 After the home position detection 002 After the AGC The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp Defective SBU 1 Replace the SBU 216 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control Dirty exposure glass or optics section SBU board defective 142 Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Clean the exposure glass white plate mirrors and lens Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization Check the harness connection between SBU and BICU Replace the exposure lamp Replace the SBU board SBU connection error The SBU connection cannot be detected a
307. e Information Notice Alarm Notice Non Genuine Toner D or 1 71 Alarm 0 Off 1 On Supply Automatic Ordering Call Supply Management Report Call Jam Door Open Call Individual PM Part Alarm Call Enables or disables the PM part alarm call 001 Disable Enable Setting 0 0r 1 1 0 Not Send 1 Send 042 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Displays the condition of the PM part alarm call 002 Alarm Flag Oor1 1 0 Ready to send 1 Already Send Clears the alarm flag SP5 516 002 003 Alarm Flag Clear Do this SP after servicing for PM parts So SP5 516 002 is set to 0 ACC Factory Setting Recall 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 0 to 128 100 1 step 128 Darkest density 543 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 0 to 128 100 1 step R M ENG 005 128 Darkest density Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 0 to 128 100 1 step R Y ENG 006 128 Darkest density Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two color mode 5618 Color Mode Display Selection Mode Display Selection Dor 1 1 0 ACS Colour Black amp White Two Colour Single colour 1 ACD Full Colour Black amp White Selects the color selection display on the LCD the color selection Selects the color
308. e Monitor Desk Top Binder or Scan Router PC fax print jobs Internet fax transmission jobs Temporary data that still remains in the Document Document Server even after user erases the Server data in the Document Server 1 Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using the Copier Printer or Scanner functions Data not overwritten 2 Information registered in the Address Book 3 by Auto Erase Memory 3 Counters stored under each user code 4 Network setting y LN 1 A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it has been 836 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 executed 2 Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored in HDD You can use TWAIN scanner functions together with the DOS unit 3 Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security Overwrite timing Overwriting starts automatically once a copy print or scanner job is completed Copier printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function If a copier printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is being overwritten the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed 837 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 7 Specifications General Specifications Main Frame Configuration Desktop Laser beam scanning amp Dry electrostatic transfer system Print Process 4 drums tandem method Scan 600 dpi
309. e and side to side registration Adjust the following SP modes if necessary Standard 4 2 2 mm for the leading edge registration 2 1 mm for the side to side registration Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6 006 001 Side to Side Registration 94 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Leading Edge Registration Buckle Duplex Front Rear Edge Erase Trailing Edge ARDF sub scan magnification 1 Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check the magnification ratio Adjust with SP6 017 001 if necessary Standard 1 0 Reduction mode 1 0 Enlargement mode 1 0 Registration Image Area A C 4 2mm 1 6 B 2 0mm Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below 95 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed Side to Side Adjusts the side to side registration for each paper feed station Use SP mode SP1 002 to adjust the side to side registration for the optional paper feed unit LCT and duplex unit Adjustment Standard Leading edge sub scan direction 4 2 2 mm Side to side main scan direction 2 1 mm Paper Registration Standard The registration in both main and sub scan directions can change within the following tolerance
310. e area can be adjusted with SP2522 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2501 is multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2522 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Page ENG O to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Page ENG 395 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Fine 1st Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Thick 1 Switch Timing Lead Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side ENG Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Page ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st ENG Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd ENG Page Thick 1 Trailing Edge Correction Thick 1 Paper Trailing Edge Correction ENG Adjusts the correction coefficient
311. e developer initialization result see Developer Initialization Result in the Troubleshooting chapter 8 Do the ACC procedure Toner Collection Bottle If you will install a new bottle and the old bottle is not in a full or near full condition then set SP 3902 017 to 1 m Note fyoudothis then the machine will reset the PM counter for the bottle automatically after you turn the power on again If the bottle is in a full or near full condition it is not necessary to do this i Jg Qe Turn off the main power switch Open the front door and remove the screw A Close the front door Pull out tray 1 B Open the toner collection bottle door C E eso e Pull out the toner collection bottle D Noite Remove the cap E and then attach the cap on the opening of the toner collection bottle before taking it out 130 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Toner Supply Tube Fan Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Toner supply tube fan duct A 7 x 3 EP x 1 x 1 Split the fan duct 4 hooks Toner supply tube fan B m de 2 qe c When reinstalling the toner supply tube fan Make sure that the toner supply tube fan is installed with its decal facing to the rear of the machine Toner Pump Unit There are four pump units inside the machine This procedure describes the replace
312. e machine no og m 74 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installing Setting 1 2 h Plug in and turn on the main power switch Go into the User Tools mode and select System Settings gt Administrator Tools gt Copy Data Security Option gt On Exit the User Tools Check the operation 4 The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB 2 removed and the Data Security for Copying feature set to ON Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D B735 Before You Begin the Procedure 1 Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure Make sure that Admin Authentication is ON System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication If this setting is OFF tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure Make sure that Administrator Tools is enabled selected System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Available Settings If this setting is disabled not selected
313. e maximum execution time for the Maximum Execution ENG process control at stand by 0 to 99 10 1 time step Number Development Gamma Display Set 001 Bk Current ENG 002 M Current ENG Displays the current development gamma for each color C Current ENG 0 to 5 0 01 mg cm KV step 004 Y Current ENG 005 Bk Target Display ENG Displays the target development gamma for each color M Target Display ENG I 0 to 5 0 85 0 01 mg cm kV step 007 C Target Display ENG Displays the target development gamma for each color Y Target Display ENG 0 to 5 0 8 0 01 mg cm kV step Displays the standard target development 009 Bk Standard Target Set ENG gamma for each color 0 to 5 0 9 0 01 mg cm kV step 487 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 010 M Standard Target Set 011 C Standard Target Set 0 to 5 0 8 0 01 mg cm kV step 012 Y Standard Target Set Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development gamma Dor 1 1 0 Not Correct 1 Correct 013 Environmental Correction Vk Display Displays Vk for each color ENG M ENG 300 to 300 1 V step C ENG Y ENG Development DC Control Display Plain 138 mm sec Thick 2 and Fin 77 mm sec Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color 001 Plain Bk ENG
314. ead Displays the peak level of the black level scanning O to 1024 0 1 digit step O to 1024 0 1 digit step movement with exposure lamp on or off 4802 DF Shading FreeRun 001 Lamp ON Executes the scanner free run of shading 0 02 Lamp OFF 4804 Home Position 001 Lamp ON m Executes the scanner HP detection 4806 Carriage Save Moves the carriage from the scanner home Press OFF to stop this free run Otherwise the free run lasts position 001 Lamp ON Dust may fall through the DF exposure glass Therefore do this SP when you transport the machine a long distance 526 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 ACC Data Display This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data 0 to 255 0 1 step 4904 Scanner IPU Board Test 0000 IPU Board Test Bit0 TAURUS register Bit1 ORION register Bit2 LUPUS register Test Bit3 Not used Bit4 Strix register Bit5 to 15 Not used 0 OK 1 Error Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the BICU board and displays the result BitO Image path from SBU to TAURUS Bit1 Image path from TAURUS to ORION Bit2 Image path from ORION to TAURUS Bit3 Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS Bit4 Image path from LUPUS to Strix Bit5 Image path from Strix to GAVD Bit6 and 15 Not used 0 OK 1 Error 002 Test2 527 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 mE Performs an ima
315. ecorded A new log file does not need to be created To create a new log file do SP5857 011 to delete the debug log data from the HDD Then do SP5857 016 SP5857 017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card However this is not a completely empty file The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key number and other non volatile information Even if this SP is not executed a file is created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card it takes some time to complete this operation This 735 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card With the file already created on the SD card for the log file the data only needs to be recorded a new log file does not require creation To create a new log file do SP5857 012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card Then do SP5857 017 736 Service Tables Dip Switches Controller Board DIP SW No BICU Board DIP SW No 1 and 2 Boot up from Flash Boot up from SD card Memory Factory Use Only Do not change the switch settings Factory Use Only Do not change the switch settings 21 Apr 2006 137 Detailed Secti
316. ect Value ENG fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in olor the CCD circuit board color printing speed BW printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal Last Correct Value mE ENG in the CCD circuit board black and white 0 to 255 112 1 digit step 018 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Displays the previous 2nd black offset value Last Correct Value BO rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in BW the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the previous 2nd black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Last Correct Value BE BW Displays the previous 2nd black offset value Last Correct Value BO fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in BW the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Black Level Rough Adj Display RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment for the even red Factory Setting RE Color signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting RO Color mE for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the bl
317. ectly after installation until this SP is turned on This SP is not displayed until the machine is powered on with the Copy Data Security Setting board installed By pass Size Error Detection 5179 Turns on or off the by pass tray size error message 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Paper size error message is displayed when the paper jam occurs due to the wrong direction of set paper in by pass mode Size Adjust Adjusts the paper size for each tray 0 to 3 0 NA ASIA 1 EU 1 step 001 TRAY 1 ENG 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 2 B5 LEF 3 AB LEF 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU 002 TRAY 2 1 ENG 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU 003 TRAY 2 2 ENG 0 A3 1 LT 004 TRAY 2 3 ENG 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU 935 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU 005 TRAY 2 4 ENG 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 3 1 LCT ENG 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 3 2 LCT ENG 0 A3 1 DLT 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 3 3 LCT ENG 0 B4 1 LG 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 3 4 LCT ENG 0 B5 LEF 1 Exe LEF 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 4 1 ENG 0 A4 LEF 1 LT LEF 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 4 2 ENG 0 A3 1 DLT 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 4 3 ENG 0 B4 1 LG 0 or 1 0 NA ASIA 1 EU TRAY 4 4
318. ed system memory size 3 Defective RAM DIMM Defective ROM DIMM Defective controller Software error Check and or replace the RAM DIMM Check and or replace the ROM DIMM Replace the controller Kernel stop error 1 CPU cache error The cache error trap occurs in the CPU Replace the controller Kernel stop error An error in the operation system An error message is output Defective CPU Defective memory Defective flash memory Incorrect software 265 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Replace the memory 2 Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Self diagnostics error CPU XXXX Detailed error code CPU error During the self diagnostic the controller CPU detects an error There are 47 types of error code 0001 to 4005 depending on the cause of the error The CPU detects an error and displays the specific error code with the program address where the error occurs System firmware problem 0001 to Defective controller O6FF Turn the main switch off and on 0801 to 4005 2 Reinstall the controller system firmware Replace the controller When the problem cannot be fixed with the above procedure the following information displayed on the screen needs to be fed back to a technical support center SC code Detailed error code
319. egral Differential control mode Fixed VrreF This mode is used when the ID sensor becomes faulty Only the TD sensor is used to control toner supply The machine uses the VTREF that is stored in SP3 222 1 to 4 3 PID Proportional Integral Differential control mode This is the default toner supply control mode The TD sensor ID sensor and pixel count are used in this mode Vrr_er is adjusted by process control adii 750 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Toner Near End Toner End Detection A C Toner Near End The controller considers the following information to determine the toner near end status Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump A Pixel counter These values are both stored in the memory chip B on the toner cartridge and copied from the memory chip to the NVRAM on the BICU If either value indicates that the amount of remaining toner is 50g or less the machine enters the near end condition Toner End To determine the toner end status the machine uses the TD sensor C in the development unit The machine must first be in a toner near end condition or toner end cannot be detected Toner end is detected if both the following conditions occurs V Vrner greater than or equal to 0 5 SP3 101 021 SUM V1 Vrner greater than or equal to 10 SP3 101 026 The machine cannot print until the toner cartridge is replaced after it detects toner end for black The machine
320. elected 731 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 COPY SP 5 858 001 Debug Save When Engine SC Error 0 0FF 1 0N Example 2 To Specify an SC Code Touch 3 Any SC Error enter the 3 digit SC code number with the control panel number keys Then press 9 This example shows an entry for SC670 COPY SP 5 959 003 Debug Save When Any Sb Error Initial For details about SC code numbers please refer to the SC tables in Section 4 Troubleshooting 6 Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information Touch 5859 Under 5859 press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record Enter the appropriate 4 digit number Then press Refer to the two tables below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The example below shows Key 1 with 2222 entered COPY SP 5 959 00 Debug Save Key Mo key Initial The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers The initials in parentheses indicate the names of the modules 732 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 4 Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10 2222 SCS 2223 SRM 256 IMH 1000 ECS 1025 MCS 4848 COPY 4400 GPS 5375 Scan 5682 NFA 2224 BICU 4500 PDL 5682 NFA 6600 WebDB 4600 3000 NCS 3300 PTS GPS PM EM 2000 NCS 2000 NCS 6666 WebSys e The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero 0 Key to Acronyms Engine Control Service Net
321. ensures the precise ACC adjustment 4 Close the ARDF or the platen cover 5 Press Start Scanning on the LCD Then the machine starts the ACC Exit the User Tools mode and then enter the SP mode Do the Forced line position adjustment as follows 1 First do SP2 111 3 Mode c 2 Then do SP2 111 1 Mode a 3 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 6 Exit the SP mode Operation check Check if the sample image has been copied normally 84 Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 Maintenance Tables Preventive Maintenance Tables Chart A4 LT 596 Mode 2 copies original prints job Environment Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions Symbol keys C Clean R Replace L Lubricant l Inspect Mainframe Scanner Optics Reflector C cloth Optics 1st 2nd 3rd mirrors cloth Pe pp ew Dry cloth Exposure Glass alcohol Dry cloth ADF Exposure Glass alcohol Exposure Lamp APS Sensor PCU Dev Unit K Drum Unit K C M Y Developer K C M Y 85 Preventive Maintenance pem Dev Unit Entrance Vacuum Mylar K C M Y Transfer Image transfer belt cleaning unit Paper transfer roller unit Fusing TJ TT TI LL fe TT I oe me mm Le
322. ent 677 Image Transfer Contact Release 5803 4 Position Paper Transfer Contact Release 5803 9 Position Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Filler not 5803 32 Drum Phase Sensor MCY Filler detected detected 5803 46 Fusing New Unit Detection New SC detected Paper 5803 47 PP SC Detection 5803 48 Tray 1 Set Detection 5803 49 Tray 1 Paper End No paper remaining 5803 50 Tray 1 Paper Height Detection 1 See table 1 following this table 5803 51 Tray 1 Paper Height Detection 2 See table 1 following this table 5803 52 Tray 1 Lift Detection Not upper limit Upper limit 5803 53 Tray 2 Set Detection Set Not set 5803 54 Tray 2 Paper End No paper Paper 678 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 es e Paper not 5803 59 Registration Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 60 Relay Sensor 1 Paper feed sensor 1 Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 61 Relay Sensor 2 Paper feed sensor 2 Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 64 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected detected l l Paper not Fusing Exit Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 5803 67 Exit Full Detection Paper not full Paper full 5803 71 By Pass Paper Size See table 3 following this table Paper not detected 5803 65 5803 66 5803 72 Bridge Exit Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 74 Bridge Paper Full Paper not fu
323. ent O to 1024 784 1 digit step 4608 White Balance WhiteBalaneeTargeB DEU 0000 B DFU This value is the target value of blue for the ENG white level adjustment 0 to 1024 784 1 digit step Black Level Fine Adj Display RE Red Even signal RO Red Odd signal Displays the black offset value rough 001 Latest RE Color adjustment for the even red signal in the 505 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the black offset value rough Latest RO Color adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value fine Latest RE Color adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value fine Latest RO Color Black Level Rough Adj Display adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the black offset value rough adjustment for the odd red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the black offset value fine adjustment for the even red signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the black offset value
324. ent for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2751 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 140 5 step 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 1 MH Special 1 Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values 2784 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG 423 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2751 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 150 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 1 HH Special 1 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2753 and SP275 are multiplied by t
325. equires the Plug IEEE1284 Type C and the optional IEEE1284 interface option must also be installed 92 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Image Adjustment Scanning Check the printing registration side to side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments Use a S 2 1 test chart to do the following adjustments Scanner sub scan magnification t A Sub scan magnification 1 Putthe test chart on the exposure glass Then make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Checkthe magnification ratio Adjust with SP4 008 if necessary Standard 1 0 Scanner leading edge and side to side registration EN A Leading Edge Registration 93 1 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Put the test chart on the exposure glass Then make a copy from one of the feed stations Check the leading edge and side to side registration Adjust the following SP modes if necessary Standard 0 2mm for the leading edge registration 0 2 5mm for the side to side registration sw Leading Edge Registration SP4 010 001 Side to Side Registration SP4 011 001 ARDF ARDF side to side leading edge registration and trailing edge my A Leading edge registration Use A3 DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above 1 Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF Then make a copy from one of the feed stations Check the registration Check the leading edg
326. er Type Color Mode Paper Type gt Plain Thick 1or Thick 1001 2 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operation timing for each mode 001 Tray Plain BW ENG 9t0 9 0 0 0 1 mm step 002 Tray Thick 1 BW 003 Tray Thick 2 BW ENG 004 By pass Table Plain BW ENG By pass Table Thick 1 BW 005 ENG By pass Table Thick 2 BW By pass Table Plain 006 ENG 012 ENG Color By pass Table Thick 1 Color 013 ENG 317 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Side to Side Reg Side to Side Registration Adjustment Adjusts the side to side registration by changing the laser main scan start position for each mode 001 By pass Table 002 Paper Tray 1 003 Paper Tray 2 4 to 4 0 0 0 1 mm step 004 Paper Tray 3 005 Paper Tray 4 006 Duplex Paper Buckle Paper Buckle Adjustment Tray Location Paper Type Paper Type N Normal TH Thick Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed timing 001 ENG 1 5t0 5 0 1 mm step 318 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 010 Duplex Plain 011 Duplex Thick1 1007 By Pass Size Detection By Pass Size Detection Display 00r 1 0 0 Disable 1 Enable Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by pass This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is less than 8 5 0 OFF
327. er belt C This motor has the paper transfer HP sensor D inside The paper transfer HP sensor detects if the paper transfer roller is in contact with the image transfer belt Only when the machine executes the line position adjustment or process control the paper transfer unit keeps away from the image transfer belt 790 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Paper Feed Overview JF 19 TI DE 14 8 3 TES NES 13 Se 9 L 10 OO 8 Friction pad By pass feed 1 Pick up roller tray 1 9 Vertical transport roller 1 2 Separation roller tray 1 10 Vertical transport roller 2 3 Feed roller tray 1 11 Feed roller tray 2 4 Registration roller 12 Separation roller tray 2 5 Transport roller By pass feed 13 Paper tray 2 6 Feed roller By pass feed 14 Pick up roller tray 2 7 By pass feed table 15 Paper tray 1 There are two paper trays 500 sheets each and a by pass feed table 100 sheets The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system for tray 1 and 2 and uses a friction pad system for the by pass tray Tray 1 can hold A4 or letter paper only Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes 791 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Drive Tray 1 Tray 2 and By Pass Tray e SA S NE bj x E gt ANM Y o N S N The paper feed motor A drives the pick up and feed mechanisms in tray 1
328. er density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment Consumption pattern Y 0 to 255 5 1 time step 012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment T1 Bias Bk 0 to 80 20 1 uA step 013 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black T1 Bias M 0 to 80 20 1 uA step 014 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta T1 Bias C 0 to 80 22 1 uA step 015 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan T1 Bias Y 0 to 80 30 1 uA step 016 Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow Developer Mixing Time 0 to 250 10 1 sec step 017 Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment Consumption Pattern LD O to 15 15 1 step DUTY Bk 018 Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected 457 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 development gamma values SP3611 001 exceed the target values SP3611 005 by more than the specified thresholds SP3239 009 Consumption Pattern LD O to 15 15 1 step DUTY M Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment In toner consumption mode toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values SP3611 002 exceed the target values SP3611
329. er power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove all tapes and shipping retainers 2 Remove the two screws already installed at the top rear of the machine 3 Insert the two stud screws A on the top of the machine 4 Mountthe ARDF B by aligning the screw keyholes C in the ARDF support plate over the stud screws 5 Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws D 26 Installation 21 Apr 2006 E Vi TUD 8 Install the stamp cartridge F in the ARDF H ZEN Se BBB SBS Se ee ee m m 9 Peel off the platen sheet G and place it on the exposure glass 2 Installation 21 Apr 2006 10 11 12 13 14 15 Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet with the corner H on the exposure glass Close the ARDF Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached I Z 2i 7 lt DQ gt 5 lt Apn Attach the decal I to the top cover as shown Choose the language you want Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine and then check the ARDF operation Make a full size copy Check that the registrations side to side and leading edge and image skew are correct If they are not adjust the registrations and image skew referring to Copy Adjustments in the Replacements and Adjustments section 28 Insta
330. erminated the initialization Turn the main switch off and on when done at unit replacement Vt is more than 0 7V when Vont is 4 3V Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed Defective TD sensor Vent is less than 4 7V Defective TD sensor when Vcntis 2 Vttarget settings are not correct Vt target 3 Toner density error 0 2V Vt is more than 0 7V when Vont is 4 3V and Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed Defective TD sensor 203 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Vent is less than 4 7V when Vent Is Vt target 0 2V Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed Vent is less 9 Vent error 3 2 Defective TD sensor than 4 7V 3 Vttarget settings are not correct 4 Toner density error The machine starts developer initialization after you set Enable in SP3 902 005 006 007 or 008 Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 Occurs Process Control Self Check Result SP3 012 001 to 010 Process Control Self check Result Check the Vsg adjustment See the Process control Successfully self check l Vsg Adjustment completed successfully Result following this completed an able Vt maximum error and an image is faint Replace the toner Vt maximum or 1 Defective supply pu
331. erver documents if needed must be input again T ka the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security feature the DOS function must be set up again For more see Section 1 Installation If the customer is using the optional Browser Unit this unit must be installed again For more see Section 1 Installation NVRAM Replacement Procedure NVRAM on the BICU o m sme o I Make sure that you have the SMC report factory settings This report comes with the machine Output the SMC data iMf SP5 990 001 if possible Turn the main switch off Install an SD card into SD card slot 3 Then turn the main power on Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card W SP5 824 001 if possible Turn off the main switch Then unplug the power cord 200 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Replace the NVRAM on the BICU and reassemble the machine Plug in the power cord Then turn the main switch on Select a paper size type a SP5 131 001 Specify the device number and destination code of the machine 4 Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the device number and destination code SC 999 or Fusing Unit Setting Error can be shown until the device number and destination code are correctly programmed Turn the main switch off and on Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM SP5 825 001 if you have successfully copied them to the SD card Turn the
332. es SP5857 015 Copy SD Card to SD Card Any Desired Key This SP copies the log on an SD card the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory to a log specified by key number The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot This function does not copy from one slot to another Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data Unique file names are created for the data during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name This means that log data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card This command does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the specified key 5P5857 016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD However this is not a completely empty file The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key number and other non volatile information Even if this SP is not executed a file is created on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD it takes some time to complete this operation This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD With the file already created on the HDD for the log file the data only needs to be r
333. es T I Connection to EFI controller loose Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures i Printer application error An error is detected in the printer application program Defective software Unexpected hardware resource e g memory shortage Software defective switch off on or change the controller firmware if the problem is not solved Insufficient memory Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Printer font error A necessary font is not found in the SD card A necessary font is not found in the SD card The SD card data is corrupted 1 11 Check thatthe SD card has the correct data that the SD card has the 11 Check thatthe SD card has the correct data data Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Netfile function error The management area or management file on the HDD is corrupted Defective HDD Data inconsistency e g caused by power failure When SC 860 865 keep occurring 1 Follow the troubleshooting procedures In other cases 280 Troubleshooting 2f1 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Initialize the netfile partition 2 Initialize the hard disk 3 Replace the HDD Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Software performance error The software makes an unexpected operation Defective software Defective con
334. es the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled Repeat Number ENE 0 to 9 3 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at the developer initialization 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled Repeat Number Non use 0 to 9 0 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in stand by mode 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 455 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled Repeat Number ACC 0 to 9 3 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC 004 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is con
335. eshooting Procedures EE File format converter error The The fle format converter does not respond 0 format converter does not respond Defective file format Defective fle format converter 00 11 Replace the fle format converter 0 the file format converter Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 2 8 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Defective NVRAM Defective controller Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller Replace the NVRAM Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures External Controller Error 1 External Controller Error 2 GIL External Controller Error 3 External Controller Error 4 External Controller Error 5 m The external controller alerted the machine about an error Please refer to the instructions for the external controller application Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures External Controller Error 6 While EAC External Application Converter the conversion module ct was operating normally the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from D the FLUTE serial driver was detected or BREAK signal from the other station was detected Power outage at the EFI controller EFI controller was rebooted 2 9 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedur
336. et protocol Dor 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable Enables or disables the Web operation Dor 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Link Local Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses 1 to 5 147 Active IPv6 Stateless 561 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 002 Address 1 referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 116 in the format Status Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits Active IPv6 Stateless configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each Address 3 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 2 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 4 Active IPv6 Stateless Address 5 This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Manual Set Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each IPv6 Manual Address This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each HDD Formatting ALL Initializes the hard disk Use this SP mode only if there is a hard disk error IPv6 Gateway Address HDD Formatting IMH HDD Formatting Thumbnail HDD For
337. et the modem board setting with SP5816 3 Replace the modem board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Incorrect dial up connection 001 Program parameter error 002 Program execution error CTL An unexpected error occurs when the modem Cumin M tries to call the C center with a dial up connection Caused by a software bug No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures EEPROM error Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the EEPROM error Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures No response from BICU at power on 252 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures When the main power is turned on or the machine starts warming up from energy saving mode the controller does not receive a command signal from the BICU Loose connection Defective controller Defective BICU 1 Check the connection between the BICU and controller Replace the controller 3 Replace the BICU Controller to operation panel communication error at startup After the machine is powered on the communication between the controller and the operation panel is not established or communication with controller is in
338. etailed Check NG Standard NVRAM Detailed Check Detailed Check ix Error Logged Optional NVRAM Ki Error Logged Optional HDD Check NG Error Logged IEEE 1284 Loop back Check NG Error Logged Real Time Clock Detailed Check v Font ROM Sum Check NG v Error Logged C END NG gt SC828 NG gt SC829 Not use optional RAM Error Logged NG gt SC826 Power on 728 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Detailed self diagnostics In addition to the self diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine is powered on you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually This lets you test other components or conditions that are not tested during self diagnosis after power on The following device is required in order to put the machine in the detailed self diagnosis mode G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector Executing Detailed Self Diagnosis Do the following procedure to execute detailed self diagnosis 1 Switch off the machine and connect the parallel loopback device to the Centronics I F port 2 Hold down press and hold down Then switch on the machine while pressing both keys at the same time You will see Now Loading on the touch panel Then you will see the results of
339. ex unit The duplex unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section When both sides have been printed the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper out to the standard tray 813 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Duplex Drive G A3 ANY Qi END D 7 KINN NS Y AS e H F The duplex inverter motor A drives the following Duplex inverter roller B The duplex bypass motor C drives the following Duplex transport roller 1 D Duplex transport roller 1 E Duplex transport roller 1 F The duplex entrance sensor G and duplex exit sensor H control the interleave movement and detect paper jams 814 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Inverter Mechanism A o ays z B PSN AMA de This machine uses the above switch back system for duplex printing The drawing above right shows the paper feed for duplex printing 815 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Duplex Operation Up to A4 LT 8 x 11 LEF There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time The interleave method is used The drawing above shows the paper movement with the interleave method for three sheets of paper The printing is done as follows oi ISHER st side 2nd side Ll L 4 816 Detailed Section Descriptions
340. f P Scan PGS ImgEdt these editing features are Erase Border L Scan PGS ImgEdt Erase Center Image Repeat Centering O Scan PGS ImgEdt CTL Positive Negative 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note The count totals the number of times the 644 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 edit features have been used A detailed breakdown of exactly which features have been used is not given The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 261 T Scan PGS ColCr 8 262 C Scan PGS ColCr 8 266 L Scn PGS ColCr 8 26x 1 Color Conversion 8 26x2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation features have been selected at the operation 8 26x 3 Background panel 8 26x 4 Other T Scan PGS TWAIN CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions S Scan PGS TWAIN CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note At the present time these counters perform identical counts T Scan PGS Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit F Scan PGS Stamp CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 S Scan PGS Stamp The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode L Scan PGS Stamp screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from with
341. f no error is detected the test ends Then the completion code shows in the operation panel display If an error is detected the test is interrupted Then an error code shows The table below lists the completion and error codes SP4 904 1 Register Access There are 16 bits switches in this SP Each bit indicates each CPU as followings The error result is displayed on the operation panel in decimal number 0 Normal 1 Error Bit 0 TAURUS register Bit 3 to 11 Not used Bit 1 ORION register Bit 12 Ri20 register Bit 2 LUPUS register Bit 13 to 15 Not used 209 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 SP4 904 2 Image Path There are 16 bits switches in this SP Each bit indicates each CPU path as followings The error result is displayed on the operation panel in decimal number 0 Normal 1 Error Bit 0 Image path from SBU to TAURUS Bit 4 to 11 Not used Bit 1 Image path from TAURUS to ORION Bit 12 Image path from LUPUS to Ri20 Bit 2 Image path from ORION to TAURUS Bit 13 Image path from Ri20 to GAVD Bit 3 Image path from TAURUS to LUPUS Bit 14 and 15 Not used Errors may be caused by the following problems 1 Short circuit on the signal lines When the BICU board is installed a pin or two on the ASIC is damaged Some conductive matter or object is trapped among the pins Condensation 2 Destruction of circuit elements Over current or a defective element breaks the circuit 3 Abnormal power supply The re
342. f revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous maintenance units 7906 31 ENG 0 to 9999999 0 1 mm step Rotation Development Unit Bk 7906 35 Rotation Development Unit M 7906 36 Rotation Development Unit C 7906 37 Rotation Development Unit Y 7906 39 Rotation Developer Bk 7906 38 609 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 7906 40 Rotation Developer M 7906 41 Rotation Developer C 7906 42 Rotation Developer Y Rotation Image 7906 43 Transfer Belt 7906 44 Rotation Cleaning Unit 7906 45 Rotation Fusing Unit Rotation Paper Transfer 7906 46 Unit Measurement Toner 7906 47 Collection bottle Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or toner cartridge 7906 61 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step Rotation 96 Development Unit Bk 7906 65 Rotation 96 Development Unit M 7906 66 Rotation 9 6 Development Unit C 7906 67 Rotation Development Unit Y 7906 69 Rotation 7906 68 610 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Developer Bk Rotation Developer M 7906 70 Rotation Developer C 7906 71 Rotation Developer Y 7906 72 Rotation 9o Image 7906 73 Transfer Rotation 9o Cleaning Unit 7906 74 Rotation 9o Fusing Unit 7906 75 Rotation 9o Paper 7906 76 Transfer Unit Measurement
343. f the finisher 46 Installation 21 Apr 2006 D 4 Attach the cushions C to the finisher Make sure that the cushions are placed within 0 to 1 mm D from the edge of the cover or frame 5 Install the ground plate E on the finisher P x 2 M3 x 8 6 Attach the rear joint bracket F Fx 2 M4 x 14 7 Attach the front joint bracket G and the holder bracket H P x 2 M4 x 14 The holder bracket H must be placed outside the front joint bracket G The holder bracket is provided with the bridge unit B227 47 Installation 21 Apr 2006 8 Pull the lock lever I Long knob screw x 1 9 Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine keeping its front door open until the brackets J K go into their slots 10 Push the lock lever I and then secure it Long knob screw x 1 11 Close the front door of the finisher 12 Connect the finisher connector L to the machine Ry IM HEC S 13 Install the upper output tray M Short knob screw x 1 14 Install the lower output tray N 15 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 16 Check the 1000 sheet booklet finisher operation 48 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Punch Unit Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list No Description Q ty 1 Punch Unit 2
344. f you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC You can adjust the gamma data for the following Highlight Middle Shadow areas Dmax The adjustable range is from O to 30 31 steps Copy Mode KCMY Color Balance Adjustment The adjustment uses only Offset values m Never change Option values default value is 0 Highlight Low ID Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10 level scale Middle Middle ID Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10 level scale Shadow High ID Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10 level scale Level 10 in the C4 chart 10 level scale affects the entire image density 98 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID middle ID high ID and ID max the greater the density There are four adjustable modes can be adjusted with SP4 918 009 Copy Photo mode Copy Letter mode Copy Letter Single Color mode Copy Photo Single Color mode JUL 11 2002 4 59PH Manual Gamma Adj Copy Letter SC Of f set Opt ion M E IDmax 5 IDmax JUL 11 2002 4 59PH Manual Gamma Adj Copy Letter Of f set 5 Manual Gamma Ad Copy Photo Of f set Adjustment Procedure Copy the C 4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust Enter the SP mode Select Copy SP Select SP4 918 009 Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard the cL sm d SS table bel
345. failure issues this SC code Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray disconnected defective Shift tray motor of the upper tray is disconnected defective 256 Troubleshooting 0 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures above 2 Check for blockages in shift motor mechanism 3 Replace the shift tray HP sensor and or shift motor 4 Replace the finisher main board The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code For 1000 sheet booklet finisher The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position after the staple unit moves to its home position The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the staple unit moves from its home position For 500 sheet finisher on The stapler HP sensor does not detect ON OFF signal even the stapler moves from the OFF ON position for 0 6 seconds The stapler HP sensor does not detect ON when a stapling job is commanded or the stapler moves Staple jam Motor overload Defective stapler motor Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above Replace the HP sensor and or stapler motor 3 Replace the finisher main board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 257 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 For 1000
346. fault 500 pages 4 Color counter gt Output threshold for color outputs SP2 193 003 default 200 pages Front door open close This starts automatically when the front door is opened closed Line position adjustment is automatically done once if one of these conditions occurs 1 At gt Time threshold SP2 193 009 default 300 minutes 2 AT Temperature threshold SP2 193 008 default 5 C In stand by mode This is automatically done once if both conditions occur at the same time However it is not done if the machine is in the energy saver mode 1 At gt Time threshold SP2 193 009 default 300 minutes or AT gt Temperature threshold SP2 193 008 default 5 C 2 B W counter SP3 510 005 gt Output threshold for B W outputs SP2 193 002 default 500 pages or Color counter gt Output threshold for color outputs SP2 193 003 default 200 pages After new PCU or Image Transfer Belt Unit detection When the machine detects a new unit one of the PCUs or the Image Transfer Belt Unit line position adjustment is automatically done twice If the main scan magnification changes This is detected by the main scan synchronization detectors at each end of the scan line for each color If the magnification changes by more than 1 threshold adjustable SP2 193 010 line position adjustment is done again 765 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Main Scan Skew Adjustment SS
347. fax sending is not available at this time These counters count jobs not pages The counters for color are provided for future use the color fax feature is not available at this time The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending not when the job is sent T S to Email Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs color or black and white 637 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 scanned and attached to an e mail regardless of whether the document server was used or not S S to Email Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of jobs color or black and white scanned 8 135 and attached to e mail without storing the original on the document server These counters count jobs not pages If the job is stored on the document server after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black and white then counted If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router Scan to Email or Scan to PC or if one job is sent to more than one destination each send is counted separately For example if the same document is sent by Scan to Email as well as
348. ff and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit does not operate This mechanism prevents wear on the belt and rollers Me The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on the transfer belt during process control and line position adjustment 802 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Lubricant Mechanism The lubricant roller F contains silicone oil in its material The lubricant roller applies small amount of silicone oil to the pressure roller to reduce the friction between the pressure roller and thermistor The cleaning roller E cleans the lubricant roller to remove the residual toner stuck to the lubricant roller Pressure Release Mechanism Ces NS Y I RY UDs A The pressure levers A put the proper pressure to the nip between the pressure roller B and fusing belt C When releasing these levers the pressure roller moves away from the fusing belt If a paper jam occurs in the fusing unit releasing these levers make jammed paper easily removed 803 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Fusing Temperature Control Components D E F A Thermostat B Thermopile C Thermostat D Thermistor non contact E Thermistor contact F Thermostat G Pressure roller fusing lamp H Heating roller fusing lamps Fusing Temperatures When the main switch turns on the CPU turns on the fusing lamp The lamp stays on
349. ficient Setting DFU 0 to 2550 50 1 step 467 0 to 2 55 0 47 0 01 step 0 to 2550 500 1 step Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 014 Vt Sum Times M ENG 015 Vt Sum Times C ENG 016 Vt Sum Times Y ENG Pixel Proportion Coefficient 2 Setting DFU 001 Correction Coefficient 1 ENG 0 to 2 55 1 0 01 step 002 Correction Coefficient 2 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 5 0 01 step 003 Correction Coefficient 3 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 step 004 Correction Coefficient 4 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 25 0 01 step 005 Correction Coefficient 5 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 5 0 01 step 3234 Pixel Proportion Coefficient 3 Setting DFU 001 Correction Value 1 ENG 0 1 to 0 0 01 0 01 step 002 Correction Value 2 ENG 0 to 0 1 0 01 0 01 step Toner Supply Coefficient Display DFU 001 Pixel Proportion 2 Bk ENG 002 Pixel Proportion 2 M ENG O to 2 55 1 0 01 step 003 Pixel Proportion 2 C ENG 004 Pixel Proportion 2 Y ENG 005 Pixel Proportion 3 Bk ENG 006 Pixel Proportion 3 M ENG 0 7 to 1 3 1 0 01 step 007 Pixel Proportion 3 C ENG 008 Pixel Proportion 3 Y ENG 468 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 009 Vt Integral Value Bk 010 Vt Integral Value M 255 to 255 0 0 01 step 011 Vt Integral Value C 012 Vt Integral Value Y Toner Supply Consumption Display DFU Displays the t
350. for OHP in black and white 2603 mode 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 200 12 1 uA step 2608 OHP Bias FC 406 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 200 15 1 uA step OHP Paper Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 100 to 600 100 5 step Paper Transfer S1 ENG S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width 100 to 600 150 5 step Paper Transfer S2 ENG 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width 100 to 600 240 5 step Paper Transfer 93 ENG 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width 100 to 600 370 5 step Paper Transfer S4 ENG 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width 100 to 600 500 5 step 148 mm 2 55 size Paper width OHP Leading Edge Correction OHP Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2622 Paper Transfer Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in Paper Transfer 55 ENG ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step each mode SP2601 is multiplied by these SP values d The pa
351. from the hard disk to an SD card 1 Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier 2 Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857 009 Copy HDD to SD Card Latest 4 MB to write the debugging data to the SD card 3 Useacard reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want Recording Errors Manually SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically Please instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature SP5857 001 and select the hard disk as the save destination SP5857 002 if you want to use this feature 734 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 1 Press 1 Clear Modes on the operation panel when the error occurs 2 Onthe control panel enter 01 Then hold down for at least 3 seconds until the machine beeps and then release it This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives 3 Switch the machine off and on to resume operation The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk This lets the service representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card New Debug Log Cod
352. g Throughput ARDF mode Interface Compression Method 21 Apr 2006 Main scan Sub scan 600 dpi Twain Mode 100 to1200 dpi Delivery Mode 100 200 300 400 600 dpi 1 bit or 8 bits pixel each for RGB scan to E mail Folder BW 50 ppm A4LEF BW Text Print 200dpi Compression On MH FC 35 ppm A4LEF FC Text Photo 200dpi Compression Standard Ethernet 100 Base TX 10 Base T for TCP IP IEEE 1394 IP Over 1394 Wireless LAN B amp W TIFF MH MR MMR Gray Scale Full Color JPEG 844 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Supported Paper Sizes Paper Feed BT By pass Tray T1 Tray 1 T2 3 4 Tray 2 3 4 LCT Large Capacity Tray DT Duplex Tray Size W x North America Europe Asia DT JESSEN Paper A3 W 12 x 18 297 X A3 SEF M M A 420mm 210 x A4 SEF M A M A 297mm 297 X A4 LEF M S M S M 210mm 148 x Ab SEF M S 210mm 210 x Ab LEF M 148mm 105 x A6 SEF M 148mm 257 x BA SEF M 364mm EMEN DNO LESEN 182 x B5 SEF M 257mm 257 X B5 LEF M 182mm 128 x B6 SEF M S M 182mm EN 845 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Size W x North America Europe Asia gt eee owes feer aff Pee omr fem uff o Government Legal SEF Paper 8 25 x 14 Half Letter SEF 5 5 x 8 5 Executive SEF Executive LEF F SEF Foolscap SEF sm r mw ow fmt fom fm tr fm fom ffm Folio SEF waw fm om f fe fm fw ext fmf fom fmt pw
353. g unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning blade and roller The used toner collected from the belt is transported to the toner collection bottle There are seven ID sensors Three of them are for the line position adjustment Four of them are for process control 782 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 ITB Image Transfer Belt Drive Drive Motor A The ITB drive motor A drives the image transfer belt B and the cleaning unit via gears and the ITB drive roller C The speed of ITB drive depends on the process line speed see Laser Exposure Optical Path Transfer belt speed control This machine uses the rotation encoder to control the transfer belt speed The encoder A is on one of the rollers This encoder checks the rotation speed of the image transfer belt The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder Then it adjusts the rotation speed of the image transfer belt The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface B These notches are read by the sensor C The controller counts the number of notches that the sensor has read in the unit of time If the sensor has read an unusually large number of notches or an unusually small number of notches the controller ignores such unusual signals Therefore incorrect reading does not affect the rotation speed 783 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 A Ignored Number of notches read by the
354. ge path check on the BICU board and displays the result Dither Selection DFU 4905 Changes the parameters for error diffusion 4905 1 Dither Selection 0 to 255 0 1 step DFU 4907 SBU Test Pattern Change 0 to 255 0 1 step 0 Default Scanning Image 1 Grid pattern Test Pattern R 4907 1 2 Gradation main scan 3 Gradation sub scan 4 to 250 Default Scanning Image Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board Manual Gamma Adj Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode See Replacement and Adjustment Gamma Correction Copy Mode for how to use ENG 0 to 30 15 1 step 004 Offset IDmax 005 ENG 0 to 255 0 1 step DFU 028 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 27 Apr 2006 2006 009 Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen 001 to 008 For details see the Change Printer Gamma Correction in the section Replace and Adjustment IPU Image Pass Selection Selects the image path Enter the number to be selected using the 10 key pad RGB Frame Memory 0 to 9 5 1 step 0 1 2 3 4 D 6 T 8 Scanner input RGB images Scanner I F RGB images RGB images done by Shading correction Shading ON Black offset ON Shading data Inner pattern data Gray scale RGB images done by Line skipping correction RGB images done by Digital AE RGB images done by Vertical line correction
355. git step ACC Target Density Selects the ACC result Copy Bk Text Copy M Text Copy C Text Copy Y Text ENG 0 to 10 5 1 step 10 Darkest densit Copy Bk Photo Fev esie Copy M Photo Copy C Photo ENG Copy Y Photo ENG ACC Offset Light 500 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern 001 Self Machine Bk 002 Self Machine M 128 to 127 0 1 step 003 Self Machine C 004 Self Machine Y 005 Other Machine Bk 006 Other Machine M Reserved 007 Other Machine C 008 Other Machine Y ACC Offset Dark Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern 001 Self Machine Bk 002 Self Machine M 128 to 127 0 1 step 003 Self Machine C 004 Self Machine Y 005 Other Machine Bk 006 Other Machine M Reserved 007 Other Machine C 008 Other Machine Y Printer Vector Correction This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues RY YR YG etc x 4 Colors R G B Option for a total of 48 parameters 501 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 004 RY Phase Option R G B 005 008 YR Phase Option R G B 009 012 YG Phase Option R G B ENG 013 016 GY Phase Option R G B 017 020 GC Phase Option R G B Specifies the printer vector correction value 0 to 255 0 1 step Scanner Application text Printing DFU Scanner Application text DFU Scanner Applicati
356. gnal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step 912 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value GO rough adjustment for the odd green BW signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Last Correct Value GE BW Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value GO fine adjustment for the odd green signal BW in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Black Level Rough Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal Displays the previous black offset value rough adjustment for the even blue signal Last Correct Value mM o in the CCD circuit board color printing Color speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the previous black offset value Last Correct Value rough adjustment for the odd blue signal Color in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the previous black offset value fine adjustment for the even blue signal in Last Correct Value mE o the CCD circuit board color printing Color speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Last Correct Value Displays the previous black offset value Color fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in 913
357. harnesses P to the main PCB 15 Put the harnesses Q through the hole R in the rear frame a x 1 52 Installation 21 Apr 2006 16 Install the punch drive motor S on the rear frame P x 2 17 Connect the drive motor harness T to the harness from the punch unit a x 1 18 Connect the home position sensor harness from the punch unit to the home position sensor U 19 Install the sub scan registration sensor unit V from the rear side F X 2 20 Route and connect the harnesses as shown a X 2 53 Installation 21 Apr 2006 21 Install the hopper full sensor arm W x 1 spring x 1 22 Connect the harness from the sub scan registration sensor unit to the hopper full sensor X 23 Install the hopper Y from the front side 24 Reinstall the timing belt cover and knob 25 Reinstall the rear cover x 2 26 Close the front door and top cover 27 Install the 1000 sheet booklet finisher on the copier 28 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 29 Check the 1000 sheet booklet finisher operation 54 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Mechanical Counter NA Only Installation Procedure A N 9 pi om 10 11 12 13 14 Rear cover see Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section Right rear cover see Right Rear Cover in the Replacement and Adjustment section PSU bracket
358. hat was stored on the document server the C and P counters both increment 631 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 When a job already on the document server is printed with another application the L counter increments When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application the S counter increments If the original was scanned from within document server mode then the L counter increments When images stored on the document server by a network application including Palm 2 are printed with another application the O counter increments When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application Web Image Monitor for example the C counter increments When a fax on the document server is printed the F counter increments C Pjob DesApl These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document server P Pjob DesApl 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of jobs Bre printed from within the document server mode L Pjob DesApl screen at the operation panel O Pjob DesApl When documents already stored on the document server are printed the count for the application that started the print job is incremented When the print job is started from a network application Desk Top Binder Web Image Monitor etc the L counter increments T TX Jobs LS These SPs count the applications that stored files on the document server th
359. he factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for Factory Setting GO BW mE the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Black Level Rough Adj Display BE Blue Even signal BO Blue Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the 001 Factory Setting BE Color black level adjustment rough adjustment 521 Service Tables 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 Factory Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting Factory Setting BO Color BE Color BO Color ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG 21 Apr 2006 for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for the odd blue signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment for the even blue signal in the CCD circuit
360. he laser housing optics unit P x 3 Z9 m db gt AR F T9 I oo T KA gt z 2 IE A R D FS Y y 3 Polygon mirror motor cover B of the laser optics housing unit F x 4 4 Polygon mirror motor holder C P x 2 5 Polygon mirror motor D x 4 E x 1 After installing the laser optics housing unit 1 Do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode c SP2 111 3 2 Then do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode a SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 125 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Image Creation PCU Do not touch the OPC drum Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve 1 Open the front door Lever lock A x 1 Turn the release lever B and the image transfer unit contact lever C counter clockwise 4 Open the drum positioning plate D 5 Pull out the PCU hold the grip while you pull it out E Drum Unit and Development Unit The new drum unit has a front cover and a front joint When you attach the new drum unit to the development unit remove a front cover and a front joint at first And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit 126 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 1 If you install a new drum unit set SP 3902 xxx to 1 Black
361. he local storage broken down by color output 8 582 2 Single Color 8 582 3 Two Color 8 582 4 Full Color O Counter 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the totals for A3 DLT paper use number of duplex pages printed and the number of staples used These totals are for Other O applications only Coverage Counter 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout 661 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 pages for each printing mode 8 601 11 B W Printing Pages T FAX TX PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number F FAX TX PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number fa document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color Atthe present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination T IFAX TX PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax image
362. he size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB 821 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The partition can hold up to 150 jobs Related SP Modes Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode SP5 828 069 for each protocol The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SP mode even when the customer switches it on with the user mode Paper Source Selection Tray Priority Auto Tray Select Priority Tray lt ___ Start of Tray Search LCT Optional Tray 3 Optional Tray 4 Optional The Tray Priority setting determines the start of the tray search when the user selects Auto Tray Select with the driver The machine searches paper trays for the specified paper size and type When no tray contains paper that matches the paper size and type specified by the driver the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper The Tray Priority setting can be specified in the following menu gt System Settings gt Tray Paper Settings gt Paper Tray Priority Printer m The by pass feed table is not part of the tray search Tray Locking If Tray Locking is enabled for a tray the controller skips the locked tray in the tray search process The Tray Locking setting can be specified in the following menu gt System Settings gt Tray Paper Settings gt Paper Type Tray gt Apply Auto Paper Select where the i
363. he system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD However the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system administrator at this stage Executing this SP by the service technician 571 Service Tables 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 21 Apr 2006 immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users Procedure 1 Turn the machine off 2 Install the new HDD 3 Turn the machine on 4 The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically 5 However at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator 6 Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041 After this SP executes successfully any user can access the address book Initialize Local Addr Book Initialize Delivery Addr Book Initialize LDAP Addr Book Initialize All Addr Book Backup All Addr Book Restore All Addr Book Clear Backup Info Clears the local address book information including the user code Clears the distribution address book information except the user code Clears the LDAP address book information except the user code Clears all directory information managed by UCS including all user codes Uploads all directory information to the SD card Downloads all directory information from the SD card Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service
364. he write protect switch is ON a download error e g Error Code 44 occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge Turn the main switch off 2 Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 3 The application program is copied back into this card 3 Insert the SD card having stored the application program to SD Card Slot 1 The application program is copied back from this SD card Turn the main switch on Start the SP mode Select SP5 873 002 Undo Exec Follow the messages shown on the operation panel Turn the main switch off Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3 1 This step assumes that the application programs in the SD card are used by the O a m Cr ou machine 10 Turn the main switch on 11 Check that the application programs run normally 12 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All Connections at the end of this section 64 Installation 21 Apr 2006 PostScript 3 A CAUTION Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure Remove the slot cover A from SD card slot 2 F x 1 2 Turn the SD card B label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 3 Attach the slot cover A x 1 ON Adob PostScripf 3 IN pp 4 Attach the Adobe PostScript 3 decal C to the front door 5 Make sure that the machine can recognize the option see Check All
365. hen the environment is detected as MH SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 2nd Side Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step 2nd Side Thick 3 HH Thick 3 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step 1st Side Separation DC Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 1st Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step 2nd Side Separation DC Thick 3 2nd Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 415 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Special 1 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 1 Separation DC Plain ENG 0 to 5000 1000 10 V step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain ENG 0 to 5000 1500 10 V step 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC Fine 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Side Special 1 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in ENG black and white mode Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side
366. hen the machine calculates the timing for process control it uses a number of conditions These are the results after considering all the conditions Job End Potential ENG 0 to 2000 1 page ste Control BW dis PI Job End Potential ENG 0 to 2000 1 page ste Control FC iis PI Interrupt Potential ENG 0 to 2000 1 page ste Control BW oe PI Interrupt Potential ENG 0 to 2000 1 page ste Control FC pe PI Refresh Mode DFU While making prints with low coverage the developer is agitated with less toner consumption and the toner carrier attraction tends to increase This may cause low image density or poor transfer white dots To prevent this the coagulated toner or overcharged toner has to be consumed by performing the refresh mode Dev Motor Rotation ENG 0 to 1000 0 1 m step Display Bk Dev Motor Rotation ENG Display M 003 Dev Motor Rotation ENG 483 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Display C Dev Motor Rotation ENG Display Y 005 Rotation Threshold ENG 0 to 1000 1 1 m step 006 Pixel Coverage Sum Bk ENG 007 Pixel Coverage Sum M ENG 0 to 65535 0 1 cm step 008 Pixel Coverage Sum C ENG 009 Pixel Coverage Sum Y ENG 010 Required Area Bk ENG 011 Required Area M ENG 0 to 65535 0 1 cm step 012 Required Area C ENG 013 Required Area Y ENG 014 Refresh Thre
367. her 8 5 x 14 SEF or B4 SEF depending on the setting of SP 1 181 004 3 The machine detects either 11 x 81 2 LEF or A4 LEF depending on the setting of SP 1 181 002 4 The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10 5 x 7 25 LEF depending on the setting of SP 1 181 005 Table 3 Paper Size By pass Table 0 Pushed 1 Not pushed Models anser ee e s e 11 x 17 SEF 11 x 8 5 LEF A4 LEF 11 x 17 SEF A3 SEF 11 x 8 5 LEF A4 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF A4 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF A5 LEF 8 5 x 11 SEF A4 SEF 8 5 x 11 SEF A5 LEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 687 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF 4 1 When the machine determines that the paper feed direction is LEF it considers that the paper size is bracketed size Table 4 APS Original Size Detection Width Original Size Length Sensor SP4 301 Sensor display Metric version Inch version pwr fefe fe e fo fam feer e e x fom F4 8 5 x 13 8 25 x 13 or 8 x 13 8 5 x 14 00011100 SP 5126 controls the size that is detected we or x x s 9 o omm me ECC v r Deme x o o x ome s p pe fof oman 5 5 x 8 5 A5 LEF SEF X X X X X 00000000 8 5 X 5 5 Table 5 Paper and Tray Detection 500 Sheet Finisher Home Position Hope Position Paper not Paper detected Lever Output Tray detected 688 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006
368. hes the waste toner bottle set switch at the rear of the machine As a result the machine detects that the toner collection bottle is installed The bottle near full full detection mechanism is above the bottle When the used toner pushes up the used toner feeler A the waste toner sensor B turns off At this time the machine detects that the toner collection bottle is almost full and displays a message After this when 500 sheets of paper have been copied the machine detects that the toner collection bottle is full and the machine stops 781 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer and Paper Separation Image Transfer Overview 1 Image transfer belt ITB 6 Lubricant application roller 2 ID sensor 7 Toner collection auger 3 ITB drive roller 8 Cleaning blade 4 Paper transfer roller 9 Cleaning roller 5 Rotation encoder 10 Image transfer roller The toner is moved from the four drums to the ITB by the four image transfer rollers This is done with one rotation of the ITB four toner images are super imposed onto the belt The arrow above the C and M drums on the diagram shows the direction of ITB rotation The ITB drive roller then moves the four color toner image from the transfer belt to the paper The paper transfer roller is an idle roller The cleanin
369. hese SP values ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2751 is multiplied by these SP values 424 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 80 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st Side Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side Special 2 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 2 Separation DC Plain ENG 0 to 5000 1000 10 V step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain ENG 0 to 5000 1500 10 V step 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC Fine 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Side Special 2 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in ENG black and white mode Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 130 20 1 uA step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side 003 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG 425 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 2 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller
370. hick 370 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 0 to 80 17 1 uA Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for thick 1 paper Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG 0 to 80 12 1 uA FINE Bk Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for Thick 2 and fine Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG 0 to 80 12 1 uA FINE M Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for Thick 2 and fine Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG 0 to 80 12 1 uA FINE C Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for Thick 2 and fine Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG 0 to 80 12 1 uA FINE Y Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for Thick 2 and fine Common LL Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2351 and SP2357 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Image Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 70 5 step 002 Image Transfer Thick 1 ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 2381 371 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Thick 2 amp ENG Not used FINE 10 to 250 100 5 step Image Transfer P M l ENG P M Pattern When doing process control or Pattern o 7 automatic line position adjustment Common ML
371. hing Fusing unit Fusing Unit Fusing upper cover Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Release the pressure roller lamp cord A P x 1 Rear side stay B x 2 Do MX 6 Release the heating roller lamp cord D x 4 7T Remove the rear and front heating lamp brackets E P X 1 each 177 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 8 Remove the heating roller lamp F 9 Remove the rear and front heating roller bearings G and insulating bushings H 178 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Pressure Roller Bearing 1 Fusing upper cover Fusing Belt Pressure Roller Fusing Lamps Front and rear side stay Heating Roller Bearing and Insulating Bushing 3 Pressure roller fusing lamp rear stay A uo 4 Pressure roller fusing lamp front stay B P X 1 and screw C for the pressure roller lamp terminal 5 Pressure roller bearing D 179 Replacement and Adjustment Paper Feed Paper Feed Unit Rear cover W Rear Cover Right rear cover Right Rear Cover Duplex unit Mf Duplex Unit Pull out tray 1 and tray 2 Paper guide plate A hook x 2 Paper feed unit B 7 x 2 E7 x 1 Te d I x 21 Apr 2006 180 Replacement and Adjustment Pick Up Feed and Separation Rollers Tray 1 and Tray 2 UE oe Ye m d Paper feed unit Mf Paper Feed Unit Roller holder A x 1 Pick up roller B
372. hold Developer M Day Threshold Developer C Day Threshold Developer Y Day Threshold Transfer Belt Day Threshold Cleaning Unit 0 to 999999 240000 1 sheet step Adjusts the threshold day for the near end fro each PM unit 1 to 30 15 1 day step These threshold days are used for NRS alarms 623 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Day Threshold Fusing Unit 7952 35 Day Threshold Paper 7952 36 Transfer Unit Day Threshold Toner 7952 37 Collection Botte 7953 Operation Env Log PCU Bk Displays the PCU rotation distance in each specified operation environment T Temperature C H Relative Humidity 7953 1 CTL 0 to 99999999 1 mm step 7953 2 T lt 5 30 lt H lt 55 7953 3 T lt 5 55 lt H lt 80 7953 4 T lt 5 80 lt H lt 100 7953 5 5 lt T lt 15 0 lt H lt 30 7953 6 5 lt T lt 15 30 lt H lt 55 7953 7 5 lt T lt 15 55 lt H lt 80 7953 8 5 lt T lt 15 80 lt H lt 100 7953 9 15 lt T lt 25 0 lt H lt 30 7953 10 15 lt T lt 25 30 lt H lt 55 7953 11 15 lt T lt 25 55 lt H lt 80 15 lt T lt 25 80 lt H lt 100 7953 13 25 lt T lt 30 0 lt H lt 30 7953 14 25 lt T lt 30 30 lt H lt 55 7953 12 624 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7953 15 25 lt T lt 30 55 lt H lt 80 25 T 30 80 lt H lt 100 7953 17 30 lt T 0 H 30 7953 18 30 T 30 lt H lt 55 7952 19 30 lt T 55 lt H lt 80 7953 16 795
373. ide S2 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side S4 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S4 017 Paper Transfer Thick 1 21 Service Tables O 21 Apr 2006 2006 ENG 100 to 600 150 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 240 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 370 5 step 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG 100 to 600 500 5 step ENG 394 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 77 mm s 1st Side S5 148 2 S5 size P idth Paper Transfer Thick 1 id Sze per Int 77 mm s 2nd Side S5 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S5 Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S5 Thick 1 Leading Edge Correction Thick 1 Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2502 and SP250 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edg
374. idth 417 Service Tables Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S3 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S3 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S4 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S5 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S5 Paper Transfer FINE 1st oide S5 Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S5 21 Apr 2006 100 to 600 200 5 step ENG 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 220 5 step 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG ENG 100 to 600 240 5 step 148 mm 2 S5 size Paper width ENG ENG Not used ENG Special 1 Leading Edge Correction Special 1 Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2753 and SP2757 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2772 418 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain ENG 0 to 400 150 5 step 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG
375. iled Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Multi Image Layout N up This function can print multiple images on the specified paper 4 up The number and arrangement of images can be specified as shown in the following list Number of images Vertical x Horizontal images Paper direction 2 2x1 Portrait 4 2x2 Landscape 4x2 Portrait 3x3 Landscape 5x5 Landscape 8x4 Portrait 6x6 Landscape 7x7 Landscape 8x8 Landscape 829 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The number of images printed on a page can be as shown in the following list 100mm x 150mm 4 A form feed may be inserted between images depending on the DSC in use Also printing in the specified way may not be possible depending on the specification for the number of images to be printed Edge to edge borderless printing This function is not available in this machine 830 Detailed Section Descriptions Printing quality This function can print images in the selected printing quality Normal or Default 600dpi x 600dpi 2bit 600dpi x 600dpi 4bit This function can optimize colors when printing images Color matching This function can match the paper type names between the machine and DSC When this Paper type specification 21 Apr 2006 function sends the machine s paper type information to the DSC the names of paper types displayed on the DS
376. in the Copy mode 645 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Oo CON N T Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 441 C Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 F Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 443 S Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application Use these totals to compare original page size Scanning and output page size SP 8 445 L Scan PGS Size 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored 8 306 from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 0 446 646 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 8 30x 10 Full Bleed 8 30x 254 Other Standard 8 30x 255 Other Custom T Scan
377. in the SP mode tables FA Factory setting Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory Refer to the factory setting 315 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 sheets enclosed You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal DFU Design Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field A sharp to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change An asterisk to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored in the NVRAM If you do a RAM clear this SP mode will be reset to the default value ENG and CTL show which NVRAM contains the data ENG NVRAM on the BICU board CTL NVRAM on the controller board The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right hand column of the SP table in the following way Adjustable range Default setting Step Alphanumeric m If Alphanumeric is written to the right of the bracket as shown above the setting of the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers However the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers SSP This denotes a Special Service Program mode setting 316 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Copy Service Mode Service Mode Table SP1 XXX Feed Leading Edge Registration Leading Edge Registration Adjustment Tray Location Pap
378. inations of several conditions For details see Automatic Line Position Adjustment in the Detailed Section Descriptions section Magnification ENG 0 to 10 1 1 step Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment If the length of the main scan is changed by this amount since the previous MUSIC then MSUIC is done again Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment Mode a adjustment twice The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions For details see Automatic Line Position Adjustment in the Detailed Section Descriptions section ENG 1 to 9999 600 1 minute step Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment Mode a adjustment twice The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions For details see Automatic Line Position Adjustment in the 363 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 mu Detailed Section Descriptions section 2194 MUSIC Execution Result Line Position Adjustment Execution Result 001 Year ENG 0 to 99 0 1 year step 002 Month ENG 1 to 12 1 1 month step 003 Day ENG 1 to 31 1 1 day step 004 Hour ENG 0 to 23 0 1 hour step 005 Minute ENG 0 to 59 0 1 minute step 006 Temperature ENG 0 to 100 0 1 page step 0 or 1 0 1 step 007 Execution Result ENG
379. ing Idling 1105 Fusing emperature Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings Do this procedure to enter a setting Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate number The number you enter writes over the previous setting Press to enter the setting The value is not registered if you enter a number that is out of range Press Yes when you are prompted to complete the selection If you need to perform a test print press Copy Window to open the copy window and select the settings for the test print Press Start and then press SP Mode highlighted in the copy window to return to the SP mode display Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished Exiting Service Mode Press the Exit key on the touch panel Service Mode Lock Unlock At locations where the machine contains sensitive data the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator 1 If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF after he or she logs in User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The CE ca
380. ings if the upload fails Switch the copier main power switch off Insert the SD card into SD card slot 3 Then switch the copier on 717 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 4 Execute SP5824 001 NVRAM Data Upload and then press the Execute key 5 The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure is finished The file is saved to the path and the following filename NVRAM lt serial number gt NV Here is an example with Serial Number K500001 7114 NVRAMYK5000017114 NV 6 In order to prevent an error during the download be sure to mark the SD card that holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded N Hote You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged or if the connection between the controller and BICU is defective Do the download procedure again if the download fails Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the NVRAM data Switch the copier main power switch off Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3 Switch the copier main power switch on Do SP5825 001 NVRAM Data Downloa
381. initialization 453 009 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 DFU 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Enable 1 Disable Toner Replenishment Mode DFU opecifies the toner supply time for each color in the toner supply mode 0 to 30 8 1 sec step ENG 0 to 30 6 1 sec step 001 Number Bk ENG 002 Number M 003 Number C 004 Number Y 005 008 Sets the execution flag for the toner supply mode for each color 005 Execution Flag Bk ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step Execution Flag M ENG Q Flag OFF 1 Flag ON This flag is cleared after executing TD 006 007 Execution Flag C ENG sensor initialization 008 Execution Flag Y ENG 3041 Process Control Type 0 or 1 1 1 step Alphanumeric 0 FIXED Use the fixed values for the Voltage Control ENG charge DC bias and development DC bias set with SP2 005 and SP2 229 1 CONTROL Enables or disables potential control 0 or 1 1 1 step Alphanumeric LD Power Control ENG 0 FIXED at the value in SP2221 xxx 1 CONTROL adjusted by process control Selects the LD power control mode 454 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 O to 2 2 1 step 0 Not Executed Pre ACC Process Control ENG 1 Process Control 2 TC Control TD Adjustment 3 Not used Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC TD Adjustment Mode Repeat Number Power O to 9 4 1 time step ON Specifi
382. ion 8 451 1 Bypass Tray 8 451 4 Paper Tray Unit Option 84515 Paper Tray Unit Option 653 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 T PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications These counters are not the same as the PM counter The PM counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application F PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application P PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application L PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 654 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages not only on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as well Magnification adjustments done w
383. ion main scan A Gradation main scan B Gradation main scan C Gradation main scan D Gradation sub scan 1 Grid pattern Slant grid pattern Gradation RGBCMYK 9 UCR pattern Grid pattern CMYK Color patch CMYK Gray pattern 1 Gray pattern 2 Gray Pattern 3 Shading pattern Thin line pattern Scanned Grid pattern Scanned Gray scale Scanned Color patch 10 Color patch 16 1 11 Color patch 16 2 12 Color patch 64 ICI Output Selection 4429 Adjusts the ICI output density level 32 to 255 128 1 step 1 ENG 255 Strongest density Saturation PE Adjusts the level of saturation for copying the level of saturation for copying 0 to 5 3 1 step 0 High 1 Lowest ENG 2 Lower 3 Default 4 Higher 5 Highest Scanned Slant Grid C Scanned Slant Grid D 4440 0 01 Saturation Adj 1 499 Service Ta 4450 001 002 4460 001 002 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 bles 21 Apr 2006 Scan Image Pass Selection Black Subtraction ON OFF 0 or 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path SH ON OFF 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 ON 1 OFF Uses or does not use the shading image path Digital AE Set DFU Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode You can adjust its level for each scanning method platen ADF Background Level 512 to 1532 972 1 di
384. ions Printer Printer Languages Resolution and Gradation Printing speed Resident Fonts Host Interfaces 21 Apr 2006 PCL 6 5c RPCS Refined Printing Command Stream Adobe PostScript 3 optional PDF Direct optional PictBridge optional PCL 5c 300 x 300 dpi Available only in B W mode 600 x 600 dpi Fast 1 bit Standard 2 bits Fine 4 bits PCL 6 600 x 600 dpi Fast 1 bit Standard 2 bits Fine 4 bits RPCS 300 x 300 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 1 800 x 600 dpi 2400 dpi x 600 dpi 1 800 x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 2 bits 2400 dpi x 600 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 4 bits PS3 600 x 600 dpi Fast 1 bit Standard 2 bits Fine 4 bits Cla 25 ppm in Plain Middle Thick mode 16 ppm in Thick OHP mode C1b 30 ppm in Plain Middle Thick mode 16 ppm in Thick OHP mode PCL 6 5c 48 Intelli fonts 10 TrueType fonts 1 Bitmap font Adobe PostScript 3 136 fonts 24 Type 2 fonts 112 Type 14 fonts USB 2 0 Standard Ethernet 100 Base TX 10 Base T Standard IEEE1284 parallel x 1 Optional IEEE1394 Optional 842 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 IEEE802 11b Wireless LAN Optional Bluetooth Wireless Optional USB Host Optional TCP IP IPv4 IPv6 IPX SPX AppleTalk Auto Switching SMB NetBEUI NetBIOS over TCP IP Network Protocols 843 Specifications Scanner Standard Scanner Resolution Available scanning Resolution Range Grayscales Scannin
385. ironment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 001 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values 003 Separation DC 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer 1st Side 10 to 250 80 5 step 404 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thick 2 ML Thick 2 Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side 10 to 250 90 5 step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values 003 Separation DC 1st Page ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step 004 Separation DC 2nd Page ENG Thick 2 MM Thick 2 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side 10 to 250 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2551 is multiplied by these
386. is SC is generated if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive When the tray lowers the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1 5 T naaa 237 Troubleshooting 2f1 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures For the LCT fthe upper limit does not go off for 1 5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at power on Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection 1 Check the cable connections Check and or replace the defective component Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the fusing paper exit fan Defective fusing paper exit fan motor or connector disconnection Defective BICU Check the connector and or replace the fusing paper exit fan motor Fusing Paper exit fan error Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HEEL The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the drive unit fan motor Defective drive unit fan motor Replace the drive unit fan motor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures T Ventilation fan at the left side of the machine motor front rear error 238 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Tro
387. ith printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce Enlarge copying are counted The magnification rates of blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically assigned a rate of 100 655 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature switched on Note These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print application 0 to 9999999 0 1 T PrtPGS Col Mode C PrtPGS Col CTL Mode F PrtPGS Col Mode in the Color Mode by each application L PrtPGS Col CTL Mode CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed O PrtPGS Col CTL Mode 8 49x 2 Single Color 8 49x 4 Full Color T PrtPGS Col Mode CTL P PrtPGS Col Mode CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed in the Color Mode by the print application O PrtPGS Col Mode 656 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 T PrtPGS Emul 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed P PrtPGS Emul 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed s em JJ TT me e EE ms f mf ms fm me fa LL mr fe
388. ity for network administrators NIB setup utilities are also available This is provided on the printer drivers CD ROM A printer management utility for client users A utility for peer to peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP IP network A peer to peer print utility over a TCP IP network This provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features This is provided on the printer drivers CD ROM This utility deletes a print port for IEEE1394 in Win2000 This is provided on the printer drivers CD ROM A utility for peer to peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP This software provides several convenient functions for printing from Macintosh clients This is provided on the scanner drivers CD ROM DeskTopBinder Lite itself can be used as personal document management software and can manage both image data converted from paper documents and application files saved in each client s PC This is provided on the scanner drivers CD ROM 857 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Machine Configuration A I H G Machine Code Mainframe B230 B237 Platen cover G329 One from the two ARDF B789 One from G H and I Requires 500 sheet finisher B792 One from G H and I Requires 1000 sheet booklet finisher B793 J one from E and F Punch unit 3 2 holes B803 17 Punch unit 4 2 holes B803 27 Punch unit 4 holes B803 30 858 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 Machine Code _ One from G
389. k drum and development unit drive motor K 10 Registration motor Drives the registration roller 11 Paper transfer contact Moves the paper transfer roller in contact with the image motor transfer belt 12 ITB drive motor Drives the image transfer belt unit 13 Fusing paper exit Drives the fusing unit and paper exit section motor Board Structure Overview One of IEEE1284 IEEE 13 Wireless Bluetooth Image Processing Inthe diagram MLB is the File Format Converter Descriptions BICU Base Engine Control Unit 741 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The BICU controls all the mechanical components The BICU has six CPUs The CPUs control the following functions Engine sequence Engine operation Polygon motor control Image processing Controller The controller connects to the BICU through a PCI bus The controller handles the following functions Machine to host interface Operation panel interface Network interface Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE 1284 Bluetooth IEEE1394 IEEE802 11b wireless LAN USB Host HDD and DRAM DIMM LD Drive Board This is the laser diode drive circuit board SBU The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD charge coupled device and an analog to digital conversion circuit Operation Panel Board This controls the display panel the LED and the keypad Scanner I O Board SIO The scanner
390. kTop Binder Access Ctrl Device management Lower 4 bits Access Ctrl Delivery Lower 4 bits Access Ctrl uAdministration Lower 4bits opecifies the max size of the image data that Repository Download Image the machine can download 1 to 1024 1024 1 MB step Max Size 575 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Setting Timing Installation Date 5849 1 Displ The Counter Clear Day has been changed ispla iii to Installation Date or Inst Date Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter 5849 2 Switch to Print Dor 1 1 0 No Print 1 Print 5850 Address Book Function Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only 003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line This SP allows you to switch all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line Conversely if for some reason the G4 line becomes unusable you can easily switch back to G3 Bluetooth Mode Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit Press either key 0 Public 1 Private Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROM and copy it to the HDD This SP can be executed as many times as required This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks 576 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Remote ROM Update Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port IEEE1284 when updating the remote ROM
391. l by the number of pages in the job O Jobs PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of Other application jobs Web Image Monitor Palm 2 etc by size based on the number of pages in the job 8 07x 1 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages 8 07x 2 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages 635 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 8 07x 4 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages 8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages 8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages For example When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode the appropriate L counter SP8076 Oxx increments Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F counter SP 8073 Interrupted jobs paper jam etc are counted even though they do not finish If ajob is paused and re started it counts as one job If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job then the job is counted at the time the error occurs For copy jobs SP 8072 and scan jobs SP 8075 the total is calculated by multiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned One duplex page counts as 2 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of pages of the copy job SP 8072 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen the page is T FAX TX Jobs 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs
392. lace the PCU s Replace the laser optics housing unit Shutter sensor time over error Close Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The shutter close sensor does not detect ON for 2000msec after the shutter motor turns on Defective shutter close sensor Disconnected or broken harness Defective shutter motor Defective shutter Shutter motor overload Defective IOB Check or replace the harness Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit Replace the shutter motor Replace the shutter close sensor Replace the IOB Shutter overrun error 1 Close overrun error 1 Close The shutter close sensor loses the ON signal after the shutter was closed 225 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective motor Change of load to shutter motor Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit Details poc D Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Shutter overrun error 2 Close overrun error 2 Close The shutter close sensor detects The shutter close sensor detects ON after SC 291 has occurred after SC 291 has occurred Defective motor Change of load to shutter motor Replace the shutter on the laser optics housing unit No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Shutter sensor time over error Open The shutter open sensor does not detect ON for
393. lack and white prints reaches the value ofl SP 2907 003 The belt moves away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any error except a power failure The image transfer belt contact sensor D detects if the image transfer belt contacts the color PCUs m fa power failure occurs when the image transfer belt is in contact with the drums the belt stays in this position If you want to remove the image transfer belt unit while the power is still off you must release the belt To do this swing out the controller 786 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 box Then turn the drive gear B manually Transfer Belt Sensor The ITB contact sensor D operates as the detection sensor during machine initialization and also as the position sensor during machine operations Before machine initialization the left side of the image transfer belt is in the home position When initialization starts the ITB contact motor lowers the left side until the actuator has passed the sensor Then ITB contact motor lifts up the left side to its home position This action actuates the sensor in a certain pattern The table lists the sensor actuation patterns Machine status Sensor pattern Initialization On gt Off gt On gt Off On Standby Default Color Printing On The actuator is out of the sensor Off The actuator is interrupting the sensor 187 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer and Sep
394. lay the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0 to 10 8 851 11 0 to 2 BK 8 851 31 5 to 7 BK Coverage Count 0 to 9999999 0 1 11 2096 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 1196 to 20 668 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Coverage Count 0 to 9999999 0 1 21 30 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 21 to 30 Coverage Count eam 0 to 9999999 0 1 b These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 3196 or higher Printing PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 Present Ink These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each color 669 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Printing PGS Log Latest 1 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each color Printing PGS Log Latest 2 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color Coverage Count Total 0 to 9999999 0 1 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color 670 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 wem vw E um ew _ 0 NN sere f meom crm Machine Status 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in e
395. le Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly Defective HDD A Defective controller 1 Replace the HDD 2 Replace the controller HDD CRC error Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD data transmission fails Defective HDD 1 Replace the HDD Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures D HDD Access error CTL An error is detected while operating the HDD Defective HDD Replace the HDD Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures SD card authentication error CTL A correct license is not found in the SD card B SD card data is corrupted 1 Store correct data in the SD card 274 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot Install the SD card 2 Turn the main switch off and on Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures SD card access error 13 to 3 File system error Other number Device error CTL An error report is sent from the SD card reader D An error is detected in the SD card Fora file system error format the SD card on your PC For a device error turn the mains switch off and on Replace the SD card Replace the controller Details
396. lifted down Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn off after the jogger fence has moved from its home position R3 R5 Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn on after the jogger fence has returned to its home position Shift roller HP sensor does not turn off after the shift roller has moved from its home position R1 R2 Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on after the shift roller has returned to its home position Stapler HP sensor does not turn off after the stapler has moved from its home position R3 R5 Stapler HP sensor does not turn on after the stapler has returned to its home position Stack feed out belt HP sensor does not turn off after the stack feed out belt has moved from its home position R3 R5 Stack feed out belt HP sensor does not turn on after the stack feed out belt has returned to its home 298 Troubleshooting 7504 130 7504 131 7504 132 7504 133 7504 134 7504 135 7504 136 7504 137 Finisher Entrance B793 Finisher Proof Exit B793 Finisher Shift Tray Exit B793 Finisher Staple Exit B793 Finisher Exit B793 Finisher Folding B793 Finisher Folding Exit B793 Finisher Guide Motor B793 Entrance sensor does not detect paper after Paper does not reach to the proof tray exit sensor or stay at the proof tray exit Sensor Paper does not reach to the shift tray exit sensor or stay at the shift tray exit Sensor Fold unit en
397. ling Another Language cccccseccececeeeceeceseceeeceecceeseeesaeesaeecuesauesueeseeesenseenss 720 Handling Firmware Update Errors ccccccceccseceseceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeseeeseeeeeesaeeseeeseeeaeeees 122 SG lon eR 725 eu 725 MOVO eS Cesc ea E 726 Ware le d ic esc bse T 726 Controller Self DiaQnoOStiCs ccccccccsscceecccseeceeeeeueeceecaueseusecaeecageseueeseesseeseusesseesaaes 728 VEV 728 Detailed self diagnostics orto rr etii oett quse Roe ue te RAE SERT S pecus iE Robes Ente d aS 729 Using the Debug Log ccccccceccsecceeeceeeceeceueceeceecceeceeesaeeceecuesauecueeseeesaeseenseeeseeeaeees 730 Switching ON and Setting UP Save Debug Log ccccec cece cece eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 730 Retrieving the Debug Log from the HDD rareranernnrrnnrrvnnrnrernrarevnnennnrnnnnennnnnnannnanennn 134 Recording Errors Manually cccccccceecceccceeeeeeee esse cess eeeeeseeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeseeessesaeeteeees 134 New Debug Log COdes ccccccecccsecccseeceeeee cece eeceeseueeseeeseeeseueesueeseeessueeseeesaeeseeeaees 735 DID WIDEO 9 RT T m 137 Cole BAL EM S 737 Xi B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 DICU BI 137 6 Detailed Section Descriptio
398. ll Paper full 679 5803 73 Bridge Relay Sensor Paper detected Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5803 76 Bridge Exit Cover Detection 5803 77 Bridge Relay Cover Detection Paper not detected 5803 78 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 80 Duplex Open Close Detection Paper not 5803 83 1 Bin Tray Sensor Paper detected detected 5803 79 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected Paper not detected 5803 85 Shift Tray Set Detection Set Stay at Rear Stay at Front 5803 86 Shift Tray Control Sensor moving from rear moving from 5803 84 1 Bin Tray Relay Sensor Paper detected to front front to rear Bank SEF Vertical transport sensor 1 Paper not 5803 87 Paper detected Relay sensor Sensor3 detected Bank SEF Vertical transport sensor 2 Paper not 5803 88 Paper detected Sensor4 detected Paper not 5803 89 Bank Feed Sensor 3 Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 90 Bank Feed Sensor 4 Paper detected detected 5803 91 Bank Relay Cover Detection Close LD5V Open ON LD5V OFF 5803 94 GAVD Open Close Detection 680 Service Tables 9803 95 21 Apr 2006 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP 9803 200 9803 201 i A 6138 10 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher B793 Interference Escape Sensor Stapler Safety Sensor Staple Moving HP Sensor Staple Unit HP Sensor Stuck Relay1 Release HP Sensor Stopper S HP Sensor Exit
399. llation 21 Apr 2006 1 Bin Tray Unit B790 Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list 3 Screws M3 x 8 3 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure If the bridge unit B227 has already been installed in the machine remove it before installing 1 bin tray unit B790 This will make it easier for you to do the following procedure 29 Installation 21 Apr 2006 1 Remove all tapes 2 Open the duplex unit at the right side of the machine 3 Remove the front right cover A x 1 4 Remove the cover B 5 Remove the tray C 6 Remove the paper exit unit D E x 1 1 Install the 1 bin tray unit E x 1 C9 x 1 30 Installation 21 Apr 2006 2 Attach the tray support bar F to the tray G as shown and then attach the end fence H Install the tray G with the tray support bar in the machine 4 Reinstall the front right cover in the machine and then close the right door of the machine Turn on the main power switch of the machine Check the 1 bin tray unit operation 31 Installation Shift Tray Unit B791 Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list 21 Apr 2006 32 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the copier powe
400. lt ES EN EN e E ES EN e Ex EN Specifications 21 Apr 2006 500 sheet finisher Monarch 3 075 x Env 7 5 114 x 162 mm 162 x 229 mm 110 x 220 mm Remarks Size width x length mm A3 297 x 420 L B4 257 x 364 L A4 210 x 297 L A4 297 x 210 S B5 182 x 257 L 853 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 8 5 x 13 F4 po yes y yo 8 5 x 11 LT y ys y yrs 11 x 8 5 LT yr Y yr Y 8K 267 x 390 me NOS ys 16K L 195 x 267 BENE ys y 16K S 267 x 195 me Y y 7 25 x 10 5 y Executive 10 5 x 7 25 Y Executive 1 Use SP4 303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise HLT when the message Can t 854 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 detect original size shows 2 The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6 016 1 3 The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP4 305 1 4 The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP5 126 1 855 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 software Accessories The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD ROMs 1 Printer Drivers and Utilities CD ROM 2 Scanner PostScript Drivers and Utilities CD ROM An auto run installer lets you to select the components you want to install Printer Drivers Printer Windows Windows Windows Language 95 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP 2003 Yes Yes Yes The PCL5c 6 and RPCS drivers are provide
401. ly adjusted during process control therefore adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control SP3 041 001 Default ON is activated After deactivating Process Control with SP3 041 001 the values in these SP 365 Service Tables 001 Plain Bk 002 Plain M 003 Plain C 004 Plain Y 005 Thick 1 Bk 006 Thick 1 M 007 Thick 1 C 008 Thick 1 Y 009 Thick 2 Bk 010 Thick 2 M 011 Thick 2 C 012 Thick 2 Y 013 Fine Bk 014 Fine M 015 Fine C 016 Fine Y 001 Temperature 002 Relative Humidity 003 Absolute Humidity 3 O Q D o D c o D o m o 3 S 5 Q Temperature Humidity Display 0 to 100 0 01 g m 0 to 700 550 10 V step Displays the environment temperature and humidity 128 to 127 0 1 C step O to 100 0 1 RH step step 21 Apr 2006 366 Service Tables Forced Setting Absolute Humidity Threshold 1 Absolute Humidity Threshold 2 Absolute Humidity Threshold 3 Absolute Humidity Threshold 4 Paper Size Correction 2308 ENG ENG ENG ENG ENG 21 Apr 2006 Environmental Correction Transfer Environmental Correction Image Transfer Belt Unit Sets the environment condition manually 0 to 5 0 1 step 0 Automatic environment control 1 LL Low temperature Low humidity 2 ML Middle temperature Low humidity 3 MM Middle
402. m 21 7 x 19 3 x 4 7 Weight 10 kg 22 Ib 862 Specifications Paper Feed Unit Paper Feed System Paper Height Detection Capacity Paper Weight Paper Size Power Source Power Consumption Dimensions W x D x H Weight Large Capacity Tray Paper Size Paper Weight Tray Capacity Remaining Paper Detection Power Source Power Consumption Weight size W x D x Hy 21 Apr 2006 5 steps 100 70 30 10 Near end and Empty 500 sheets x 2 trays 60 to 169 g m 16 to 45 Ib A3 SEF to A5 DLT SEF to HLT DC 24V 5V from the main frame Less than 50 W Max Less than 35 W Ave 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm 22 8 x 24 4 x 10 2 25 kg 33 Ib A4 LEF LT LEF 60 g m to 169 g m 16 Ib to 45 Ib 2 000 sheets 80 g m 20Ib 5 steps 100 67 32 6 Empty Right Tray DC 24 V 5 V from copier printer 50 W Max 30 W Ave 25 kg 55 Ib 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm 22 8 x 24 4 x 10 2 863 Specifications 21 Apr 2006 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher amp Punch Unit Paper Weight Tray Capacity Staple capacity Staple position Print Paper Size No punch mode A3 11 x 17 to A5 8 5 x 5 5 LEF Punch mode 2 holes A3 11 x 17 to B6 5 5 x 8 5 SEF or A4 8 5 x 11 to A5 8 5 x 5 5 LEF 3 holes A3 B4 11 x 17 SEF or A4 B5 8 5 x 11 LEF 4 holes Europe A3 B4 11 x 17 SEF or A4 B5 8 5 x 11 LEF 4 holes
403. m Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures security function is set ON with the initial setting A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set ON with the initial setting Incorrect installation of the copy data security board Defective copy data security board 1 Reinstall the copy data security board Replace the copy data security board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Serial Number Mismatch 0 Number Mismatch Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code NVRAM defective BICU replaced without original NVRAM 1 Check the serial number with SP5 811 002 2 Ifthe stored serial number is incorrect contact your supervisor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Polygon motor error 1 ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the specified time after turning on or changing speed Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor Replace the polygon motor Replace the laser optics housing unit Replace the harness Replace the BICU 219 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures l Polygon motor error 2 OFF timeout The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3 seconds after the polygo
404. mage Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit arrrnnrnnnrnnnnrranennnnraneranennnnrnannnanennnennnnnnnnennsnnnn 139 Med TRAINS ICN BEE avis oree esceces m 140 PATENT 145 Paper Transfer Roller Unit rrrrnrannnnnarnnnrnanerannnnrnnnenunenannnernnnrnanernsnnuennnenunenunnneennnene 145 PATNA 145 DSB DN 148 BE EEE EEE 150 DINE UM EI p RR ads 151 FET 151 PROC Eides ea MOTOT gc 154 PAN 154 Drum Development Motor K rrnrenarenanerannrnrvnnrnnnevannnnennnennnenunnnennnernnnennsenuennsennnennnen 155 ENN 156 FP i i Exit MOTOL RR 156 viii B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Belt Contact MOtor c cccccccccceececeeeseeeceeeeeeeeseeeeseeseeeseeesaueeseeeaes 157 Paper Transfer Contact Motor rrrarnnnrnnnrrnnernnnnnrnnnennnnnnennnenanenunnnernnnennsenuennnennsennsene 157 Duplex MVCN RE M CUM MM UI I IMMUNE UNO 158 Toner Transport NO see 158 TOMER NTN 159 Paper Feed OG 0 g EE 159 TA 01 01 00 Og REE EE EEE 161 Development Moor MIO Y rsrsrs keen 161 Development Clutch K rrrrrrarenarrnnrrnnrnarevanerernnnrranenasnnnennnenanenunnnennneennsenusnnnennnenunene 162 E SUNG cre TE A 163 30 0 1 e 163 Fusing Belt Pressure Roller FUSING Lamps rrarrnnnnnrnarnannnernarnnnnnarnnnnnnnneennnnnsnnene 164 Heating Fusing and Tension Roller arrrarrrurvnrrrnrrrnrrnn
405. magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and PCU for damage Check the drawer connector Replace the defective PCU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures TD sensor Vt high error 2 K TD sensor Vt high error 2 M TD sensor Vt high error 2 C TD sensor Vt high error 2 Y The Vt value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3020 004 default 0 5V for 10 counts TD sensor harness disconnected loose defective A drawer connector disconnected loose defective TD sensor defective Check the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and PCU for damage Check the drawer connector Replace the defective PCU 229 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 During TD sensor initialization the output value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified value with SP3238 001 to 004 default 2 7V 0 2V Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack TD harness sensor disconnected loose or defective TD sensor defective Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected defective Remove the heat seal from each PCU Replace the defective PCU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Drum gear position sensor error The machine does not detect the drum p
406. matting Job Log HDD Formatting Printer Fonts 962 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 HDD Formatting User Info 007 Mail RX Data 008 Mail TX Data HDD Formatting Data for a Design 010 HDD Formatting Log HDD Formatting Ridoc I F Capture Settings Capture Function 0 Off 1 On 0 Disable 1 Enable With this function disabled the settings related to the capture feature cannot be initialized displayed or selected Displays or does not display the capture function buttons 5836 71 to 5836 78 Copier and Printer Document Reduction The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 071 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 072 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 073 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 075 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 076 0 1to 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 963 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Reduction for Printer Color 1200 1 1 2 3 1 4 4 1 6 5 1 8 2 skipped 077 078 Reduction for Printer B amp W 1200 1 1 2 3 1 4 4 1 6 5 1 8 2 skipped 5836 81 to 5836 86 Stored document format The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent to the document management server via the MLB Enabled only when optional MLB Media Link Board is installed 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF M
407. ment Both motors are brush less DC motors This helps to reduce the drive noise Phase Control Mechanism The machine uses the drum gear position sensors to detect if the drum motors rotate SC380 shows when it detects that the drum motor is not moving These sensors also help the machine to initialize the relative positions of the gears when the main switch is turned on and during initializing This prevents phase fluctuation between printouts that is caused by incorrect gear meshing at the start of the job There is an interrupter on each of the black C and magenta D drum gears The drum gear position sensors E F detect the positions of these interrupters This mechanism makes sure that output quality does not vary The cyan and yellow drum gears operate with the magenta drum gear because these three drum gears are linked through other gears In the ready status if the gears are not in the correct position the machine adjusts the position of the black drum gear The relative positions of the gears are adjusted every 30 jobs 769 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Drum Charge and Quenching This machine uses a non contact charge roller A to reduce ozone The non contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge The high voltage supply board C B which is located at the rear of the machine applies a dc and ac voltage at a constant current to the roller The ac voltage helps to ensure that the cha
408. ment procedure only for one unit If you need to replace another unit do the same as this procedure Put some sheets of paper on the floor before doing this procedure Toner may fall on the floor 131 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 ETE 1 Front door Rear Cover 2 Image transfer belt unit Image Transfer Belt 3 All PCUs W PCU 4 Puta sheet of paper A3 DLT inside the machine as shown and on the floor The sheet of paper on the floor is used in a later step 5 Release the harness A from the clamp a X 1 for YCM x 3 for K and hook and then disconnect the harness Avoid touching these spring terminals B 6 Release the toner supply tube C 132 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Make sure that a sheet of paper is attached to the frame of the rear side and covers the four gears The picture on the left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set but the picture on the right shows a sheet of paper that is not correctly set This sheet of paper prevents toner and screws from falling into the laser optics housing unit through cutouts 8 Slowly remove the toner supply tube E from the toner pump unit by pulling the tube right and left 133 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 9 Turn up the openings of the toner pump unit and toner supply tube just after removing the tube If not the toner may scatter away and fall down 10 Put the
409. menu Save the calibration settings 118 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Laser Optics A WARNING Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section Laser beams can cause serious eye injury Caution Decal Location Caution decals are placed as shown below CAUTION CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit This copier uses a class Illb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and an output of 7 mW The laser can cause serious eye injury Laser Optics Housing Unit A CAUTION Before installing a new laser optics housing unit remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit 4 Anew laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units When you replace the laser optics housing unit use caution 5 119 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Preparing the new laser optics housing unit 1 Polygon motor cover B of the laser optics housing unit F x 4 Sponge padding C Tag D Reinstall the polygon motor cover B E a 2S o Before removing the old laser optics housing unit Do the following settings before removing the laser
410. mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st oide Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2501 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DU Thick 1 ig 10 to 250 100 5 step 77 mm s 1st Side 399 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st Side Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side Thick 1 MH Thick 1 Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2502 and SP250 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 110 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2501 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side 400 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Thick 1 HH Thick 1 Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2502 and SP25
411. mmunication is established but the wireless LAN board is detected 1 Check the connection Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Wireless LAN Bluetooth card error An error is detected in the wireless LAN Bluetooth card CTL B Loose connection Defective wireless LAN Bluetooth card Check the connection Replace the wireless LAN Bluetooth card Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CTL USB interface error B The USB interface cannot be used due to a driver error Defective USB driver 2 2 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures ER Check the connection 2 Replace the USB board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures d HDD Initialization error The controller detects that the hard disk fails HDD not initialized Defective HDD 1 Reformat the HDD 2 Replace the HDD Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Reboot error The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is supplied to the HDD Loose connection Defective cables Defective HDD Defective controller Check the connection between the HDD and controller Check and replace the cables Replace the HDD Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures HDD Read error 2 3 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possib
412. mp unit Vt error minimum error is development unit Vt maximum error and detected an image is O K Replace the development unit 204 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Replace the IOB board Vt minimum error Replace the development unit Replace the IOB board Solid image is not sufficient density Retry the process control Replace the ID sensors Replace the IOB board ID sensor 53 coefficient K5 detection error Not enough data Solid image is O K can be sampled Replace the ID sensors Replace the IOB board ID sensor is dirty Clean the ID sensors Retry the process control When the K5 is more than the D sensor pattern ID sensor value of density is too coefficient K5 SP3 362 003 or high or low maximum less than the value 2 ID sensor or minimum error of SP3 362 004 shutter is the error 54 is defective 54 Same as 53 displayed 205 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 1 ID sensor pattern Gamma is out of density is too Gamma error 55 range 5 0 lt high Maximum Same as 53 Gamma Hardware defective ID sensor pattern Gamma is out of density is too Same as 53 Gamma error 56 _ range low Replace the toner Minimum Gamma lt 0 15 Hardware supply pump unit defective ID sensor pattern density is too Vk error Vk is out of range 57 low Maximum 150 lt Vk Same as 53 Hardware defective ID se
413. mple above shows error E24 displayed For details refer to the Error Message Table W Handling Firmware Update Errors Firmware Update Error If a firmware update error occurs this means the update was cancelled during the update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card 715 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SDcard gt ROM Reboot after card insert E82 BLC2 eplot Card No 1 1 Recovery after Power Loss If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason then in order to ensure the correct operation of the machine the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated successfully In this case insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download automatically from the card without the menu display Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel Do the following procedure to update the LCDC LCD Control Board De eT UD aS eS de ues 10 Turn the copier main switch off Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3 Switch the copier main switch on The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds Touch Ope Panel xx xx differs depending on the destination Touch UpDate or to start the update Dow
414. ms fe a ms fr mo fe LL mn fee me fre _ 657 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 851413 BM Links Japan Only mm fe SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application Print jobs output to the document server are not counted T PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications C PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application F PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax application NOTE Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available P PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application S PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application L PrtPGS FIN 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 658 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 8 52x 3 Staple 8 52x 4 Booklet Z Fold 8 52x 6 Punch Other f stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling the u
415. n both sides simultaneously the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear side scanning When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1 fajam occurs during the job recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting Also the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is scan PGS Mode 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to output determine the work load on the ADF Selectable Large copy jobs that cannot be 8 231 1 Large Volume loaded in the ADF at one time Selectable Feeding pages one by one through the ADF 8 231 2 SADF 642 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Selectable Select Mixed Sizes on the operation 8 231 3 Mixed Size panel 8 2314 Selectable Originals of non standard size Book mode Raising the ADF and placing the 8 231 5 Platen _ original directly on the platen fthe scan mode is changed during the job for example if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode the count is done for the last selected mode The user cannot select mixed sizes or non standard sizes with the fax application so if the original s page sizes are mixed or non standard these are not counted If the user selects
416. n exists Displays the common name of the NRS certification subject CN the following 17 bytes 090 CERT Subject Spaces are displayed as underscores Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists Displays serial number for the NRS certification Asterisks indicate that no DESS exists 091 CERT Serial Number Displays the common name of the issuer of the 092 CERT Issuer NRS certification CN the following 30 bytes Asteriskes indicate that no DESS exists Displays the start time of the period for which the 093 CERT Valid Start current NRS certification is enabled Displays the end time of the period for which the 094 CERT Valid End current NRS certification is enabled Selection Country Select from the list the name of the country where Cumin M is installed in the 150 machine After selecting the country you must also set the following SP codes for Cumin M SP5816 153 SP5816 154 553 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SP5816 161 0 Japan 1 USA 2 Canada 3 UK 4 Germany 5 France 6 Italy 7 Netherlands 8 Belgium 9 Luxembourg 10 Spain Line Type Authentication Judgment Touch Execute Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where Cumin M is connected as either dial up or push type so Cumin M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to the outside line The current progress success or failure of this execution can be displayed with S
417. n motor switches off Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor Check or replace the harness Replace the polygon motor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures l Polygon motor error 3 XSCRDY signal error The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH inactive while the laser diode is firing Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board Defective polygon motor Defective polygon motor driver board Check or replace the harness Replace the polygon motor EET femmes ENT emnene The laser synchronizing detection signal for the end position of LDB K Y M C is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on 220 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures am when detecting the main scan magnification Disconnected or defective harness to synchronizing detector for end position Defective synchronizing detector board Defective LD board or driver Defective BICU Replace the harness of the LD board Replace the laser optics housing unit Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Laser synchronizing detection error start position K Laser synchronizing detection error start position Y Laser synchronizing detection error start position M Laser synchronizing detection error start p
418. n service the machine and turn the machine off and on It is not necessary 314 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on 2 Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to 1 if you must use the printer bit switches 3 After machine servicing is completed Change SP5169 from 1 to 0 Turn the machine off and on Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the machine The Administrator will then set the Service Mode Lock to ON Remarks Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters For this reason some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters Paper Type Paper Feed Station N Normal paper MTH Middle thick paper TH Thick paper P Paper tray B By pass table Color Mode Color K Black in B amp W mode Y M or C Yellow Magenta or Cyan in Full Color mode YMC Only for Yellow Magenta and Cyan FC Full Color mode FC K FC Y FC M or FC C Black Yellow Magenta or Cyan in full color mode Process Speed Print Mode L Low speed 77 mm s S Simplex M Middle speed Not used in this machine D Duplex H High speed 138 mm s Others The following symbols are used
419. n the first digit so the eight digit setting for 2 or 3 becomes a seven digit setting 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month 1 to 5 Ath digit The day of the week 0 to 6 Sunday to Saturday oth and 6th digits The hour 00 to 23 fth digit The length of the advanced time 0 to9 1 hour step 8th digit The length of the advanced time 0 to 5 10 minutes step For example 3500010 EU default The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0 00 on the 5th Sunday in March he digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 wee Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode There are 8 digits in this SP 1st and 2nd digits The month 1 to 12 3rd digit The week of the month 0 to 5 Ath digit The day of the week 0 to 7 Sunday to Saturday oth and 6th digits The hour 00 to 23 The 7th and 8 digits must be set to 00 he digits are counted from the left Make sure that SP5 307 1 is set to 1 Access Control When installing the SDK application SAS VAS adjusts the following settings DFU This ID is overwritten by SAS VAS when 200 SDK1 Unique ID mE you install or uninstall the SDK application SDK1 Certification 0 to 255 0 1 step Method 538 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 220 SDK2 Certification Method SDK3 Certification Method 0 to 255 0 1
420. nables or disables the E mail alert 001 Report Validity function 0 or 1 0 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail 005 Add Date Field CTL Oor1 0 0 Not added 1 Added 5870 Common Key Info Writing Writes to flash ROM the common proof for 001 Writing CTL validating the device for NRS specifications 5873 SD Card Appli Move This SP copies the application programs from the original SD card in SD card slot 3 to an SD card in 001 Move Exec m SD card slot 1 or 2 slot 1 has the priority to be copied This SP copies back the application programs from an SD card in SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD card in SD card slot 1 or 2 slot 1 has the priority to 002 Undo Exec be copied Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec SP5873 1 5875 SC Auto Reboot 580 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Enables or disables the automatic reboot function when an SC error occurs 0 or 1 0 0 The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues an SC error and 001 Reboot Setting logs the SC error code If the same SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 1 The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs The reboot is not executed for Type Aor C SC codes Selects the reboot method for SC 002 Reboot Type CTL 00r 1 0 0 Manual reboot 1 Automatic reboot 5878 IOpionseu
421. nae E E IM MEUSE MEUM UM EPI 315 ele NN 317 B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 Service Mode Table RERO 317 MPaLCHECK TADIG EE EEE A A aae 676 Mule hr 689 TEST Patern FN Je 701 Printer Service MOG RENE A em 704 SP1 XXX Service Mode ccccceccccescccsececeseeceuceceucecsuceccueeceseeeceeeeseeeessuseseeeesseeeseas 704 Scanner Service Mode ccccccecccescccececaeecceccceeecseecaeeececesseesoeesseeeseaeseeeseueesseeseeessees 708 SP1 XXX System and Others esses enne nennen nnne nnns 708 SP2 XXX Scanning image QUAIItY cece eee ceeecceeeceeeeeeeeee cece eeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeaaeees 708 Reboot System Setting Reset rrrrrnraronanennnrrnanevanrnnnrnnnrnnannnnnennnnnnnnnanennnrnnennnnnennnennn 710 SOIBVATO GE EEE 710 System Settings And Copy Setting Reset rrrrnrnrarannnrnrarnnanernnrnnnrrnanrnnrnnannnanennnnn 710 FY AG EEE EE 712 Type of FAN ee 712 PETE YOU Be 713 Vee ke EEE ENE 714 Updating the LCDC for the Operation Panel rrrarrrarnnnrnnnenarenannnernnnrvnnrnnnnnnennnenunenn 716 Downloading Stamp Data ccccccccccccceecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeseeeeseeeseessueeseeesaeeseeeaees 717 NVRAM Data Upload Download rrrrrnnonnnnnnrnnnennnenannnernnnrnnnernnnnnennnennnenunnnernnnennsennsnne 717 Address Book Upload Download cccecceeeteeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseteeeteeeeeetaeeees 719 Instal
422. ndicates the tray number 822 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The by pass feed table cannot be unlocked Tray Locking is always enabled Manual Tray Select If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper Auto Continue Overview When this function is enabled the machine waits for a specified period 0 1 5 10 15 minutes for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray If the timer runs out the machine starts printing even if there is no paper tray which matches the paper size and paper type specified by the driver The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way The interval can be set with the following menu gt Printer Features gt System gt Auto Continue MP The default setting for this feature is Off Auto Tray Select Priority Tray lt ___ Start of Tray Search LCT Optional Tray 3 Optional Tray 4 Optional When there is no paper tray that matches the paper size and type specified by the driver the machine searches for any tray that has paper and prints from the first tray it finds The start of the tray search is the tray selected as the priority tray Manual Tray Select The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do not match the setting specified from the driver If Auto Continue is disabled
423. nds when charging the drum or development High voltage leak Broken harness Defective drum unit or development unit Defective high voltage supply unit Check or replace the harness Replace the drum unit or paper transfer unit Replace the high voltage supply unit High voltage power Image transfer paper transfer bias output error An error signal is detected for 0 2 seconds when charging the separation image transfer bet or paper transfer roller High voltage leak Broken harness Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit Defective high voltage supply unit Check or replace the harness Replace the image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit Replace the high voltage supply unit The thermistor output of the humidity sensor was not within the 234 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Eo Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures prescribed range prescribed range 001V t0 24V 01V to 2 4V Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected loose defective Temperature and humidity sensor defective 1 Check the connector and harness 2 Replace the temperature humidity sensor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures EM Paper Tray 1 error E Paper Tray 2 error When the tray lift motor is turned on if the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds the machine asks the user to reset the tray If this condi
424. ne automatically if one of these conditions occurs a AT is greater than or equal to Temperature Threshold SP3 522 003 10 C b ARH is greater than or equal to Relative Humidity Threshold SP3 522 004 50 RH Cc AAH is greater than or equal to Absolute Humidity Threshold SP3 522 005 6 g m d If the following conditions both occur BW Counter SP3 510 003 is greater than or equal to Execution Interval SP3 511 005 OR FC Counter SP3 510 004 is greater than or equal to Execution Interval SP3 511 006 Non use Time is greater than or equal to SP3522 002 default 6 hours Interval Job End This starts automatically at the end of a print job if the following condition occurs BW Counter SP3 510 001 is greater than or equal to Execution Interval SP3 515 001 OR FC Counter SP3 510 002 is greater than or equal to Execution Interval SP3 515 002 Interval During a Job This interrupts printing and then starts automatically if the following condition occurs BW Counter SP3 510 001 is greater than or equal to Execution Interval SP3 515 003 OR FC Counter SP3 510 002 is greater than or equal to Execution Interval SP3 515 004 After process control is completed the machine continues to make prints In standby mode This is done automatically if one of these conditions occurs a AT is greater than or equal to Temperature Threshold SP3 531 002 10 C b ARH is greater than or equal to Relative Humidity
425. ned into the document server C Scan PGS LS CTL 0 to 9999999 0 1 F Scan PGS LS The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode S Scan PGS LS screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode L Scan PGS LS CTL screen Reading user stamp data is not counted Ifa job is cancelled the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted fthe scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet the S count is 4 f pages are copied but not stored on the document server these counters do not change If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server the C count is 6 and the L count is 6 641 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 f you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages the L count is 6 ADF Org Feeds 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning Number of front sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex front side scanning The front side is determined by which side the user loads face up Number of rear sides fed for scanning With an ADF that can sca
426. ner Name Setting Yellow Toner Name Setting 566 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 GWWS Analysis Mode DFU Analysis Mode DFU Default 00000000 do not change Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the 001 Setting 1 CTL document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software Adjusts the debug program modesetting Bit7 5682 mmseg log setting 002 Setting 2 CTL 0 Date Hour Minute Second 1 Minute Second Msec 0 to 6 Not used 0x01 Full speed 0x04 Auto Change Adjusts the USB transfer rate 002 Vendor ID CTL Displays the vendor ID DFU 003 Product ID Displays the product ID DFU Displays the development release version 004 Device Release Number CTL Transfer Rate number DFU 567 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5845 001 002 006 008 009 010 Delivery Server CTL Setting Provides items for delivery server settings FTP Port No 0 to 65535 3670 1 step Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server IP Address Primary Range 000 000 000 000 to 255 255 255 255 Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address The IP address under the transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting Delivery Error Display Time 0 to 999 300 1 second step Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application
427. ng device Check the connection Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures MF accounting device error 3 The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates a backup RAM error has occurred Defective controller of the MF accounting device Battery error Turn the main switch off and on Replace the controller board of the accounting device Replace the battery Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures J MF accounting device error 4 The accounting device sends the controller the report that indicates the battery voltage error has occurred Defective controller of the MF accounting device Battery error Turn the main switch off and on Replace the controller board of the accounting device Replace the battery 250 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CTL Communication error of the remote service modem Cumin M Authentication error The authentication for the Cumin M fails at a dial up connection Incorrect SP settings Disconnected telephone line Disconnected modem board Check and set the correct user name SP5816 156 and password SP5816 157 The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective communication line or defective connection 251 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 O reremenna noaa women o ame O 1 Install the modem board mE 2 Check and res
428. ng roller When the low temperature condition specified with SP1112 001 is detected the value of this SP is added to the heating roller temperature High Temp Correction 0 to 15 5 1 C step opecifies the temperature correction for the heating roller When the high temperature condition specified with SP1112 002 is detected the value of this SP is subtracted from the heating roller temperature Stand by Time After Ready 0 to 60 10 1 sec step opecifies the interval from the ready mode to the stand by mode If the machine does not do any printing job for the time specified with this SP after the heating roller has reached the ready temperature the machine returns to the stand by mode Recovery Target Temp 0 to 60 10 1 sec step Not used After Recovery 0 to 60 10 1 sec step Specifies the interval from the recovery to the stand by mode If the machine does not do any printing job for the time specified with this SP after the machine has recovered from the energy save mode it returns to the stand by mode 325 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 First Print Correction Correction Temp 0 to 30 10 1 C step Specifies the additional temperature for the first print job This temperature is added to the heating roller for the time specified with SP1114 002 Operation Time 0 to 60 2 1 sec step opecifies the time for adding the first print additional temperature which is specified with SP1
429. nloading starts after about 9 seconds The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0 5 s intervals when the data is downloading The same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals when the update is finished Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card Then switch the copier on 716 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Downloading Stamp Data The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times After the hard disks have been replaced The print data contains the controller software Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Select SP5853 and then press EXECUTE The following screen opens while the stamp data is downloading SDcard gt ROM Stamp Data The download is finished when the message prompts you to close Completed You have to reboot NOTE Automatic reset in some cases 3 Pressthe Exit button Then turn the copier off and on again NVRAM Data Upload Download Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card ET This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked 1 Do SP5990 001 SMC Print before you switch the machine off You will need a record of the NVRAM sett
430. nner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail 10 Screw the drive pulley to the shaft R 11 Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail S 12 Install the scanner wire clamp T 13 Pull out the positioning pins Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the m positioning pins Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not 116 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Rear Scanner Wire Reinstalling the Rear Scanner Wire 1 Position the center ball A in the middle of the forked holder 2 Pass the left end with the ball B through the drive pulley notch Pass the right end with the ring C through the drive pulley hole 3 Wind the left end B clockwise shown from the machine s front five times Wind the right end C counterclockwise three times The two red marks D come together when you do this Attach the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation 4 Install the drive pulley on the shaft Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time 5 Install the wire he winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front This must show as a mirror image Example At the front of the machine the side of the drive pulley with the three windings must face the front of the machine At the rear of the machine it
431. nnns nnns 29 MT UB e A 32 ETEN dq 32 Tekst Leie FOC COG MEET 33 PE UP 35 COO EC OC it orrsictorsetrancconscd anaa tia rtnereeasanans nein een cnceet nav ene mec nesuenenaenniotian 35 NOR POE M Rom m 35 500 Sh et Finisher B792 uctor te Grameen benene 38 ee se MO IIo MN NR Em 38 NAPP NO TT 39 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 sees 42 PECES A acie NNI EIN TEES 42 Installation Procedure esssssssssssssseessennenne nnne nnne nne nnne nnne nnns nnns 43 1000 Sheet Booklet Finisher B793 cccccccsececseeeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeeneeeesees 45 PCC se IC Caer acre eset soda E 45 Installation Procedure cccccceccseecseeceeeceecauecesecsecceeceuesauecueecuesauecaeeseeeseeseesseeeseeenaes 46 PN AIIM PH 49 Component CIBC Re usn cau uid Fame cancer ROME m NN ERE DPRCC IM M EDE EID EM QNM CM MERE 49 inclu M e R o0 Mechanical Counter NA Only eeesssessseeseeeee nennen nennen nennen nennen nna nn nns 55 Installation Procedure cccccceccseccseecececeecaueceeecsecceeceuesaeeseeecuesauesaeeseeeseeseeeseeesaeeaaes 55 Key omme BAK sars 56 installation PG ME 56 Key Counter Interface Unit rrrarrnnnnnrarrranevnrrrnnnnranenanrnnnnnnanrnnnnnnanenanennnennasennnenanen
432. nnsnnnne 58 Installation Procedure rrrnrrnnrranrvarnrannnnrvnnrnanrnnannnennnennnnnannnennnrnnsennennuennsennnnannnssnnee 58 Anti Condensation Heater Scanner rrrnnnnnrnnarrnnnnrnnnrrnerernnnennanernnnenrnnennnsrnnnseennsnnnnnee 59 Installation PO ME 59 TAI 60 Installation Procedure rrrnrrnnrnanevannranrnnrvnnrnanrnnnnnnennnennnnnannnernnennarnnennaennsennnnnannnesnnee 60 EE 6 0 RTT T m 61 SEE 61 DEMME serrirtircisrsinsenie aaa aa SEN aE a 62 FO SUS GPS d 65 Pile On Mat CONVENE serae T T T 66 SE RR CM H 67 vi B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 125 200 O eae 69 IEEE 802 11b Wireless LAN ccccceccceeeceeeeeeeeseeeseeesesesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeesseeeeeeeseees 70 siye PE 13 Copy Data Securty EEE NE 74 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type D B735 rrrranannnnnnannnanennnrnnnnrnnnennnnranenanennnennnnnn 75 USB Host Interface rrrarrrnrnnnanenanernnrrnanrnnnrnnannnannnanennrnnannnanenanennnannanennnrnnunnnnnennnsnnnnen 79 PPT gene eet mere enn nee E 80 PDT UT 81 Check ME ONE ONS m EEEE SEDEER 82 2 Preventive Maintenance ccccceccecccececeecseceseceecceeceeecauecseecuecaueceeesaeeeaeseeesaeeseeegaes 83 cups T C
433. nrnnennnennnanennne 204 Line Position Adjustment Result c ccccecccscceeeseeeceeceeeseeesaeeceeseesaseceeesaeesaeseeesas 208 Cannel OSU IOS EEE EE ETE 209 VPU TOS Nr 209 BICU IPU Test Mode rrrannnnnnnnnoranennnrrnnnnnannnanennnnnnannnanennnnnnnnnnanennnennnnennnennennnnnennee 209 ETNE cxseessisecotui emissa ene nee esse nr er su om tee ee nee ee eee 211 SI 1 ANY Mc O 211 o eTe ee 215 Troubleshooting Guide rrrrrrranenanernnnrnanrvanennnnnnnnnnanenanennnnnnanennnnnnennnanenanennnsnnanennnennnnn 285 TAG OL oa e 285 Her 288 Jam BSC eg og EEE EE EE EE 295 P ADET JAM DISDIAY assitestisssuDutenerektrsvrvac avrei aussi dax exbebus tons Mx Punta cud Cows tend Rx LSU QS DN qutd 295 Jam Codes and Display Codes rarrrnnnnnnnenanennnnnnnnenanennnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnannnanennnennnsnnanennnennn 295 Electrical Component Defects rrarrrarenarerarvanevanerannrervnnrnanennsnnnrnanennsnnnennnenunenunnnennnenn 305 EIE ONS qose E NE 305 Blown Fuse Conditions essesssssssesssssssssseseen eee nennen nnne nnne nnns nnns 310 NENNE 311 SEP NE 311 Enabling and Disabling Service Program Mode r rurrnnnnnnrnnannranevnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnannnnnennn 311 Types Of SP Modes rrarrnannnnnnnnanenanennnnnnnnennnennnnnnnnnnanennnennanennnennnnnnnnnnnnennnsnnnsnnanennnnnnn 311 FIG ese iue MEA MEE M eg
434. ns rrrrrnrrrarerarerarnrernnnrrannrernnnrvnnerasnnuennnennnenunenunnneenneen 738 eu 738 COMMIT OU osc acters esc easiecicee hth sects sosciees ae onas nsession na seuntercanee te gecueectoonece ees 738 PP Nr 139 OVO TAY OU EEE EEE 740 FAT CS MEO cases ees mre seca Tm 741 mise TOC SS se sesso ose ote concen Em 143 POC SS CONTO EE EE EEE 745 NNN 745 POEMU CONTON E 745 Process Control Self Check Procedure ccccccccceecceececceceeeeeueeeceseeeesueeseeesseesaees 747 Toner Density Adjustment Mode cccccccceccseecaeece cece ees eeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeseesaeeeaees 749 Toner SUPPIy Control LuLnasmasnasmmenejesuinoseejadvsj vsjadnkunesatasvksdaseevsadvsinedd 749 Toner Near End Toner End Detection ccccccccecccececeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeaeeeseeeees 151 Developer IMIIANZ AN OM icissacacesacasucadiunnatnanssstiaisinanantanadancenevnbaaaasds wnedmeraienteutstdadmewyesbanesat 152 SN 153 NN 153 Scanner DEE ee reese et ene eee ee eee ee 754 Original SIZ DSC CU OM MEE UT 755 Anti Condensation Heater ccccccccceccscecececeeeceeeeceeeseueesaeeseeeseuseseeeseeessueeseeesaeeeaas 756 image Processing EEE T57 pu 157 SBU SEVU 157 IPU Image Processing Unit rrarrrnnrrnanevanenanrrnnnrnanrnnnnrannnnnnnanrnnannnanenasennnsnnanennnennn 758 Lacer dee ci I C
435. nsfer roller current for each paper size SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step S1 size 2 297 mm Paper width Paper Transfer 2nd Side S1 ENG Paper Transfer 1st Side 92 ENG 100 to 600 160 5 step 297 mm gt S2 size 2 27 Paper width Paper Transfer 2nd Side 97 mm 2 S2 size 5 mm Paper width 52 ENG Paper Transfer 1st Side S3 ENG 100 to 600 260 5 step 275 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width Paper Transfer 2nd Side iu ds mm Paper width 53 ENG 402 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer 1st Side S4 100 to 600 430 5 step 210 mm 2 S4 size 2 148 mm Paper width Paper Transfer 2nd Side i SE mm Paper width S4 Paper Transfer 1st Side S5 100 to 600 600 5 step 14 2 i P idth Paper Transfer 2nd Side 8 mm 2 SS size Paper width 55 Thick 2 Leading Edge Correction Thick 2 Paper Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2553 and SP2558 are multiplied by these SP values The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2572 001 Paper Transfer 1st Side 0 to 400 100 5 step 002 Paper Transfer 2nd Side Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode SP2551 is multiplied by these SP values
436. nsor pattern density is too Vk error Vk is out of range high Minimum Vk lt 150 2 Background dirty Hardware 58 Same as 53 defective ID sensor pattern Sampling data Not enough data density is too error during can be sampled 59 high or low gamma during the gamma Same as 53 l l Hardware correction correction defective Vsg Adjustment Result SP3 325 001 to 010 Vsg Adjustment Result 1 206 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 ID sensor adjustment error ID sensor output error Vsg Adjustment error Vsg cannot be adjusted within 4 0 0 5V ID sensor output is more than Voffset Threshold SP3 324 004 Vsg adjustment has not been completed Dirty ID sensor toner dust or foreign material Dirty transfer belt Scratched image transfer belt Defective ID sensor Poor connection Defective IOB Defective ID sensor Poor connection Defective IOB Other cases Clean the ID sensor Check the belt cleaning Clean or replace the transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt Replace the ID sensor Check the connection Replace the IOB board Replace the ID sensor Check the connection Replace the IOB board Retry the SP3 321 010 207 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Line Position Adjustment Result SP2 194 010 to 012 Line Position Adjustment Result M C Y This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the
437. nstapled pages are still counted The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray so jam recoveries are counted This SP counts the amount of staples used by the 8 531 Staples CTL machine 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output regardless 8 581 of the application used In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 8 581 1 Total 8 581 2 Total Full Color 8 581 3 B amp W Single Color 8 581 4 Development CMY 8 581 5 Development K 8 581 6 Copy Color 659 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 8 581 7 Copy B W 8 581 8 Print Color 8 581 9 Print B W 8 581 10 Total Color 8 581 11 Total B W 8 581 12 Full Color A3 8 581 13 Full Color B4 JIS or Smaller 8 581 14 Full Color Print 8 581 15 Mono Color Print 8 581 16 Full Color GPC These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by color output These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by color output 8 583 2 Single Color 660 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output 8 584 1 B W 8 584 2 Mono Color 8 584 3 Full Color 8 584 4 Single Color 8 584 5 Two Color These SPs count the total output of t
438. nts the heating roller overheating after job end 1159 Fusing Jam Detection 0 or 1 0 1 step SC Display ENG 0 Disable 1 Enable Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam detection If this SP is set to 1 default 0 SC559 occurs when the machine detects the paper jam three times consecutively at the fusing unit Motor Speed Adj FA 001 Registration 77 002 Registration 138 ENG 4 to 4 0 0 05 step 003 Registration 150 330 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 013 4 to 4 0 0 01 step Not used 4 to 4 0 4 0 01 step 018 4 to 4 0 28 0 01 step 4 to 4 Q5 o Registration 77 Middle 4 to 4 0 0 05 step ENG thick 045 Registration 77 Thick 1 046 Registration 77 Thick 2 ENG 4 to 4 0 4 0 05 step 047 Registration 77 Thick 3 048 Registration 138 Thin 4 to 4 059 Registration 138 Middle 4 to 4 0 0 05 step Thick 1901 Recovery Temp Ope Time 1903 Drive Current Setting 001 Duplex Motor Clockwise 0 or 1 0 1 step Duplex Motor 0 Large Current 1 Small Current Counterclockwise 331 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Feed Timing Adj DFU 003 Feed Clutch OFF Plain 10 to 10 0 1 mm step 004 Feed Clutch ON Plain 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Inverter Stop Position 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Exit Stop Position 3rd ENG 10 to 10 0 1 mm step Sheet 011 Entrance Stop Position 7 to 1
439. o 0 5 0 209 0 001 V wt step 1 to 10 3 4 0 1 wt step 1 to 10 4 3 0 1 wt step Vtref Correction Pixel DFU 3224 Adjusts the coefficient of Vtref correction for each coverage and color Low Coverage ENG Coefficient Bk O to 5 1 0 1 step 465 Service Tables Low Coverage Coefficient M Low Coverage Coefficient C Low Coverage Coefficient Y High Coverage Coefficient Bk High Coverage Coefficient M High Coverage Coefficient C High Coverage Coefficient Y Low Coverage Threshold High Coverage Threshold TC Upper Limit Correction Upper Limit TC Display Bk Upper Limit TC Display M Upper Limit TC Display C Upper Limit TC Display Y 21 Apr 2006 ENG ENG ENG ENG 0 to 5 1 0 01 V step ENG ENG 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 V step ENG Adjusts the threshold of the low coverage 0 to 20 3 0 1 step ENG Adjusts the threshold of the high coverage 0 to 100 60 1 step ENG ENG 0 to 5 0 5 0 1 wt step ENG ENG 1 to 15 10 0 01 wt step ENG ENG 466 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Process Control ENG 0 to 255 50 1 time step Execution Threshold Toner Supply Setting Adjusts the coefficient of the toner supply time for each color DFU Conversion Coefficient ENG 0 5 to 9 99 1 48 0 01 step Bk 3232 Toner Supply Coef
440. o 4 0 1 step Sets the IP address of the RCG Remote 002 RCG IP Address Communication Gate destination for call processing at the remote service center NV RAM Data Upload Uploads the UP and SP mode data except for counters and the serial number from the NVRAM to an SD card For details see the NVRAM Data Upload Download in this section NV RAM Data Download Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM For details see the NVRAM Data Upload Download in this section Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility Dor 1 1 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1284 Compatibility Centro Enables or disables ECP Compatibility 0 or 1 1 1 step 052 ECP Centro 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Hote This SP is activated only when 560 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 065 Job Spooling Job Spooling Clear Start Time 066 069 Job Spooling Protocol 090 TELNET 0 OFF 1 ON 091 Web 0 OFF 1 ON Active IPv6 Link Local Address 145 Enables disables Job Spooling 0 or 1 70 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on 0 ON Data is cleared 1 OFF Automatically printed Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each protocol 0 Validates 1 Invalidates bit0 LPR bit1 FTP bit2 IPP bit3 SMB bit4 BMLinkS bitb DIPRINT bit6 sftp bit Reserved Enables or disables the Teln
441. ock lever front and rear C Snap ring x 1 each 164 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 T Release the pressure roller lamp cord F P x 1 he color of the fusing lamp cord differs depending on the destination Red 220 240 V Blue 120 V 8 Rear side stay G x 2 165 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 9 Heating roller fusing lamp front stay H P x 1 10 Pressure roller lamp front stay I P x 1 11 Heating roller fusing lamp rear stay J x 1 12 Pressure roller fusing lamp rear stay K P x 1 13 Heating roller fusing lamp assembly L x 4 14 Pressure roller fusing lamp M x 1 166 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 A gt 15 Separation plate N x 2 spring x 2 16 Remove the pressure roller gear O x 1 one way clutch gear P x 1 and idle gear Q 17 Pressure roller R bearing x 2 167 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 19 Fusing belt T When reassembling the fusing unit When replacing the fusing roller or pressure roller you have to apply lubricant to the following places Fusing Roller 168 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Apply Barrierta S552R to the notch A at the front side of the fusing roller Apply Barrierta S552R to the edge B of the step at the rear side of the fusing roller Do not apply lubricant to the area C as shown Pressure Roller Apply Barrierta
442. ode Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE 1394 These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on 1 Press the User Tools Counter key On the touch panel press System Settings Press Interface Settings Press IEEE1394 Press the following soft keys on the touch panel Then set up the following S od hr settings IP Address Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask IP over 1394 Enable or disable this setting as required This setting enables IP over 1394 as the default setting for the printing method SCSI Print Enable or disable this setting as required This setting enables SCSI Print as the default setting for the printing method 67 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Bi directional SCSI Print Switch bi directional printing on or off for SCSI print SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394 The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394 Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE 5839 007 Cycle Master 1394 standard bus Sets the BCR Broadcast Channel Register setting for the Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 bus 5839 008 BCR Mode for when IRM is not in use The following three settings are available Standard IRM Color Copy and Always Effective IRM 1394a Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a is 5839 009 Check conducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used Enables the Node Unique
443. offset Check the paper types selected in the printer driver Smeared image at trailing edge Check the fusing unit speed Crow marks Check the humidity condition and adjust the transfer bias if necessary Ask customer to duplicate it Troubleshoot using the service manual or technical bulletin Troubleshoot depending on the type of problem Possible Symptoms No problem on pattern Font problem Image data missing Especially problems related to the above symptoms and if no problem is found on the test pattern it may be related to the application used or driver Collect a capture file for further investigation select Print to File in the driver 285 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Verification of problem reported from users Can the problem be duplicated Ask customer to duplicate it Yes Troubleshoot using No the service manual or technical bulletin Image Quality Yes Make copy in the enlargement or Cop Copy or Print reduction mode Print Make a test pattern in SP2 109 Location of the image problem shifted Troubleshoot No depending on the type of problem Colour related Possible Symptoms No problem on pattern Font problem Image data missing Vertical white dotted lines Check the transfer bias or paper condition Yes Vertical white lines on thick paper Check the timing when the problem occurs Es
444. oklet Finisher B793 Junction Gate SOL Proof Tray Gate Solenoid Staple Tray Gate Solenoid 698 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Folder Roller 6143 7 Fold Roller Motor Rotation Motor 6143 8 Staple Motor Staple Fold Motor Exit Guide Plate Motor 6143 11 Shift Relay Motor Upper Transport Motor 6143 12 Tray Motor Shift Tray Motor Stack Feed out 6143 13 Positioning Roller Solenoid Motor 6143 14 Stuck Relay1 Motor Upper Clamp Roller Motor Stuck Relay1 6143 15 Upper Retraction Motor Release Motor 6143 10 Rear Edge Fence 6143 16 Bottom Fence Lift Motor Drive Motor Drive Roller 6143 18 Lower Retraction Motor Oscillating Motor Staple Moving 6143 19 Staple Unit Driver Motor Motor 6143 20 Jogger Motor Jogger Motor Punch Registration 7 6143 21 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor Moving Motor Punch Moving 6143 23 Punch Movement Motor Motor 699 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 1000 Sheet Finisher B408 Proof Junction Gate SOL 6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor 6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Staple Moving Stapler Motor Motor 6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer Staple Junction Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid Gate SOL Positioning Roller mE 6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid solenoid Stack Feed out Motor 6144 11 Exit Guide Plate Motor 6144 13 500 Sheet Finisher B792 6146 1
445. ollows Yellow A Cyan B Magenta C Black D 179 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 From Image Transfer Belt Unit Q OR y gt f e A AMRAN HR Hi b A Jen x V9 gt COTO v NS NM OG Ny E The toner collection auger A moves the used toner from the image transfer belt and the used toner drops into the toner collection duct B The toner collection coil C moves the used toner to the opening D at the rear of the toner collection bottle The toner transport motor E drives the toner collection coil Used Toner Distribution Mechanism The toner collection bottle has two openings front and rear The opening at the front is for the toner from the PCUs and the opening at the rear is for the toner from the image transfer belt To distribute the toner inside the bottle evenly the auger A moves the toner to the center area The mixing auger has two spirals in different directions As a result it is possible to gather the toner in the center area of the toner collection bottle even if the mixing auger always rotates in the same direction The toner transport motor B drives the mixing auger via a timing belt and gears 780 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Toner Collection Bottle Set Near Full Full Detection The toner collection bottle has a projection at its rear side When the toner collection bottle is set this projection pus
446. olor mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 002 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SecondaryFB Special 3 2 id Adjusts the upper limit voltage for the paper transfer roller These SPs are only used for special 3 paper use in full color mode 001 Limit Voltage Division 1 ENG 0 to 7000 6000 10 V step 449 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Limit Voltage Division 2 ENG 0 to 7000 5000 10 V step SP3 XXX Process Normal Density Adjustment Pre ACC Full MUSIC Normal MUSIC Process Cont Manual Execution Executes the normal process control manually potential control Check the result with SP3 325 001 and 3 012 001 after executing this SP Executes the toner density adjustment manually Executes the process control that is normally done before ACC The type of process control is selected with SP3 041 004 Executes the process control that is normally done at the same time as MUSIC This SP does the MUSIC line position adjustment twice Executes the process control that is normally done at the same time as MUSIC This SP does the MUSIC line position adjustment once Process Cont Check Result Process Control Self check Result Displays the result of the latest process control self check All colors are displayed The results are displayed in the order Y CM kK e g 11 Y
447. on 167 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 PCU Photo Conductor Unit Overview 1 OPC drum 7 Charge roller non contact 2 Cleaning blade 8 TD sensor ID chip 9 Mixing auger 3 Brush roller 4 Lubricant bar 10 Development roller 5 Lubricant application blade 11 Inner pressure adjustment filter 6 Cleaning roller charge roller This machine has four tandem PCUs Therefore four color developments are possible during one paper path This improves the productivity of outputs in color printing mode Each PCU contains identical components drum unit development unit and so on but the PCUs are not interchangeable The diameter of the drum is 40 mm circumference about 125 7 mm The photoconductor gap between a drum and the corresponding development roller is not possible to adjust because these are assembled as a PCU at the factory The ID chip is part of the TD sensor assembly The ID chip contains counters and other data about the PCU drum unit and development unit If you replace the development unit with a new one the counter information for the drum unit is not kept on the new ID chip 768 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Around the Drum Drum Drive The drum development drive motor K A drives the drum unit for black The drum drive motor CMY B drives the drum units for magenta cyan and yellow Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalign
448. on Touch OK You will see Installing and then Completed Touch Exit to go back to the setting screen Touch Change Allocation Touch the Browser line Press one of the hard keys which you want to use for the Browser Unit Touch OK 81 Installation 21 Apr 2006 19 Touch Exit twice to go back to the copy screen 20 Turn off the main power switch 21 Remove the SD card from slot 3 22 Attach the slot cover A x 1 Check All Connections 1 Plug in the power cord Then turn on the main switch 2 Enter the printer user mode Then print the configuration page User Tools gt Printer Settings gt List Test Print gt Config Page All installed options are shown in the System Reference column 82 Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 2 Preventive Maintenance settings Before removing the old PM parts 1 Enter the SP mode Output the SMC logging data with SP5 990 004 Set the following SPs to 1 before you turn the power off Then the machine will reset the PM counters automatically In the case of developer the developer initialization will also be done automatically Exit the SP mode Black 3902 005 Yellow 3902 006 Cyan 3902 007 Magenta 3902 008 Developer Black 3902 009 Yellow 3902 010 Cyan 3902 011 Drum Unit Magenta 3902 012 Fusing Unit Parts not necessary for complete fusing 3902 014 units see below Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 3902 015 Pape
449. on text Drop Out Coor DFU Scanner Application text Photo DFU Scanner Application Photo DFU Scanner Application GrayScale DFU Scanner Application Color Text Photo DFU Scanner Application Color Glossy Photo DFU Scanner Application AutoColor DFU 0 to 15 8 1 step 005 MTF 0 Off 1 15 Strong 0 MTF Off 502 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect Smoothing 0 x1 1 7 0 to 7 4 1 step 006 Strong Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images Brightness 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 step Set higher for darker set lower for lighter Contrast 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 step Set higher for more contrast set lower for less contrast Independent Dot Erase 0 to 7 0 1 step 0 1 7 Strong Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect 0 Not activated 0 to 15 8 1 step MTF 0 Off 1 15 Stron 90 9 0 MTF Off Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect Smoothing O x1 1 7 0to7 4 1 step 903 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother images Brightness 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 s
450. on Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 6 Detailed Section Descriptions Overview Component Layout 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1819 110 11 ne 12 M D D 25 SE eR 13 24 Scanner HP sensor Paper transfer roller ADF exposure glass Registration roller 2nd scanner 2nd carriage By pass feed table Exposure glass Iray 2 Original width sensor Iray 1 Scanner lamp Toner collection bottle 1st scanner 1st carriage Laser optics housing unit Original length sensor PCU 4 colors 1 2 3 4 D 6 T 8 9 Lens block Image transfer belt cleaning unit 738 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 10 Sensor board unit SBU 23 Image transfer belt unit 11 Scanner motor 24 Toner bottle 4 colors 12 Fusing unit 25 ID sensor 13 Duplex unit Paper Path This diagram shows the copier with the 1000 sheet booklet finisher 1 Original tray 8 Tray 3 Optional paper feed unit LCT 2 Original exit tray 9
451. on the belt 8 ID sensors The ID sensors detect the density of ID sensor patterns on the transfer belt The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors for the line position adjustment front center and rear and four ID sensors for the process control On this board there are 7 ID sensors in total as follows A Line position adjustment front B Process control K C Process control C D Line position adjustment centre E Process control M F Process control Y G Line position adjustment rear The ID sensor output is used for the following Process control and for automatic line position Skew correction Color registration adjustments for the latent image 744 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Process Control Overview This machine has the following two forms of process control Potential control Toner supply control The following machine components are used for process control Four ID image density sensors black magenta cyan and yellow TD sensor Normally process control is not disabled If process control is disabled fixed supply mode is used for toner supply and the VREF stored in SP 3222 is used Potential Control Overview The machine determines VD using the ID sensor output and then determines VB and V Vp Drum potential without exposure to adjust this the machine adjusts the charge roller voltage Vg Development bias
452. onds loose connection of pressure roller thermistor A Defective thermopile Defective pressure roller thermistor Related SC code SC 541 243 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures WT 3 Replace the pressure roller thermistor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure roller warm up error After the main switch is turned on or the door is closed the pressure roller temperature does not reach the ready temperature within 70 seconds during fusing unit warm up 552 A Related SC code SC 542 1 Checkif the pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected 2 Replace the pressure roller fusing lamp Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure roller fusing lamp overheat software error The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 230 C or more for 1 second Defective PSU Defective IOB Defective BICU Related SC code SC 543 Replace the pressure roller thermistor Replace the PSU Replace the IOB Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 244 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Defective PSU Defective IOB Defective BICU Defective fusing control system Replace the pressure roller thermistor Replace the PSU Replace the IOB Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible
453. one of these conditions occurs 1 At Time threshold SP2 193 012 default 600 minutes 2 AT gt Temperature threshold SP2 193 011 default 10 C Line position adjustment is automatically done once if one of these conditions occurs 1 At Time threshold SP2 193 009 default 300 minutes 2 AT gt Temperature threshold SP2 193 008 default 5 C Interval During job This interrupts printing and then starts automatically if one of these conditions occurs when the machine checks at the sheet interval specified with SP3 512 001 default 30 page Line position adjustment is automatically done once if one of these conditions occurs 1 At gt Time threshold SP2 193 009 default 300 minutes 764 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 2 AT Temperature threshold SP2 193 008 default 5 C 3 B W counter SP3 510 005 Color counter SP3 510 006 gt Output threshold for all outputs SP2 193 004 default 200 pages 4 Color counter gt Output threshold for color outputs SP2 193 005 default 200 pages Interval Job end This starts automatically at the end of a print job Line position adjustment is automatically done once if one of these conditions occurs 1 At gt Time threshold SP2 193 009 default 300 minutes 2 AT Temperature threshold SP2 193 008 default 5 C 3 B W counter SP3 510 005 Color counter SP3 510 006 gt Output threshold for all outputs SP2 193 002 de
454. oner amount of the latest toner supply for each color 001 Latest Bk ENG 002 Latest M ENG O to 40000 0 0 1 mg step 003 Latest C ENG 004 Latest Y ENG Developer Mixing Setting 3237 Displays the toner amount of the latest toner supply for each color DFU 001 ENG 0 to 200 5 1 sec step Vt Target Setting Displays the Vt target value at developer initialization DFU Bk ENG M ENG 0 to 5 2 7 0 01 V step C ENG Y ENG Vtref Correction Setting Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control 469 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 Consumption Bk ENG 002 Consumption M ENG 003 Consumption C ENG 004 Consumption Y ENG O to 1 0 1 0 01 V step 005 Consumption Bk ENG 006 JConsumption M ENG 007 Consumption C ENG 008 Consumption Y ENG 009 012 Threshold for development gamma rank 009 P Rank 1 Threshold ENG 010 P Rank 2 Threshold ENG 011 P Rank 3 Threshold ENG 012 P Rank 4 Threshold ENG 013 014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt 013 T Rank 1 Threshold ENG 014 T Rank 2 Threshold ENG Background Potential Setting 001 Coefficient Bk ENG These are parameters for calculating the charge bias referring to the development 002 Coefficient M ENG bias at process control 003 Coefficient C ENG 1000 to 1000
455. onventional fusing and pressure roller system he heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusing belt quickly The fusing roller is made of sponge which flattens slightly also increasing the fusing nip This roller does not contain a fusing lamp The heating roller has two fusing lamps one lamp heats the center and the other lamp heats the ends and the pressure roller has one fusing lamp The heating roller thermistor pressure roller thermistor and thermopile control the temperature of these lamps The thermopile is a non contact sensor The thermopile detects the temperature at the center of the fusing unit and the thermistor detects the temperature at the end 801 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off The lubricant roller supplies a small amount of oil to the pressure roller through the cleaning roller An oil supply unit is not necessary because the amount of oil supplied to the pressure roller is small Fusing Unit Drive Belt and Rollers The fusing paper exit motor drives the pressure roller A and the fusing roller B through the gear train timing belt and clutch The heating roller C is driven by the pressure with the fusing belt D The cleaning roller E and lubricant roller F are driven by the friction with the pressure roller Fusing Clutch The fusing clutch G turns o
456. optics housing unit These are adjustments for skew adjustment motors in the laser optics housing unit 1 Plugin and turn on the main power switch of the copier Enter the SP mode Execute SP9511 001 to clear the WTL positioning motor setting for Magenta Execute SP9511 002 to clear the WTL positioning motor setting for Cyan ae p T9 Execute SP9511 003 to clear the WTL positioning motor setting for Yellow 120 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 6 Exit the SP mode 7 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier a Recovery procedure fo f SC285 B nd no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit If f SC285 occurs orjyou did not do the procedure in Before removing the old laser optics housing before removing the old laser optics housing unit you must do the following 1 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier 2 Remove the left cover and harness cover bracket see the following Removing the old laser optics housing unit Disconnect the harness A of the skew correction motor Do steps 1 to 7 of Before removing the old laser optics housing unit Connect the harness A and reinstall the harness bracket and left cover Se Ae Plug in and turn on the main power switch Removing the old laser optics housing unit c ae 1 Left cover A 2
457. or The LD mirrors see the previous page deflect the laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror The WTL F corrects the main scan line Without this component the line bends out towards the middle of the main scan The central bend of the WTL is adjusted in the factory The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode and model see below Polygon motor Process line Print speed speed rpm speed mm s ppm Plain 32 598 138 mm s Middle Thick 760 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Laser Synchronizing Detectors A E Overview The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards LSD There is one at each corner of the laser optics housing unit The four LSD boards detect the following A Scanning end position for yellow and cyan B Scanning start position for yellow and cyan C Scanning end position for magenta and black D Scanning start position for magenta and black The machine recognizes each color from the time that they are detected Main Scan Start Detection For magenta and black the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan For yellow and cyan the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan The arrow E indicates the scanning direction Clock Frequency Adjustment Each LSD ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan is constant If the count for one particular beam varies from no
458. or 1 1 001 Control Method Selection ENG 0 Not Use 1 Use HST Concentration Control Bk Displays the factory settings of the black PCU Vent ENG 0 to 5 4 0 1 V step Vt ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step 003 Sensitivity HL ENG 0 to 5 2 5 0 1 V step ENG 004 Sensitivity HM 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 005 Sensitivity ML ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 006 Set Detection ENG 0 to 5 1 0 1 V step 007 Without Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 2 0 1 V step 49 O Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 008 With Developer ENG 0 to 5 1 3 0 1 V step 009 Serial Number 1 0 to 255 1 V step 010 Serial Number 2 011 Agjustment Vt ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 012 ENG 0 to 5 3 0 1 V step 013 ENG 0 to 5 4 0 01 V step 014 ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm kV step 015 ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step HST Concentration Control M 3712 Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCU 0 to 255 1 V step 491 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 014 Adjustment Gamma ENG 0 to 2 55 0 0 01 mg cm kV step 015 Adjustment Vcnt Result ENG 0 to 9 9 1 step HST Concentration Control C 3713 Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCU 0 to 255 1 V step HST Concentration Control Y 3714 Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCU 49 N N gt o z N Oo Service Tables
459. or the heating roller and two thermofuses for the pressure roller in series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 234 C it opens and cuts 806 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 power to the fusing lamp If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 235 C it also opens and cuts power to the fusing lamp If either of the two thermofuse temperatures becomes higher than 154 C the thermofuse opens and cuts power to the fusing lamp These thermofuses make a series circuit In either case the machine stops operation Energy Saver Modes Overview Stan by Mode Energy Saver Key ON Or Operation Sw Off or Auto Off Timer I mini to 240 min Default 60 min Key Operation Panel Off Timer 10 s to 999 s Default 60 s Operation Sw Off or Panel Off Mode Auto Off Timer I mini to 240 min Default 60 min Auto Off Mode Operation Sw On Platen Cover Open Close OI ModE Original Set ADF Fax RX etc After Printing Return Time Less Than 101s Printer Data in Off Stand by Mode When the machine is not being used the energy saver function reduces power consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature This machine has the following two types of energy saver modes 1 Panel off mode 2 Auto Off mode These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes
460. ored in the machine s software If it does not fall within this range the amount of toner deposited on the latent image will be too high or too low Toner Density Adjustment Mode If the toner density becomes too high or too low because of an incorrect development gamma this is corrected by process control see the previous section But sometimes it takes many copies before the toner density comes to the correct value Toner density adjustment mode can be used to bring the toner concentration to the correct level much more quickly if users complain about the toner density SP 3 043 controls when the toner density adjustment mode is done To do the toner density adjustment mode manually execute SP 3 011 2 It is also done automatically before ACC if SP3 041 4 is set to 2 TC Control this is the default setting During this procedure the machine generates ID sensor patterns and detects the current development gamma The gamma must be within 0 2 of the target development gamma If the current gamma is too high above the target by 0 2 or more 0 2 limit is set with SP3 239 009 the machine consumes toner in the development unit until the development gamma is within the correct range To consume toner the machine generates solid patterns If the current gamma is too low below the target by more than 0 2 0 2 limit is set with SP3 239 012 the machine supplies toner to the development unit until the development gamma is within the
461. orted move the shift tray to the shipping position with SP6137 003 ON and then remove the shift tray cover 16 Installation Paper Feed Unit B800 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty Caster stand N O Securing bracket 2 QD Screw M3x6 x 6 M4x10 x 2 8 iN Spring Washer Screw 1 Rear stand cover 1 OT Left stand cover Front stand cover 1 N O 21 Apr 2006 17 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed Otherwise the handle and grips may be damaged 1 Remove all tape on the paper feed unit 2 Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding e UN 77 3 Grasp the handle A and grips B of the machine 4 Liftthe copier and install it on the paper feed unit C 18 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Remove tray 2 of the machine Fasten the spring washer screw D using the cutout in the securing bracket E as a tool Reinstall tray 2 Attach the securing brackets E M4
462. osition C The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB K Y M C is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective connection Defective laser synchronizing detector Defective LDB Defective BICU Check the connectors Replace the laser synchronizing detector Replace the LDB Replace the BICU 221 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error Bk The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position K Defective ASIC Lupus Poor connection between controller and BICU Defective BICU Check the connection between the controller board and the BICU Replace the BICU Replace the controller board l Type Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE OFF error Bk The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position K The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts See SC 230 for troubleshooting details i Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures FGATE ON error Y The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position
463. osition signal for three second at the drum phase adjustment 1 Replace the drum gear position sensor 2 Replace the PCU No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 400 ID sensor adjustment error When the Vsg error counter reaches 3 the machine detects SC400 e Vsg error counter counts when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is 230 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures more than the value default 4 5V specified with SP3234 005 or less than the value default 3 5V specified with SP SP3234 006 Dirty or defective ID sensor Defective ID sensor shutter 1 Check the harness of the ID sensor 2 Clean or replace the ID sensor After replacing the ID sensor input the ID sensor correction coefficient with SP3362 013 to 018 For details refer to ID sensor board in the Replacement and Adjustment section 3 Replace the IOB 4 Replace the image transfer belt unit Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Image transfer unit motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on Motor overload Defective image transfer unit motor Replace the image transfer belt unit Replace the IOB No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 442 Image transfer belt contact motor eror Image transfer belt con
464. ow m 1 Never change Option value default value is 0 2 Adjust the density in this order ID Max Middle Shadow Highlight 99 Replacement and Adjustment Photo Mode Full Color ID max K C M and Y Middle Middle ID K C M and Y Shadow High ID K C M and Y Highlight Low ID K C M and Y K Highlight Low ID C M and Y on the full color copy 1 2 3fafs ef7fsfolio j11213 4 5 6 v 8 9 10 11213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3fa4f5 6 7 8 09 10 j11213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 t 21 Apr 2006 Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is seen as gray no C M or Y should be visible If the black scale contains C M or Y do steps 1 to 4 again 100 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Photo Mode Single Color Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart Adjustment Standard
465. ows that the download will replace Japanese with Italian as the 1st language 721 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Download Language LCDC ROM 62315370 Lang Card Select Lang Mow Lang LANG 1 1 Japanese LANG 2 2 English UK 2 87 UpDate 9 Touch Update on the screen or press to start the download Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading The following occur at the time the language is downloading The operation panel switches off The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly 10 After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD switch the copier main power switch off Then remove the SD card from the slot 11 Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation Handling Firmware Update Errors An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download The error code consists of the letter E and a number E20 for example Error Message Table Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card or data is compressed data corrupted Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal If the second update program started attempt fails replace controller board Make sure SD card inserted correctly or use 722 Service Tables 30 31
466. p 352 ENG 7232768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step Service Tables Paper Int Mag Subdot M 21 Apr 2006 ENG ENG ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step ENG ENG ENG ENG 512 to 511 0 1 dot step ENG ENG ENG 32768 to 32767 O 1 pulse step ENG ENG ENG 16384 to 16383 0 1 line step ENG 7 1 to 1 0 0 001 line step ENG 716384 to 16383 0 1 line step ENG 1 to 1 0 0 001 line step ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step ENG ENG ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step ENG ENG 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step 353 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 232768 to 32767 0 1 pulse step 5000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step 042 ENG 75000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step 045 ENG 75000 to 5000 0 0 001 um step 048 ENG 15 to 15 0 1 pulse step 049 ENG 732768 to 32767 0 1 dot step 354 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 050 Mag Cor Subdot Y 051 M Left Mag Subdot Y 052 M Right Mag Subdot Y Line Position Adj Offset Color M Scan Main scan S Scan Sub scan High 138 mm sec Medium Not used Low 77 mm sec 001 M Magnification ENG Adjusts the line position manually 1 to 1 0 0 001 96 step 002 CMagnification l l When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment do this SP
467. p of the stack is at the paper feed position When the tray is removed from the machine the connection between the coupling gear and lift arm shaft is disengaged and the tray bottom plate lowers 193 Detailed Section Descriptions Paper Size Detection Trays 1 amp 2 C 21 Apr 2006 There is no size switch for tray 1 The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT LEF for both sizes You can change the size setting with SP5 181 1 For tray 2 there are four paper size switches A working in combination Switch 1 right end is for tray set detection The other three switches detect the paper size as shown in the table below The actuator B is moved by the end plate C 0 Not pushed 1 Pushed Models Switch Location SW3 North America DLT A3 SEF 1 m LT A4 LEF 3 T y CHEN 1 The machine detects either DLT SEF or A3 SEF depending on the setting of SP5 181 3 794 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 2 The machine detects either LG SEF or B4 SEF depending on the setting of SP5 181 4 3 The machine detects either LT LEF or A4 LEF depending on the setting of SP5 181 2 4 The machine detects either Exe LEF or B5 LEF depending on the setting of SP5 181 5 SP 5 181 6 to 13 does similar functions for the optional paper trays The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is inst
468. paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2824 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 2 Switch Timing Trail Edge 2824 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Plain ENG 7100 to 0 0 2 mm step 138 mm s 1st Side 430 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Special 2 LL Special 2 Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values ENG 10
469. partitions it into several drives and allocates them for different functions You can initialize these partitions as necessary i SP5 832 The table lists the contents of the hard disk Volatile Initialization Contents Capacity MB Nonvolatile SP5 832 18 340 Nonvolatile Images IMH 12 844 Volatile Thumbnails 2400 Nonvolatile Nonvolatile Nonvolatile Job Logs Printer fonts Volatile The data is lost when you turn the main switch off Designer data Net interfaces Nonvolatile The data is not lost when you turn the main switch off Controller Functions Sample Print This feature was formerly known as Proof Print This function gives users a chance to check the print results before starting a multiple set print run The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 16 8 GB This partition is also used by the collation and locked print features The partition can hold up to 100 files including files stored using locked print 820 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The partition can hold a log containing up to 30 errors excluding jobs stored using locked print The maximum number of pages is 2 000 including jobs using locked print and collation Locked Print Using this feature the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed until the user inputs an ID and a password at the machine s operation panel These ID and password must match the ID and password th
470. pdate data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the hard disks Replace the update data for the module on the SD card and tray again or replace controller board 723 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SD update data is incorrect The data on the SD Electronic confirmation check failed card is for another machine Acquire correct update data then install again 124 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 SD Card Appli Move Overview The service program SD Card Appli Move SP5 873 lets you to copy application programs from one SD card to another SD card Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs But there are 3 possible applications PostScript 3 DOS unit PictBridge You cannot run application programs from Slot 3 However you can move application programs from Slot 3 to either Slot 1 or Slot 2 with the following procedure Slot 1 has the priority in the SD card Appli Move procedure if both Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used 1 Choose a SD card with enough space 2 Enter SP5873 SD Card Appli Move Then move the application from the SD Card in Slot 3 to the Slot you want Do steps 1 2 again if you want to move another application program 3 Exit the SP mode Use high caution when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure 1 The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD card to another SD card Authentication fails if you try to use the S
471. pecially problems related to the above symptoms and if no problem is found on the Dirty lines Check the transfer belt cleaning section Poor fusing Fusing offset Check the paper types selected in the printer driver Smeared image at trailing edge Check the fusing unit speed Crow marks Check the humidity condition and adjust the transfer bias if necessary test pattern it may be related to the application used or driver Collect a capture file for further investigation select Print to File in the driver The following work flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this product 286 Troubleshooting Q Problem is related to the scanner section Make a test print from SBU in SP4 907 in each colour Can the problem be duplicated Yes Make a test print from IPU in SP4 417 by selecting related colour Can the problem be duplicated Yes Check connection between the IPU Controller or replace the IPU 21 Apr 2006 Possible Symptoms Colour shift Check the level of the Yes colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required Check Points Connection of BICU cable between the controller and laser optic housing unit Mirror position of related colour located in the laser optic housing unit Colour missing Controller or BICU board defective Specify the colour that caused the Check the
472. per HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 409 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 001 Paper Transfer ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step 2635 002 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2601 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Thick 3 Bias 2650 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 3 Separation DC Thick 3 1st Side ENG 0 to 5000 0 10 V step Separation DC Thick 3 2nd Side Thick 3 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in ENG 2651 black and white mode Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step 1st Side Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side Thick 3 Bias FC Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step 2652 mode Paper Transfer Thick 3 ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step 1st Side Paper Transfer Thick 3 2nd Side ENG 0 to 130 15 1 uA step 410 Service Tables 2653 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Thick 3 Paper Size Correction
473. per leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2622 002 Separation DC ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step 407 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 OHP Switch Timing Lead Edge 2622 Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 30 0 2 mm step 002 Separation DC ENG OHP Trailing Edge Correction OHP Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values n The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2624 001 Paper Transfer ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step OHP Switch Timing Trail Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate 2623 2624 at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area 001 Paper Transfer ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step OHP LL OHP LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values 001 Paper Transfer 10 to 250 80 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2601 is multiplied by these SP values 002 Separation DC ENG
474. piral groove and this groove moves toner to the mouth B of the bottle Here toner spills into a hopper C The opening D of the toner hopper is normally closed if the toner bottle is not installed in the machine When the toner bottle is installed in the machine the transport tube E pushes the toner hopper shutter F and then the opening of the toner hopper is open The toner passes part of the way along the transport tube towards the toner attraction pump The toner goes through the toner end sensor G Toner Near End Detection The toner end sensors G detect toner near end conditions iMlf Toner Near End Toner End Detection in this section 7 6 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Toner supply from toner attraction pump to development unit Each toner attraction pump A is driven by the toner transport motor B Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism The pump toner attraction pump has the following components Toner supply clutch C Rubber tube Rotor D The above components attract the toner in the toner transport tube E toward the development unit The toner supply clutch controls the rotor which draws the toner in from the cartridge and passes it to the development unit When supplying toner the clutch turns on and off as many times as necessary to supply the necessary amount of toner The amount of toner depends on the results of toner supply control Shutter Mechanism
475. play fe LLL Registration sensor does not detect 7504 17 Registration ON paper Fusing entrance sensor does not detect 7504 18 Fusing Entrance ON paper l l Fusing exit sensor does not detect 7504 19 Fusing Exit ON paper 7504 20 Paper Exit ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper C Tray exit sensor bridge unit does not Relay Exit ON detect paper Relay sensor bridge unit does not 7504 21 7504 22 Relay Transport ON detect paper Duplex exit sensor does not detect 7504 25 Duplex Exit ON paper Duplex entrance sensor does not detect 7504 27 Duplex Entrance ON paper 1 bin tray exit sensor does not detect 7504 28 1 Bin Exit Sensor paper 7504 51 SEF Sensor 1 Paper feed sensor 1 does not turn off 7504 52 SEF Sensor 2 Paper feed sensor 2 does not turn off A Vertical transport sensor or relay sensor 7504 53 Bank SEF Sensor 1 1 does not turn off Vertical transport sensor 2 does not turn off 7504 54 Bank SEF Sensor 2 2 CO 6 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Jam Code Display Description Display 7504 57 Regist Sensor Registration sensor does not turn off Fusing Exit Sensor Fusing exit sensor does not turn off Paper exit sensor does not turn off 7504 59 7504 60 7504 61 7504 62 7504 65 7504 66 7504 130 7504 100 7504 101 7504 102 7504 103 7504 104 Relay sensor bridge unit does not turn Relay Sensor off Duplex E
476. presentative who has completed the training course on those models Keep the machine away from flammable liquids gases and aerosols A fire or an explosion might occur A CAUTION The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery The danger of B230 Service Manual 21 Apr 2006 explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions and local regulations The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries which can explode if replaced incorrectly Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Do not recharge or burn the batteries Used batteries must be handled in accordance with local regulations Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal 1 Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame 2 Dispose of used toner the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations These are non toxic supplies 3 Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build up
477. problem always occurs in a specific condition for example printer driver setting image file the problem may be caused by a software error In this case the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist Please understand that it may take some time to get a reply on how to solve the problem because in some cases the design staff in Japan must analyze the data Symptom Possible Causes Action taken Summary sheet SP mode Printer SP SP1 004 Print Summary SMC All SP5 990 001 SMC Logging SP5 990 004 Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs 283 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 All data displayed on the screen SC code error code and program address where the problem is logged Image file which causes the problem if possible 284 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Troubleshooting Guide Image Quality Make copy in the enlargement or reduction mode Location of the image problem shifted Yes Verification of problem reported from users Can the problem be duplicated Yes Image Quality Yes Cop Copy or Print Print Make a test pattern in SP2 109 Colour related Vertical white dotted lines Check the transfer bias or paper condition Vertical white lines on thick paper Check the timing when the problem occurs Dirty lines Check the transfer belt cleaning section Poor fusing Fusing
478. quired voltage is not supplied to the devices 4 Overheat overcooling The environment is inappropriate for the board the scanner unit 5 Static electricity Static electricity of a high voltage occurs during the test 6 Others The scanner and BICU are incorrectly connected When you have completed a check turn the main switch off and on before you do another check When you have completed all necessary checks turn the main switch off and on 210 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Service Call Conditions Summary The SC Table section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors The latter not controller errors are put into four types The type is determined by their reset procedures The table shows the classification of the SC codes Controller The error has occurred in the See Troubleshooting Procedure errors controller in the table The error involves the fusing Turn the main switch off and on Reset the SC set SP5 810 1 disabled The user cannot reset Turn the main switch off and on unit The machine operation is the error The error involves one or some specific units The machine Turn the operation switch off and operates as usual excluding on the related units The error is logged The Oth dide SC code history is updated The SC will not show Only the The machine operates as SC history is updated usual The machine operation is disabled You can reset the m
479. r 696 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Bank Motor Feed Motor 77 mm s Optional Paper Feed Unit or 5804 163 77mm s LCT Bank Motor 115mm s 5804 164 Bank Motor Feed Motor 138 mm s Optional Paper Feed Unit or 138mm s LCT Bank Motor 5804 166 220mm s Paper Feed Clutch 3 5804 169 Bank Feed CL3 9804 165 Optional Paper Feed Unit Tray 3 or LCT Paper Feed Clutch 4 Optional Paper Feed Unit Tray Bank Feed CL4 4 Pickup Solenoid 3 Optional Paper Feed Unit Tray 3 or LCT 5804 172 Bank Pickup SOLA Pickup Solenoid 4 Optional Paper Feed Unit Tray 4 5804 173 Bank Tray Lock SO Tray Lock Solenoid for Tray 3 and Tray 4 9804 170 5804 171 Bank Pickup SOL3 Tube Cooling Fan 5804 174 Toner Supply Tube Fan High Speed High Speed Tube Cooling Fan 5804 175 Toner Supply Tube Fan Low Speed Low Speed Toner Bottle Clutch 5804 176 T Toner Bottle Clutch K Toner Bottle Clutch 5804 177 Toner Bottle Clutch M Toner Bottle Clutch 5804 178 Toner Bottle Clutch C C Toner Bottle Clutch 5804 179 y Toner Bottle Clutch Y 697 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Relay Motor 5804 189 Drive Motor Bridge Unit Current Change Current Chang 5804 190 Relay Motor Reset Drive Motor Bridge Unit Reset Relay Motor 5804 191 Drive Motor Bridge Unit Enable Enable 5804 192 RFID ON OFF K RFID ON OFF K 5804 193 RFID ON OFF M RFID ON OFF M 1000 Sheet Bo
480. r Replace the controller fan motor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the Fusing Paper exit motor Motor overload Defective fusing paper exit motor Fusing Paper exit motor error 1 Replace the fusing paper exit motor Details Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Possible Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Troubleshooting Procedures Heating roler thermistor error4 000 Heating roler thermistor error4 000 thermistor error 1 The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor does not reach 0 C for 6 seconds Loose connection of the heating roller thermistor Defective heating roller thermistor Defective thermopile 240 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 T Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 Checkifthe heating roller thermistor is firmly connected 2 Replace the heating roller thermistor 3 Replace the thermopile After the main switch is turned on or the cover is closed the increment of the heating roller temperature per 10 seconds is 30 C or less If this condition is detected five times consecutively SC 542 is defined The heating roller temperature does not reach 100 C for 15 seconds after the heating lamp on The heating roller temperature does not reach the rea
481. r Information Control Service settings MIRS Setting n Initializes the MIRS Machine Information Report Service settings Initializes the CCS Certification and Charge control Service settings Smee T 000 Initializes the SRM System Resource Manager settings Initializes the LCS Log Count Service settings WebUapl m Initializes the WebUapl settings Performs a free run on the copier engine The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of AA LT A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray Therefore the correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray but paper is not fed The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for a test 001 TRAY1 A4LEF FC m 002 TRAY2 A3 FC m 003 TRAY2 AASEF FC m 5803 Input Check m See Input Check in this section 546 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5804 Output Check m See Output Check in this section SC Reset Resets a type A service call condition NOTE Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code sm 5811 Machine Serial Machine Serial Number Display 002 Display Displays the machine serial number Service Tel No Setting p Sets the telephone number for a service representative This number is printed on the Counter List which can be printed with the user s Counter menu This can be up to 20 characters both numbers and alphabetic characters
482. r Output 5804 66 ID Sensor diffusion M LED Output ST Sensor Output PE 5804 67 ID Sensor diffusion C LED Output ST Sensor Output mE 5804 68 ID Sensor diffusion Y LED Output Y Toner End Sensor 5804 69 BL Toner End Sensor K Toner End Sensor 5804 70 Toner End Sensor M Toner End Sensor 5804 71 S Toner End Sensor C Toner End Sensor 5804 72 y Toner End Sensor Y 5804 73 Separation Voltage Discharge Plate Voltage Image Transfer 5804 74 Image TRANSFER BELT UNIT BIAS OUTPUT K Output Bk Image Transfer mE 5804 75 Image Transfer Belt Unit Bias Output M Output M Image Transfer mE 5804 76 Image Transfer Belt Unit Bias Output C Output C 692 Service Tables 5804 77 5804 78 5804 79 9804 80 5804 81 5804 82 5804 83 5804 84 5804 85 5804 86 5804 87 5804 88 5804 89 5804 90 Image Transfer Output Y Charge DC Output Bk Charge DC Output M Charge DC Output C Charge DC Output Y Charge AC Output Bk Full Speed Charge AC Output Bk Medium Speed Charge AC Output Bk Low Speed Charge AC Output M Full Speed Charge AC Output M Medium Speed Charge AC Output M Low Speed Charge AC Output C Full Speed Charge AC Output C Medium Speed Charge AC Output C Low Speed 21 Apr 2006 Image Transfer Belt Unit Bias Output Y Drum Charge DC Voltage Output K Drum Charge
483. r Size Correction Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for each paper size SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S1 ENG 100 to 600 100 5 step 1 size 2 297 P idth Paper Transfer Plain EH alee ak AA ee ea 138 mm s 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side S1 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S1 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S2 ENG ENG 100 to 600 130 5 step 297 mm 2 S2 size 2 275 mm Paper width Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S2 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side 52 Not used 008 Paper Transfer FINE ENG 384 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S3 100 to 600 160 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side S3 100 to 600 200 5 step 2 5 mm 2 S3 size 2 210 mm Paper width ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side S3 ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side S3 ENG Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side S4 ENG 100 to 600 220 5 step 21 S4 size 2 14 P idth Paper Transfer Plain 0mm 2 S4 size 8 mm Paper width 138 mm s 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side S4 Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side S4 Paper Transfer Plain 1
484. r Transfer Unit 3902 016 Toner Collection Bottle if not full or near full 3902 017 For the following units there is a new unit detection mechanism It is not necessary to reset PM counters PCU Development unit Complete fusing unit 83 Preventive Maintenance 21 Apr 2006 Toner Collection Bottle if full or near full After installing the new PM parts 1 Turn on the main power switch Output the SMC logging data with SP5 990 004 and check the counter values Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are 0 with SP7 803 If the PM counter for a unit was not reset then reset that counter wn SP 7 908 amp Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7 853 Make sure that the counters for the previous units SP7 906 on the new SMC logging data list from step 2 above are equal to the counters SP7 803 for these units on the previous SMC logging data list the list that was output in the Before removing the old parts section 6 Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7 950 Preparation before operation check 1 Clean the exposure glasses for DF and book scanning Enter the user tools mode Do the Automatic Color Calibration ACC for the copier mode amp printer mode as follows 1 Print the ACC test pattern User Tools gt Maintenance gt ACC gt Start 2 Putthe printout on the exposure glass 3 Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart This
485. r URL Path Primary 015 NIA Server Scheme Secondary 016 NIA Server Port Number Secondary 017 NIA Server URL Path Secondary 018 NIA 019 Capture Server Scheme 5 O gt cO Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Capture Server Port Number 020 NIA Capture Server URL Path 1 NIA UCS Settings CTL Machine ID For Delivery Server Displays ID Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory The value is only displayed and cannot be changed This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI The ID is displayed as either 6 byle or 8 byte binary Machine ID Clear For Delivery Server Clears ID Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable After clearing the ID the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on Maximum Entries Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle 2000 to 20000 2000 1 step If a value smaller than the present value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed Delivery Server Retry Timer 0 to 255 0 1 step Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book Delivery Server Retry Times 0 to 255 0 1 step Set
486. r bottle information log 1 for M Attachment Total Counter 617 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for M 7936 5 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for M 7936 8 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for M 7936 11 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7936 12 Counter ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for M 7936 14 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7936 15 Counter ENG Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 C ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for C 7937 2 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter Displays the toner bottle information log 2 for C 1937 5 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter ENG 618 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 3 for C 1937 8 Attachment Date Attachment Total Counter Displays the toner bottle information log 4 for C 7937 11 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7937 12 Counter ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 5 for C 7937 14 Attachment Date Attachment Total 7937 15 Counter ENG Toner Bottle Log 1 2 3 4 5 Y ENG Displays the toner bottle information log 1 for
487. r cord before starting the following procedure 1 Remove all tapes Remove the standard tray A Remove the inner cover B x 1 Attach the connector cover C to the shift tray unit D Install the shift tray unit D to the machine 33 Installation 21 Apr 2006 G Open the left side door E of the shift tray unit Attach the shift tray unit to the machine with the knob screw F Install the large paper guide G and two small paper guides H e m a 2 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 10 Check the shift tray unit operation 34 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Bridge Unit B227 Component Check Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list Installation Procedure A CAUTION Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure 1 If you will install the 1 bin tray B790 in the machine install the 1 bin tray before you installing the bridge unit B227 This will make it easier for you to do the following procedure 2 f you will install a finisher B408 B792 or B793 in the machine install the finisher 35 Installation 21 Apr 2006 after you install the bridge unit B227 oe e eite e x irt eT a Tn in a T F Dr i lin aa oa d s a ess pr xL E ec ee i a a 1 Remove all tapes y 2 If the sensor feeler A is out fold it into the machine
488. r each color 001 Supply Time Bk ENG 002 Supply Time M ENG O to 30 4 1 sec step 003 Supply Time C ENG 004 Supply Time Y ENG Vt Limit Error DFU 001 Delta Vt Threshold ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 002 Upper Threshold ENG 0 to 5 4 7 0 01 V step Threshold Number of Upper counter ENG 0 to 99 20 1 time step 452 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 004 Lower Threshold ENG 0 to 5 0 5 0 01 V step 005 Number of Lower counter ENG 0 to 99 10 1 time step 006 Upper Counter Bk 007 Upper Counter M 008 Upper Counter C 009 Upper Counter Y 0 to 99 0 1 time step 010 Lower Counter Bk 011 Lower Counter M 012 Lower Counter C 013 Lower Counter Y TD Sensor Initial Set Developer Initialization Setting Specifies the developer agitation time for each color at the developer initialization DFU 001 Agitation Time Bk 002 Agitation Time M 0 to 200 30 1 sec step 003 Agitation Time C 004 Agitation Time Y 005 008 Sets the execution flag of the developer initialization for each color DFU 005 Execution Flag Bk ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 006 Execution Flag M ENG 0 Flag OFF 1 Flag ON This flag is cl f ina TD 007 Execution Flag C ENG is flag is cleared after executing sensor initialization 008 Execution Flag Y ENG Prohibition ENG Enables or disables developer
489. r each pattern The development potential is the difference between the development bias and the charge remaining on the drum where the laser writes a black area The development bias changes for each grade and the charge on black areas of the image is always the same so the development potential also changes Step 3 Sensor Pattern Detection The ID sensor measures the light reflected from each grade of the pattern to detect the densities of each grade This data goes to memory Step 4 Toner Amount Calculation The machine calculates the amount of toner on the transfer belt that is required to make each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern To do this the machine uses the output values of the ID sensor from each grade of the pattern 748 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The amounts of toner are expressed as M A mass per unit area mg cm Step 5 Vp Vg Vi Selection and Vqgge Adjustment The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on the transfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades From this the machine determines the best Vp to get the target M A for each color Then based on this Vp the machine determines the best Vg and Vi This process ensures that enough toner is deposited to make black pixels The machine also adjusts Vrrerf toner density target at the same time so that the development gamma used by the machine fall within the target development gamma range st
490. r in the pattern on the transfer belt If the gaps for a color are not correct the machine moves the image of 763 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 the color up or down the sub scan axis To do this it changes the laser write timing for that color Main scan line position for YCM If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction it changes the laser write start timing for each scan line Magnification adjustment for KYCM If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary it changes the LD clock frequency for the required color Skew for YCM The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K Adjustment Conditions Line position adjustment can be turned on or off with SP2 193 001 However it is normally recommended to turn on this function Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings These are described below At Time since the previous line position adjustment AT Temperature change between the temperature of the previous line position adjustment and the current temperature Forced SP2 111 001 to 003 This activates the line position adjustment manually There are three types of line position adjustment mode See the SP table for details Initial This starts automatically when the power is turned on or when the machine recovers from the energy saver mode Line position adjustment is automatically done twice if
491. r towards the toner collection duct The lubricant application roller D applies lubricant E to the image transfer belt to make toner removal easy To drive the cleaning unit the transfer belt rotates gear G and gears at the front of the transfer unit drive the auger F and the rollers A D in the cleaning unit 785 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 ITB Image Transfer Belt Contact Mechanism The ITB contact and release mechanism increases the lifetime of the image transfer belt and drums The drum for black always contacts the belt But the image transfer belt moves away from the other drums during monochrome printing In the standby mode the image transfer belt contacts only the black drum It moves away from the black drum when you turn the release lever counterclockwise When the machine prints a color page the machine waits until the previous page has gone through the paper transfer unit Then the ITB contact motor A turns on and a cam B moves the left side C of the image transfer belt downward so that it contacts the other three drums The machine does not release the image transfer belt from the color drums during the job even if a monochrome page comes again This is because the total printing speed reduces if the ITB changes position 5 But if you change SP 2907 003 away from the default setting of zero the image transfer belt will move away from the color drums if the number of consecutive b
492. rclockwise as seen from the rear Gear B hook x 1 Turn the gear cover C clockwise as seen from the rear F x 1 6 Image transfer belt unit top cover D x 6 140 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 9 Remove the two screws and then rear hold bracket G as seen from the rear 141 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 11 Put the front side of the image transfer belt unit on a corner of the table or a box as shown 12 Pull the tension roller I as shown 142 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 13 Image transfer belt J When reinstalling the image transfer belt Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt E Twofapes width C about 5 mm are attached nside the front and rear edge of the image transfer belt E 143 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 This belt must be installed the correct way around When you reinstall the image transfer belt unit install it with the painted number D on the belt at the rear side of the unit Put Lubricant Powder B132 9700 on the surface of the image transfer belt A while you turn the drive gear B at a constant speed as shown The straight arrow in the picture shows belt movement direction Lubricant powder prevents the image transfer cleaning blade from turning up note Do not put the lubricant powder at the right side of the image transfer belt unit the
493. re lamp M Reassembling Run the cable so there is no slack Slide the clamp A to adjust the cable slack 111 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Scanner Motor B 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 2 Scanner motor assembly A x 2 amp x 1 spring x 1 3 Scanner motor B x 2 Sensor Board Unit SBU 1 Exposure glass iMf Exposure Glass 2 SBU cover bracket A x 9 3 Original length sensor bracket B x 1 2 x 1 112 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 4 Sensor board unit C x 5 x 2 23 x 2 When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit SP4 008 Sub Scan Mag See Image Adjustment Scanning SP4 010 Sub Mag Reg See Image Adjustment Scanning SPA4 011 Main Scan Reg See Image Adjustment Scanning SP4 688 DF Density Adjustment Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is different Exposure Lamp Stabilizer 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover 2 Exposure lamp stabilizer A x 2 x 2 113 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Front Scanner Wire Te YS oM I C Exposure glass Mf Exposure Glass Front frame iM Exposure Lamp Front scanner wire clamp A Front scanner wire bracket B x 1 Front scanner wire and scanner d
494. rection is done in the BICU board This is the same as for book mode You can adjust magnification in the sub scan direction by changing the ARDF motor speed with SP6 017 754 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Original Size Detection The original width sensors A detect the original width The original length sensors B detect the original length The SBU controller on the SBU board checks each sensor status when the platen cover sensor C is activated as it is closed It detects the original size by the on off signals it gets from each sensor If the copy is made with the platen cover fully open the SBU controller on the SBU determines the original size from the sensor outputs after the Start key is pressed ol lol L1 L2 L3 Width Original Size Length Sensor SP4 301 Sensor 11 x 17 display 10 x 14 755 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 F4 8 5 x 13 8 25 x 13 or 8 x 13 8 5 x 14 00011100 SP 5126 controls the size that is detected 5 5 x 8 5 8 5 x 5 5 A5 LEF SEF O Paper present X Paper not present The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size This original size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre scan and increases the machine s productivity However if the by pass tray is used the machine assumes that the copy paper is lengthwise L For example if A4 sideways paper is placed on the b
495. ression Ratio Normal image 5 to 95 20 1 step CTL 2024 2 Compression Ratio High comp image 5 to 95 20 1 step 709 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Reboot System Setting Reset Software Reset You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures 1 Turn the main power switch off and on 2 Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds When the machine beeps once release both buttons After Now loading Please wait shows for a few seconds the copy window will open The machine is ready for normal operation System Settings And Copy Setting Reset System Setting Reset The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults Use the following procedure 1 Press User Tools Counter E 2 Hold down amp and then press System Settings You must press first gt User Tools Counter Enquiry tp e settings 4 Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset Copier Setting Reset Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults 1 Press User Tools Counter R 2 Hold down and then press Copier Document Server Settings You must press first 710 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Copier Document Server 15 Es Features dr Frangais Facsimile Features 3 Systern Settings EN Printer Features I3 P Maintenance c Scanner Features Counter
496. rge given to the drum is as uniform as possible The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process control is enabled i e if SP3 041 1 is set to CONTROL However if process control is switched off i e if SP3 041 1 is set to FIXED the dc voltage is the value stored in SP2 001 1 to 12 do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so The diameter of the charge roller is 12 5 mm circumference about 39 3 mm The gap between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 um The cleaning roller B which always contacts the charge roller cleans the charge roller Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at the end of every job 770 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Drum Cleaning The cleaning blade A scrapes off the used toner that stays on the drum The toner collection auger B transports the used toner towards the toner collection duct Then it goes to the toner collection duct The brush roller C put lubricant on the drum to make toner removal easy the next time the drum rotates past the cleaning blade If the temperature is above the value of SP 3517 the drum reverses briefly at the end of the job to prevent the blade from flipping over The brush roller rubs against the lubricant bar D and lubricates the drum surface Lubricant is uniformly applied on the surface of the drum by the lubricant application blade E The toner
497. rimarily to calculate charges on use of the machine so the following pages are not counted as printed pages Blank pages in a duplex printing job Blank pages inserted as document covers chapter title sheets and slip sheets Reports printed to confirm counts All reports done in the service mode service summaries engine maintenance reports etc Test prints for machine image adjustment Error notification reports Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam L Size PrtPGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3 DLT and larger Note In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 8 401 T PrtPGS LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server The counter for the 8 402 C PrtPGS LS CTL 648 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 F PrtPGS LS application used to print the pages is incremented P PrtPGS LS CTL The L counter counts the number of jobs S PrtPGS LS stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel L PriPGS LS 0 to 9999999 0 1 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L count Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F count This SP counts the amount of paper front back counted as 1 page used for duplex printing Prints Duplex Last pages printed only
498. ring process control self check During toner supply 1713 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 During development Filters B on the top of the developer hopper make sure that the internal pressure does not become too high These ducts are sealed not to let the toner solidify before installing This development unit does not operate very well if it has been placed in the condition of over 50 C during transportation The toner inside the development unit can become solid at temperatures higher that this value A developer initialization error shows if the toner does become solid At this time you must do the following procedure m You should also do this procedure when you install a new development unit 1 Remove the old development unit Keep the new development unit level and shake it several times from side to side Install it in the machine Development Bias The PSU supplies development bias to the development roller via the receptacle at the rear of each development unit There is a dc bias voltage The machine automatically controls the dc bias if the automatic process control is enabled i e if SP3 041 001 is set to 1 ON However if process control is switched off i e if SP3 041 001 is set to 0 OFF the dc bias is the value stored in SP3 621 001 to 012 do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so New Unit Detection 114 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 The T
499. rinter SP Select SP1 102 001 Then select the necessary print mode to adjust Choose SP1 103 1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality for these settings Adjust the color density with SP1 104 as shown following table lists Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart Adjust the density in this order ID Max Shadow Middle Highlight Use SP1 105 001 to keep the adjusted settings 103 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Exterior Covers Front Door 1 Open the front door A 2 Remove the two pins B and then remove the front cover 104 21 Apr 2006 Replacement and Adjustment Left Cover Left cover A x 6 1 Rear Cover N ML D Y v SS Ape gt y Pr i 08 L S C o F Rear cover A x 7 1 105 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Right Rear Cover 1 Rear cover A P x 7 2 Openthe right door B 3 Right rear cover C x 1 Operation Panel Top left front cover A x 2 Open the right door Front right cover B x 1 Top front cover C P X 2 Operation panel D x 2 EP x 1 oe SS n 106 Replacement and Adjustment Dust Filter 1 Dust filter cover A 2 Two dust filters B 21 Apr 2006 107 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Scanner Unit Exposure Glas
500. rive pulley C P x 1 Reinstalling the Front Scanner Wire Position the center ball A in the middle of the forked holder Pass the right end with the ball B through the square hole Pass the left end with the ring C through the notch Wind the right end counterclockwise shown from the machine s front five times Wind the left end clockwise twice 114 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 The two red marks D come together when you have done this Stick the wire to the pulley with tape This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation 4 Install the drive pulley on the shaft E Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time 5 Insert the left end into the slit F The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley G and the rear track of the movable pulley H J 6 Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket I The end should go via 115 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 the front track of the right pulley J and the front track of the movable pulley K Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time N Remove the tape from the drive pulley Insert a scanner positioning pin L through the 2nd carriage hole M and the left holes N in the front rail Insert another scanner positioning pin O through the 1st carriage hole P and the right holes in the front rail Q 9 Insert two more sca
501. rmal the LD clock frequency for that beam is adjusted If the board at the end position is defective the clock frequency cannot be adjusted At this time you must disable the detection feature with SP2 186 1 761 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 LD Safety Switch 5V8 CN530 10 CN521 14 LD5V i6 Nurse DATA P MACA E 4 REG L ett 3 3 4 all HE OI UV ee pp 3 3V aq LDERRN 1 Le GAVD CN521 7 LD5V GND 4 VIDEO DATA E 24V81 A NN 1 tir lt PER DVP TR av BLDERR N CN522 7 men CN2 1 C a Ss G E 3 INTERLOCK SW Front Door SW and Right Door SW Lo A el a gq LER CN522 14 Polygon ra Motor 4 mon gt pe DATA fe A relay on the PSU ensures technician and user safety It also prevents the laser beam from turning on during servicing This relay turns off when the front cover upper left cover or right door is opened At this time it cuts the power 5V supplied to the LD board for each color through the BICU Two safety switches are used to turn the relay off One switch is used for the front door Another safety switch is used for the right door PMAC Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC on C MOS technology LDB LD Drive Board included in the LD Unit Error Messages Along with other switches the LD safety switches help show error messages related to extern
502. rnnrrvannrannnernnnrnnsrnnnnnsennsennnnne 169 Lubricant Roller and Cleaning Roller rrrrararnnrnrannnanernnennennranennnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnanennee 170 FUSING PT TET FN 171 Heating Roller Thermostat arrnnnrnnnrnnrrnnrnnnrnnrnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnene 172 Heating Roller TNermistor ccccccsccseccseecececseccueceeeceecceeseeecaueceecuesseseeesaeeseeseeneas 172 Pressure Roller Thermistor and Thermostat cccccccesccseeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeees 173 TEST MODIG e uU 174 Fusing Gear and One way Clutch rrrareranornrrnrarrrarennnernnnrranrranennnennnnnnnnennennnannnanennne 176 Heating Roller Bearing and Insulating Bushing eeeesesseeeseessessse 177 Pressure Roller B aring ccccccscccsccceeccseceseceecceeceeecaeecueeceesaueceeeseeeseesasesaessaeseensas 179 PE PN 180 Paper roO UI 180 Pick Up Feed and Separation Rollers rrrrrrarerarenurnanenanenarnrernnnrnnnernsennennennnennnen 181 TA BD 182 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Overflow Sensor and Paper End Sensor 183 Resa 184 By pass Paper Size Detection Switch rrrrrrarnrararnnnrnnrennreranerennnernnnernsnnnsnnnenanenunene 185 By pass Paper Feed Unit rrarnnnrnnrnarnannnnrnnrnannnnrnnnnannnnnnnnnernasnnnnnernannannnernunnnennsnnennn 187 Be I
503. ror The temperature measured by the thermopile does not reach 0 C for 20 seconds Loose connection of the thermopile Defective thermopile Check if the thermopile is firmly connected Replace the thermopile No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 563 Heating roller overheat 3 software error roller overheat 3 Heating roller overheat 3 software error error The detected fusing roller temperature stays at 230 C or more for 1 second Defective PSU 246 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective BICU Replace the thermistor Replace the PSU Replace the IOB Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective PSU Heating roller overheat 3 hardware error The thermopile detects 250 C or more Defective IOB Defective BICU Defective fusing control system Replace the thermistor Replace the PSU Replace the IOB Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Heating lamp consecutive fullpower3 lamp consecutive Heating lamp consecutive fullpower3 power 3 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition the pressure roller fusing lamp keeps ON full power for 120 seconds or more Broken heating roller fusing lamp 1 Replace the heating roller lamp 2 Replace the PSU Details Symptom Possible Ca
504. rt K Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that inne N the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that Middle Middle the density of level 6 ID K matches that of level 6 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that Shadow High ID the density of level 8 K matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not Highlight Low ID show on the copy and the K density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C 4 chart 102 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 y Note Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust shadow as shown above At this time check if the 5 line mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly If it is not adjust the offset value of shadow again until it is Printer Mode There are six adjustable modes select these modes with printer SP 1 102 001 2400 x 600 photo mode 2400 x 600 text mode 1800 x 600 photo mode 1800 x 600 text mode 600 x 600 photo mode 600 x 600 text mode Highlight SP1 104 1 SP1 104 21 SP1 104 41 SP1 104 61 shadow SP1 104 2 SP1 104 22 SP1 104 42 SP1 104 62 Middle SP1 104 3 SP1 104 23 SP1 104 43 SP1 104 63 IDmax SP1 104 4 SP1 104 24 SP1 104 44 SP1 104 64 Adjustment Procedure S P uo E d ops Do ACC for the printer mode Turn the main power off and on Enter SP mode Select P
505. s Glass cover A x 4 ARDF exposure glass B Rear scale C x 3 Exposure glass with left scale D Position the white marker E at the rear left corner and the blue marker at the e o5 I ox front left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass 108 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Original Length Width Sensors I Exposure glass with left scale iM Scanner Unit Original length sensor bracket A x 1 x1 Original length sensors B snap EF x 1 each The number of the original length sensors depends on the model 3 for EU 2 for others Original width sensors C snap x 1 E x1 each Exposure Lamp o we de SY Rear cover i Rear Cover Operation panel W Operational Panel Exposure glass a Exposure Glass Scanner rear cover A x 1 Scanner left cover B x 2 Scanner right cover C x 2 109 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Operation panel bottom cover D Operation panel support brackets E P x 2 each 9 Scanner left stay F x 2 10 Scanner front frame G x 6 11 Scanner rear frame H x 9 E x 1 12 Disconnect the exposure lamp cable I from the lamp stabilizer 2 X 2 110 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 13 Release the clamp J x 1 14 Remove the pulley K 15 Hold down the snap L and then slide the exposure lamp M to the front side 16 Exposu
506. s Paper Printer plotter Jam Print Pages 628 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Red Toner Remaining Applies to the wide format model A2 only This machine is under development and currently not available s SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear These SPs count the number of times each T Total Jobs CTL BE application is used to do a job 0 to 9999999 0 1 C Total Jobs Total Jobs CTL l l Note The L counter is the total number of times the SMC F Total Jobs other applications are used to send a job to the document server plus the number of times a file P Total Jobs l already on the document server is used S Total Jobs 629 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used not the number of pages processed When an application is opened for image input or output this counts as one job nterrupted jobs paper jams etc are counted even though they do not finish Only jobs executed by the customer are counted Jobs executed by the customer engineer using the SP modes are not counted When using secure printing when a password is required to start the print job the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is specified Ajob is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending
507. s SP determines whether pushing the off hook button will interrupt a 187 Cumin M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction This SP can be used only if SP5816 164 is set to O 0 or 1 0 0 Disable 1 Enable 200 Manual Polling a Executes the manual polling Regist Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the NRS service device 0 Neither the NRS device nor Cumin device are set 1 The Cumin device is being set Only Box registration is completed In this d status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request 2 he Cumin device is set In this status the Basil unit cannot answer a polling request 3 The NRS device is being set In this status the Cumin device cannot be set 4 The NRS module has not started Allows entry of the number of the request needed 202 Letter Number for the Cumin device 203 Confirm Execute Executes the inquiry request to the NRS GW URL 204 Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with SP5816 203 0 Succeeded 557 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Inquiry number error Registration in progress Proxy error proxy enabled Proxy error proxy disabled Proxy error Illegal user name or password Communication error Certification update error Other error O GON OO RH C N gt Inquiry executing Confirm Place Displays the result of the notification sent
508. s are decided with SP2006 2013 Environmental Correction PCU Displays the environmental condition which is measured in absolute humidity 1 to 5 1 step Current Environmental ENG 1 LL LL lt 4 3 g m Display 2 ML 4 3 lt ML lt 11 3 g m 3 MM 11 3 lt MM lt 18 0 g m 4 MH 18 0 lt MH lt 24 0 g m 5 HH 24 0 g m lt HH Selects the environmental condition manually Forced Setting ENG 0 to 5 0 1 step 0 The environmental condition is determined automatically 336 Service Tables Absolute Humidity Threshold 1 Absolute Humidity Threshold 2 Absolute Humidity Threshold 3 Absolute Humidity Threshold 4 Current Temp Display Current Relative Humidity Display Current Absolute Humidity Display Previous Environmental Display Previous Temp Display Previous Relative Humidity Display Previous Absolute Humidity Display 21 Apr 2006 1 LL 2 ML 3 MM 4 MH 5 HH Changes the humidity threshold between LL and ML 0 to 100 4 3 0 01 g m step Changes the humidity threshold between ML and MM 0 to 100 11 3 0 01 g m step Changes the humidity threshold between MM and MH O to 100 18 0 0 01 g m step Changes the humidity threshold between MH and HH 0 to 100 24 0 0 01 g m step Displays the current temperature 0 to 100 1 C step Displays the current relative humidity 0 to 10
509. s the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 3 LL Special 3 Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values ENG Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 80 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 440 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 120 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st Side Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side Special 3 ML Special 3 Paper ML Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2852 and SP285 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 90 5 s
510. s the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server address book 570 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2000 to 50000 2000 1 step Delivery Server Maximum Entries Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information managed by UCS LDAP Search Timeout 1 to 255 60 1 step 010 Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server Addr Book Migration SD gt HDD This SP moves the address book data from an SD card to the HDD You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP 1 Turn the machine off 2 Install the HDD 3 Insert the SD card with the address book data in SD card Slot 4 Turn the machine on 5 Do SP5846 040 6 Turn the machine off 7 Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 8 Turn the machine on Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with the data from the SD card We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with SP5846 051 before you execute this SP After the address book data is copied to HDD all the address book data is deleted from the source SD card If the operation fails the data is not erased from the SD card Fill Addr Acl Info This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed t
511. s using I Fax 662 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 F IFAX TX PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I Fax 8 64x 1 B W fa document has color and black and white pages mixed the pages are counted separately as B W or Color Atthe present time this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same The counts include error pages If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission the count is done for each destination Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not Relay memory and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination T S to Email PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for both the Scan and document server applications S to Email PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for the Scan application only The count for B W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD If the job is cancelled before it is stored the pages are not counted fScan to Email is used to send a 10 page document to 5 addresses the count is 10 the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together fScan to PC is used to send a 10 page document to 5 folders the count is 50 the 663
512. s via mechanical linkage The original is scanned from left to right When the original is fed from the optional ARDF it is automatically transported onto the ARDF exposure glass and to the original exit The original does not stay on the glass but goes to the exit The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their home positions 753 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Scanner Drive The scanner motor A drives the 1st scanner B and the 2nd scanner C through the scanner drive pulley scanner drive shaft D and two scanner wires E Book mode The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor The 2nd scanner speed is half that of the 1st scanner In reduction or enlargement mode the scanning speed depends on the magnification ratio The returning speed is always the same whether in full size or magnification mode The image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the scanner motor speed In the main scan direction it is done by image processing on the BICU board You can adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction by changing the scanner motor speed with SP4 008 ARDF mode The scanners always stay in their home position the scanner HP sensor F detects the 1st scanner to scan the original The ARDF motor feeds the original through the ARDF In reduction enlargement mode the image length change in the sub scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed Magnification in the main scan di
513. sensor a iiem pe a ae SiS Filter H See ae mae ee a ar ee eis Filter L Time Filter H The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is at its highest possible value Filter L The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt is at its lowest possible value ITB Current Each image transfer roller A applies current to the image transfer belt to attract the toner from each drum B The high voltage supply board supplies current to the image transfer rollers and grounds the belt at roller C The bias that is applied to the image transfer belt is automatically corrected for paper size temperature measured by the temperature humidity sensor at the rear lower right side of the machine The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface 184 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Transfer belt cleaning The ITB cleaning unit removes toner during printing and the ID sensor patterns during process control or automatic line position adjustment on the belt Belt cleaning is completed while the image transfer belt makes one rotation The ITB drive motor drives the ITB cleaning unit The cleaning brush A always contacts the image transfer belt B and removes used toner from the belt The cleaning blade C in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner off the image transfer belt Then the toner collection auger F transports the tone
514. sheet booklet finisher The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the stapler motor turned on first detection jam error consecutive twice detection SC code For 500 sheet finisher The stapler HP sensor does not detect OFF signal even the stapler moves from the ON position for 0 35 seconds The stapler HP sensor does not detect ON signal even the stapler moves from the OFF position for 5 5 seconds Motor overload Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor Loose connection of the stapler movement motor Defective stapler home position sensor Defective stapler movement motor Check the connection of the stapler movement motor Check the connection of the stapler home position sensor Replace the stapler home position sensor Replace the stapler movement motor Defective stack feed motor Check the connections and cables for the stack feed motor and HP No 746 1000 sheet booklet finisher Stack feed motor error The stack feed HP sensor does not detect ON twice once jam error for specified time after the stack feed motor has turned on The stack feed HP sensor does not detect OFF twice once jam error for specified time after the stack feed motor has turned on Motor overload Loose connection of the stack feed motor 258 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures sensor 2 Check for blockages in the stack feed mo
515. shold Bk ENG 015 Refresh Threshold M ENG 0 to 255 14 1 cm m step 016 Refresh Threshold C ENG 017 Refresh Threshold Y ENG Pattern Generation Number Bk ENG Pattern Generation Number M ENG 0 to 255 0 1 time step Pattern Generation Number C ENG Pattern Generation Number Y 022 Pattern Generation ENG 0 to 255 0 1 time step 484 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Number Upper limit Toner Consumption r ENG 10 to 2550 320 10 cm step Pattern Area 024 Supply Coefficient ENG 0 to 2 55 1 0 01 step 028 ENG 0 to 1 0 45 0 001 mg cm step Blade damage prevention mode 3517 Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade at the drum unit from being damaged If the temperature is above this value the drum reverses briefly at the end of the job to prevent the blade from flipping over Execution Temp ENG 0 to 50 40 1 C step Threshold Image Quality Adj Execution Flag DFU 001 Toner End Recovery Bk ENG 002 Toner End Recovery M ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 003 Toner End Recovery C ENG 004 Toner End Recovery Y ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 005 Vsg Adj ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON Process Control ENG 0 or 1 0 1 step 485 006 Developer Mixing ENG 007 Service Tables 21 Apr
516. signal in the CCD circuit 4674 board color printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting GO Color ENG mE for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 520 Service Tables 21 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 2006 Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for Factory Setting GE Color the even green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for Factory Setting GO Color the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board color printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting GE BW for the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 112 1 digit step Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment rough adjustment Factory Setting GO BW mE for the odd green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed Displays the factory setting values of the black level adjustment fine adjustment for Factory Setting GE BW the even green signal in the CCD circuit board black and white printing speed 0 to 255 128 1 digit step Displays t
517. sition Home position Stapler HP Sensor Jogger HP Sensor 7 7 6139 5 Not home position Home position Jogger Fence HP Sensor 7 Not home 6139 6 Stack Feed out Belt HP Sensor Home position Nu position 6139 7 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected Staple Rotation Sensor 7 7 6139 8 Not home position Home position Staple Rotation HP Sensor Staple not 6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected detected Staple not 6139 10 Staple READY Detection Staple detected detected Exit Guide Plate HP 6139 11 Not home position Home position Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 6139 12 Shift HP Sensor Not home position Paper Sensor Output tray not Output tray Stack Height Sensor detected detected 6139 13 Tray Lower Sensor 6139 14 Lower limit Not lower limit Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor Proof Full Sensor 6139 15 o Not full Full Paper Limit Sensor 500 Sheet Finisher B792 en Jo oomen e RN 684 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper not 6141 1 Entrance Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6141 2 Empty Sensor Paper detected detected Front Jogger HP Sensor 6141 3 Home position Not home position Front Jogger Fence HP Sensor Rear Jogger HP Sensor 7 7 6141 4 Home position Not home position Rear Jogger Fence HP Sensor Paper Detection Sensor 1 6141 5 Lever Sensor See the table 5 Paper Detection Sensor 2 6141 6 Stack Height Sensor
518. sity 009 Density Y 15 Darkest density Forced Line Position Adj Executes the fine line position adjustment twice Mode a If this SP is not completed NG is displayed do SP2111 003 first and then try this SP again Executes the fine line position adjustment Mode b Mud If this SP is not completed do SP2111 003 first and then try this SP again Executes the rough line position adjustment once Mode c After doing this SP make sure to execute SP2111 001 or 002 Otherwise the line position adjustment is not perfectly done 2112 TM ID Sensor Check ID Sensor Check FA This SP is used to check the ID sensors at 001 Execute the factory The results of this SP are displayed in SP2140 to SP2145 Skew Adjustment opecifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M C or Y These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when SC285 occurs For details see Laser Optics Housing Unit in the Replacement and Adjustment section 342 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 Pulse M 002 I Pulse C 100 to 100 0 1 pulse step 003 Pulse Y Skew Adjustment 001 Pulse M ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to the values specified with SP2117 002 Pulse C ENG These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when SC285 occurs For details see Laser 003 Pulse Y ENG Optics Housing Unit in the
519. sport motor iMf Toner Transport Motor Open the front door and right door Open the drum positioning plate Pull the image transfer belt unit a little Ml Image Transfer Belt Unit Pull the four PCUs a little W PCU Release all the clamps on the rear side of the gear unit a x 11 Release all the clamps B on the top of the gear unit a x 4 152 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 18 Disconnect all the connectors EF x 12 19 Gear unit C P X 7 timing belt x 1 153 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Registration Motor Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket Drum development motor K if Drum Development Motor K Registration motor bracket A 7 x 3 E x 1 2 x 2 timing belt x 1 Remove the registration motor from the bracket P x 2 Cr um O N B Paper Feed Motor Rear cover i Rear Cover High voltage supply board bracket High Voltage Supply Board Bracket PSU bracket W PSU Right rear cover iMf Right Rear Cover Paper feed clutch 1 and 2 i Paper Feed Clutches oe oe qe En 154 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 6 Paper feed motor bracket A 7 x 5 EP x 1 t2 x 3 7 Paper feed motor B x 2 timing belt x 1 Drum Development Motor K
520. step 0 to 255 0 1 step 5404 User Code Counter Clear 001 UCodeCtrClr mM Clears all counters for users CTL 0 to 9999 0 1 step 0 Alarm off 1 to 9999 Alarm goes off when Value 1 to 9999 x 1000 PM counter 001 PM Alarm Level Dor 1 1 0 No alarm sounds 002 Original Count Alarm E 1 Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing through the ARDF gt 10 000 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not included 0 to 3 3 1 step 0 Zero Off 1 Low 2 5K jams 2 Medium 3K jams 3 High 6K jams 039 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Sets the error alarm level 5505 The error alarm counter counts 1 when any SC is detected However the error alarm counter decreases by 1 when an SC is not detected during a set number of copied sheets for example default 1500 sheets The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches 5 0 to 255 50 75 C1a C1b 100 copies 001 CTL step meum fee 003 Toner Supply Alarm 128 Interval Others 132 Interval A3 133 Interval A4 134 Interval A5 141 Interval B4 250 to 10000 1000 1 step DFU 142 Interval B5 160 Interval DLT 164 Interval LG 166 Interval LT 172 Interval HLT 001 Jam Remains 0 Disable 1 Enable 540 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 002 011 012 013 021 022 023 Continuous Door
521. step 010 Voffset TM Rear ENG ID Sensor Detection Value Vsgave Not used 001 Vsgave reg Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 002 Vsgave reg M ENG 003 Vsgave reg C ENG 473 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 005 007 Not used 004 005 Vsgave dif M 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 006 Vsgave dif C 007 Vsgave dif Y 008 010 Not used 008 Vsgave TM Front ENG 009 Vsgave TM Center ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 010 Vsgave TM Rear ENG 3321 Vsg Adjustment Execution Execute the ID sensor initialization setting 010 P TM Sensor All for all sensors Vsg Adjustment Result Vsg Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor 001 Vsg reg Bk ENG 002 Vsg reg M ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 003 Vsg reg C ENG 004 Vsg reg Y ENG 005 Vsg dif M ENG 006 Vsg dif C ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 007 Vsg dif Y ENG Vsg TM Front ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 V step 008 474 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 009 Vsg TM Center ENG 010 Vsg TM Rear ENG Vsg Adjustment Result Ifsg DFU Ifsg Bk ENG Ifsg M ENG 0 to 50 0 1 mA step Ifsg C ENG Ifsg Y ENG Ifsg TM Front ENG Ifsg TM Center ENG 0 to 50 0 1 mA step Ifsg TM Rear ENG Vsg Adjustment Set DFU Vofset Error Counter ENG 002 O to 99 0 1 time
522. stment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side EN 007 Separation DC FINE 1st ENG 434 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 3 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 3 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 5000 0 10 V step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Separation DC Fine 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Side Special 3 Bias BW Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in ENG black and white mode Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 130 12 1 uA step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Special 3
523. stration roller B with a complex train of gears The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew You can adjust the paper buckle with SP1 003 Paper Feed Line Speed This machine has two process line speeds for feed from registration roller to fusing unit The line speeds depend on the selected mode Line speed mm s Print speed ppm Plain Middle Thick OHP Thick 197 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Tray Lock Mechanism This machine has two types of tray lock mechanism Tray Lock at the Front The lock at the front prevents the tray from coming out of the machine during transporting or shipping When you pull the handle A the lock lever B is lowered As a result you can pull out the tray Tray Lock at the Rear This mechanism is only activated when the machine detects a paper jam The lock at the rear prevents the tray from coming out from the machine when the paper is jammed If the tray is removed while the paper is jammed the paper may be split in two pieces This makes it difficult to remove the jammed paper 798 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 If the paper is jammed the tray lock solenoid A turns on and activates the lock lever B The lock lever B locks tray 1 C and tray 2 D Paper Dust Collection The two mylars A scrape the paper dust from the registration idle roller B The paper dust falls down into
524. sumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled Repeat Number O to 9 0 1 time step 005 Recovery Not used Repeat Number Job End 0 to 9 4 1 time step Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at job end 006 0 Disabled 1 to 3 Repeat number 4 Repeat three times No consumption mode 5 Repeat three times Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark 6 to 9 Disabled Repeat Number Interrupt O to 9 0 1 time step opecifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment 007 during printing DFU Toner Supply Coefficient 0 to 25 5 10 0 1 sec step Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to 008 be low 009 Consumption pattern Bk 0 to 255 5 1 time step 456 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment Consumption pattern M 0 to 255 5 1 time step Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density 010 when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment Consumption pattern C 0 to 255 5 1 time step Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density 011 when ton
525. supervisor about this setting Plug in the power cord Then turn the main switch on Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM SP5 825 001 and HDD SP5 846 52 if you have successfully copied them to the SD card The counter data in the user code information clears even if step 11 is done correctly An error message shows if the download is incomplete However you can still use the part of the address book data that has already been downloaded in step 11 Anerror message shows when the download data does not exist in the SD card or if itis already deleted You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write protected Go out of SP mode Then turn the main switch off Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 3 Turn the main switch on Specify the SP and UP mode settings Do ACC for the copier application program Do ACC for the printer application program 202 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 4 Troubleshooting Process Control Error Conditions Developer Initialization Result SP 3 014 001 Developer Initialization Result Successfully completed Forced termination Vt error Vent error 1 Vent error 2 Developer initialization is successfully completed When done in SP mode do the developer initialization Developer A cover was opened again Reinstall the engine initialization or the main switch main firmware if the result was forcibly was turned off during is the same t
526. t Replace the IOB For details about how to reset the skew correction value see Recovery procedure for SC285 and no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit in Laser Optics Housing Unit Replacement in the Replacement and Adjustment section of the manual 294 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Jam Detection Paper Jam Display SP7 504 shows the paper jam history E CODE 011 SIZE 05h TOTAL 000034 DATE Fri Feb 15 11 44 50 2006 CODE indicates the jam code SIZE indicates the paper Size Code Total Indicates the total counter SP7 502 001 DATE indicates the date when the jam occurred Jam Codes and Display Codes Jam Code LCD Display Description l SP Display 7504 1 At Power On Paper is not fed at power on 7504 3 Tray 1 ON Paper is not fed from tray 1 7504 4 Tray 2 ON Paper is not fed from tray 2 7504 5 Tray 3 ON Paper is not fed from tray 3 LCT 7504 6 Tray 4 ON Paper is not fed from tray 4 1504 9 Duplex ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit Vertical Transport 1 Paper feed sensor 1 does not detect 7504 11 ON paper from tray 1 7504 12 Vertical Transport 2 Paper feed sensor 2 does not detect ON paper from tray 2 Vertical transport sensor 1 or relay 7504 13 Bank Transport 1 sensor does not detect paper from tray 3 7504 8 Bypass ON Paper is not fed from the by pass tray 295 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Jam Code in LCD Display Description SP Dis
527. t error Y The measured voltage is not proper when BICU measures the charge output for each color Disconnected or broken high voltage cable Defective or not installed PCU Defective high voltage power supply 1 Check or replace the connectors Replace the PCU for black Replace the high voltage power supply Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Color development motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on Color development motor slip due to an increase in the torque 1 Adjustthe torque properly by replacing or cleaning the development unit 2 Replace the color development motor if the load torque is normal Details Symptom TD sensor Vt high error 1 K Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures TD sensor Vt high error 1 M EM TD sensor Vt high error 1 C EM TD sensor Vt high error 1 Y The Vt value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value default 4 7V with SP3020 002 for 228 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures twenty counts The Vt Vtref value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor exceeds the specified value default 5 0V with SP3020 001 Black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor disconnected Harness between TD sensor and PCU defective Defective TD sensor Check the black
528. t is detected as ML SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 90 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2401 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Plain MM Plain Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values ENG 10 to 250 170 5 step 2433 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 138 mm s 1st Side 002 Paper Transfer Plain ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step 380 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side ENG Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2401 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 200 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separ
529. t power on or recovery from the energy save mode Insufficient power supply for SBU Defective SBU Defective harness Defective detection port on the BICU 1 Replace the harness Replace the SBU 3 Replace the BICU SBU serial communication error The power ON of the SBU is not detected 217 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 144 m SBU communication error 001 002 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective SIO Defective harness Defective detection port on the BICU Replace the harness Replace the SIO Replace the BICU GASBU reset error The serial communication does not work Defective SBU Defective detection circuit on the BICU Defective harness Replace the SBU Replace the BICU Replace the harness Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The error result of self diagnostic by the Taurus ASIC on the IPU is detected Defective BICU Defective connection between BICU and SBU Check the connection between BICU and SBU Replace the BICU e Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures omm __ Copy Data Security Unit error the copy data security board ie not detected when the com dale copy data security board is not detected when the copy data 218 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 l Details Sympto
530. tact motor eror belt contact motor error The image transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates Dirty image transfer belt contact sensor Detective image transfer belt contact motor 231 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures No 452 21 Apr 2006 Disconnected connector of image transfer belt contact sensor or motor Disconnected cable Replace the image transfer belt contact sensor Replace the image transfer belt contact motor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1 3 Image transfer unit error The machine detects the encoder sensor error Defective encoder sensor Image transfer unit installation error Defective image transfer unit motor Check if the image transfer unit is correctly set Replace the image transfer unit motor Replace the image transfer unit Paper transfer unit contact error Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The paper transfer unit contact sensor does not detect the movement of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates Defective paper transfer unit contact sensor Defective paper transfer unit contact motor Broken 24V fuse on PSU Defective IOB Check the connection between the paper transfer unit and PSU Replace the paper transfer unit contact sensor Replace
531. tails Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Memory chip at TD sensor Communication error Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected the memory chip communication error Damaged memory chip data Disconnected inter face No memory chip on the development unit Noise 1 Replace the PCU 254 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details rro Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures RFID RFID Unit check error 0 check error The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges have not been installed in the machine Caused mme TG noise Turn the main power switch HL Tum the main power switch offandon and on Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Memory address command error The BICU does not receive a memory address command from the controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration Loose connection Defective controller Defective BICU Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BICU Replace the controller 3 Replace the BICU Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures GAVD communication error The I2C bus device ID is not identified during initialization Adevice status error occurs during I2C bus communication The I2C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer shortage Loose connection Defe
532. tals jobs pages etc for the document server The L counters work differently case by case Sometimes they count jobs pages stored on the document server this can be in document server mode from the document server window or from Local storage another mode such as from a printer driver or by document server pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode window Sometimes they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already on the document server Each counter will be discussed case by Case Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image external network Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software applications for Development Kit will also be counted with this example group in the future The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessity of displaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand Key for Abbreviations Abbreviation By e g T Jobs Apl Total Jobs by Application 626 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Abbreviation gt More 2 gt 2 or more 4 gt 4 or more AddBook Address Book Apl Application B W Black amp White Bk Black C Cyan ColCr Color Create ColMode Color Mode Comb Combine Comp Compression Deliv Delivery Designated Application
533. ted Account is done only after all images of a job have been scanned Scans made in SP mode are not counted Examples f3B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored the 9 count is 4 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the Copy mode window the C count is 6 and the L count is 6 f both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored the C count is 6 fyou enter document server mode then scan 6 pages the L count is 6 8 201 T LSize Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 640 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax transmission are not counted Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display F LSize Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for fax transmission Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display S LSize Scan PGS 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs only Large size paper A3 DLT scanned for fax transmission are not counted Note These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display T Scan PGS LS These SPs count the number of pages scan
534. ted like 2 up or 4 up for example each image will be printed on one page Example 1 Photo A 2 Photo B 3 with 4 up printing In this case Page 2 will not be printed Example 2 Photo A 2 Photo B 4 with 2 up printing In this case all photos will be printed B B BB Date and file name printing This function can impose a date stamp and file name under each image A data stamp and file name are imposed in the following style Position It is centered under each image Font color Black Font type Arial Font size 6 pt to 16 pt depending on printing size 827 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Image print size Fixed size printing A dc B A Specified printing size B Paper This function can print images with the size specified on the camera The image is enlarged to match the specified size The image is not rotated The image aspect ratio is not changed Ifthe specified aspect ratio is different from the image aspect ratio the image aspect ratio is automatically adjusted to the specified aspect ratio even this deletes part of the image fthe new ratios of height and width magnification are different the larger magnification ratio is used to adjust the image to the specified printing size Anerror occurs if the specified size is larger than the actual paper size 254mm x 178mm 21cm x 15cm 110mm x 74mm 24cm x 18 148mm x 100mm 828 Deta
535. temperature Middle humidity 4 MH Middle temperature High humidity 5 HH High temperature High humidity Adjusts the threshold value between LL and ML 0 to 100 4 3 0 01 g m step Adjusts the threshold value between ML and MM 0 to 100 11 3 0 01 g m step Adjusts the threshold value between MM and MH 0 to 100 18 0 01 g m step Adjusts the threshold value between MH and HH O to 100 24 0 01 g m step Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction 001 Threshold 1 002 Threshold 2 ENG ENG 0 to 350 297 1 mm step Threshold 1 lt paper Paper is detected as S1 size 0 to 350 257 1 mm step Threshold 2 lt paper lt Threshold 1 367 Service Tables 003 Threshold 3 2314 Threshold 4 Non Image Area Bias Image Transfer Paper Transfer Paper Transfer Resistance FB P M Pattern Bias ENG ENG ENG Paper type Plain Thick Thick2 Image Transfer Plain ENG 21 Apr 2006 Paper is detected as S2 size 0 to 350 210 1 mm step Threshold 3 lt paper s Threshold 2 Paper is detected as S3 size 0 to 350 148 1 mm step Threshold 4 lt paper s Threshold 3 Paper is detected as S4 size Paper lt Threshold 4 Paper is detected as S5 size Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt between images This value is added to the value of the image transfer belt bias 1
536. tep Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as ML SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 110 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 ENG 77 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Not used Side 441 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 3 MM Special 3 Paper MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 10 to 250 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MM SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values 005 008 Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 100 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Separation DC FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side ENG Special 3 MH Special 3 Paper MH Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2884 Adjusts the environment coefficient
537. tep Set higher for darker set lower for lighter Contrast 1 255 1 to 255 128 1 step Set higher for more contrast set lower for less contrast Independent Dot Erase 0 to 7 0 1 step 0 1 7 Strong Selects the contrast level for B W the Text mode Sets the erasure level of Irregular Dots Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect 0 Not activated Texture Erase 0 0 to 2 0 1 step 010 Sets the erasure level of textures Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect This SP suffix 010 only exists in SP4580 4582 and 4583 0 Not activated 4600 SBU Version Display DENN arma Scanner Memory Access Enables the read and write check for the 001 Scanner Memory Access SBU registers 002 Address Set Not used 003 Data Set n a603 AGC Execution 504 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 001 HP Detection Enable n Executes the AGC mjemeenas fom 4604 FGATE Open Close DFU Opens or closes the FGATE signal This SP automatically returns to the default status close after exiting this SP 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 4606 White Balance White Balance Target RJ DFU 000 R DFU This value is the target value of red for the ENG white level adjustment O to 1024 784 1 digit step 4607 White Balance White Balance Target GJ DFU 000 G DFU This value is the target value of green for ENG the white level adjustm
538. terrupted after a normal startup After startup reset of the operation panel the attention code or the attention acknowledge code is not sent from the controller within 15 seconds After the controller issues a command to check the communication line with the controller at 30 second intervals the controller fails to s CTL respond twice D Controller stalled Controller board installed incorrectly Controller board defective Operation panel connector loose or defective The controller is not completely shutdown when you turn the main switch off Check the setting of SP5875 001 If the setting is set to 1 OFF E change it to o OFF Check the condition of the controller board 3 Check the condition of the operation panel 253 Troubleshooting 0 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Replace the controller board Replace the operation panel Turn the main switch off wait for one second or more and turn the main switch on Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures RFID Communication error Communication error occurs when the RFID starts to communicate with the RFID receptor Retry of RFID communication fails three times after the machine has detected the RFID communication error Defective RFID reader and writer Disconnected ASAP I F No memory chip on the toner cartridge Noise Replace the RFID controller board Replace the toner cartridge De
539. the correct controller board for this machine TL D Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures CTL B Application function selection error The application selected by the operation panel key does not start or ends abnormally Software including the software configuration defective An option required by the application RAM DIMM board is not installed Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated 282 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Check the devices necessary for the application program If necessary devices have not been installed install them 2 Check that application programs are correctly configured 3 Fora fax operation problem simplify the nesting of the fax group addresses Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application program If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel see the logs Loose connection of RAM DIMM ROM DIMM Defective controller Software problem Check the setting of SP5875 001 If the setting is set to 1 OFF change it to 0 OFF Check if the RAM DIMM and ROM DIMM are correctly connected Reinstall the controller system firmware Replace the controller Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Application start error No applications start within 60 seconds after the power is turned on Note 1 If a
540. the image shift to the leading edge side on the print Increasing a value makes the image shift to the trailing edge side on the print 1 line 42um 022 S Scan High Line M ENG 16384 to 16384 0 1 line step 023 S Scan High Subline M ENG Not used 024 S Scan Medium Line M ENG 35 O N gt o O N Oo Service Tables S Scan Medium 025 ENG Subline M 026 S Scan Low Line M ENG 16384 to 16384 0 1 line step 027 S Scan Low Subline M ENG Not used 028 S Scan High Line C ENG 16384 to 16384 0 1 line step 029 S Scan High Subline C ENG 030 S Scan Medium Line C ENG Not used S Scan Medium 031 ENG Subline C 032 S Scan Low Line C ENG 16384 to 16384 0 1 line step 033 S Scan Low Subline C ENG Not used 034 S Scan High Line Y ENG 16384 to 16384 0 1 line step 035 S Scan High Subline Y ENG 036 S Scan Medium Line Y ENG Not used S Scan Medium 037 ENG Subline Y 038 S Scan Low Line Y ENG 16384 to 16384 0 1 line step 039 S Scan Low Subline Y ENG Not used Main Scan Length Detection DFU 001 Execute High Bk Executes the adjustment for the main scan length detection manually 002 Execute Medium Bk 003 Execute Low Bk 004 Execute High M 005 Execute Medium M 357
541. the paper transfer unit contact motor Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU 232 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures BED 5 Replace the IOB Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms This SC is issued if the BICU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D ac Damaged insulation on the high voltage supply cable Damaged insulation around the high voltage power supply 1 Replace the high voltage supply cable 2 Replace the high voltage power supply unit Replace the IOB Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Toner transport motor error The LOCK signal is not detected for 2 seconds when the transport motor turns on Toner transport motor overload Disconnected or broken harness Defective toner transport motor Opened 24V fuse on the PSU Defective interlock switch Check or replace the harness Replace the toner transport motor Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU Replace the interlock switch Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 233 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures High voltage power Drum development bias output error An error signal is detected for 0 2 seco
542. the staple has returned to its home position Stack feed out HP sensor does not turn off after the stack feed out has moved from its home position R7 R11 Stack feed out HP sensor does not turn on after the stack feed out has returned to its home position Stopper S HP sensor does not turn off after the upper clamp roller has moved from its home position R7 R11 Stopper S HP sensor does not turn on after the upper clamp roller has returned to its home position 301 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Jam Code SP 7504 147 7504 148 7504 160 7504 161 7504 162 7504 163 7504 164 7504 165 LCD Display Description Displ isplay Lower clamp roller HP sensor does not turn off after the lower clamp roller has moved from its home Finisher Stack 2 position R7 R11 Release Motor B793 Lower clamp roller HP sensor does not turn on after the lower clamp roller has returned to its home position Stopper S HP sensor does not turn off after the stopper S has moved Finisher Stopper from its home position R7 R11 Motor B793 Stopper S HP sensor does not turn on after the stopper S has returned to its home position Entrance sensor does not turn on for Finisher Entrance ON N specified time E Entrance sensor does not turn off for Finisher Entrance specified time after the trailing edge of OFF paper has passed this sensor _ Stack height sensor does not turn off Finisher Stack Exit
543. tion 0 ADF cover close 015 Feed Cover 1 ADF cover open 0 ADF close 016 Lift Up 1 ADF open ADF Output Check Activates the electrical components for functional check It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time 003 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor Forward rotation 004 Feed Motor Reverse 005 Relay Motor Forward 006 Relay Motor Reverse 010 Feed Solenoid Inverter Solenoid I Performs a DF free run in Performs a DF free run in duplex mode or stamp mode mode or stamp mode 6010 Stamp Position Adj Fax Stamp Position Adjustment e a Free Run 6009 002 586 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals 6010 1 Stamp Position Adj 5 0 to 5 0 0 1 mm step Original Size Detection Priority Original Size Detection Priority 6016 er l er Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor since original sensors cannot recognize all sizes 00r1 0 0 Setting 1 1 Setting 2 Setting 1Setting 2 Bit 7 A4 L LT L Bit 6 11 x 15 DLT L Bit 5 DLT L 11 x 15 _ Bit 4 LT S US Exec S Original Size Detection 001 n Bit 3 LT Ly 8 x 10 L Priority Bit 2 LG L F4 L Bit 1 A4 L 16K L Bit 0 8K L DLT L Bits used for detection differ depending on destination as shown below Bit 7 to 6 Only for Japan Bit 5 to 2 Only for US Bit 1 to 0 Only for EU AA
544. tion Prevention This SP detects that a mechanical counter device is removed If it is detected SC610 occurs 001 0 OFF 1 ON The mechanical counter is provided only for NA model SP print mode Prints out the SMC sheets 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default 007 NIB Summary 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program SP6 XXX Peripherals 6006 ADF Adj ADF Adjustment 584 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the side to side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF 001 Side to Side Registration 3 0 to 3 0 0 0 1 mm step Leading Edge 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 mm step Registration Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and rear sides 005 Buckle Duplex Front ENG 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 mm step 006 Buckle Duplex Rear Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge 007 Rear Edge Erase 5 0 to 5 0 0 0 1 mm step ADF Input Check Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF Only Bit 0 is used for ADF input check Original Length 1 B5 0 Paper not detected Detection Sensor 1 Paper detected Original Length 2 A4 Detection Sensor Original Length 3 LG Detection Sensor 985 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 011 Skew Correction 013 Registra
545. tion occurs three consecutive times the SC is generated Defective paper lift sensor Defective tray lift motor Defective bottom plate lift mechanism Defective IOB Check if the bottom plate smoothly moves up and down manually Check and or replace the tray lift motor Replace the IOB No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 503 01 Tray 3 error Paper Feed Unit or LCT For the paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds For the LCT Troubleshooting 2f1 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 For the paper feed unit Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection For the LCT Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection Defective tray motor or connector disconnection Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Check the cable connections Check and or replace the defective component This SC is generated if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive times For the paper feed unit When the tray lowers the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1 5 SEC For the LCT When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set if the end fence is not in the home position home position sensor ON the tra
546. to Countermeasure list for color registration errors Do SP2 111 001 Mode a fine adjustment twice Use SP2 194 007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct 0 Completed successfully 1 Not completed If the result is 1 refer to Countermeasure list for color registration errors 5 Putsome A3 DLT paper on the by pass tray Mote When you print a test pattern use the by pass tray to feed the paper Print out test pattern 7 with SP2 109 003 Check the printed output with a loupe If there are no color registration errors on the output the line position adjustment is correctly done If not refer to the countermeasure list for color registration errors Countermeasure list for color registration errors After Executing SP2 111 003 Result SP2 194 Test pattern check Possible cause Countermeasure 010 011 012 Result Result 1 eo Line pattern White image Defective laser optics housing unit detection Abnormal image Low shutter Jefective image processing unit Low density of test pattern 288 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 After Executing SP2 111 003 Defective BICU Replace the shutter motor Replace the high voltage power supply unit Dothe forced process control SP3 011 001 or supply some toner SP3 015 xxx failure Replace the BICU Defective ID sensor shutter Defective ID sensor Normal image
547. to 1 1 0 01 step ENG 0 to 1 0 5 0 01 step ENG 0 to 1 1 0 01 step ENG 0 to 1 0 1 0 01 step ENG O to 1 1 0 01 step 481 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Correction Coefficient 1 O to 1 0 25 0 01 step Interrupt FC Correction Coefficient 2 O to 1 1 0 01 step Interrupt FC Max Number Correction 0 to 99 2 1 step Threshold Max Number Correction 0 to 255 0 1 step Counter Image Quality Adj Interval 3512 Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position adjustment 001 During Job ENG 0 to 100 30 1 page step 002 During Stand by ENG 0 to 100 10 1 minute step PCU Motor Stop Time Bk Displays the last time that the PCU motors stopped These are used for process control execution timing Year ENG 0 to 99 0 1 step 002 Month ENG 1 to 12 1 1 step Date ENG 1 to 31 1 1 step Hour ENG 0 to 23 0 1 step 005 Minute ENG 0 to 59 0 1 step Environmental Display Job End Displays the environmental conditions for the last job These are used for process control execution timing 482 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 002 Relative Humidity ENG 0 to 1000 0 1 RH step 003 Absolute Humidity ENG 0 to 1000 0 1 g cm step Execution Interval Display Displays the current interval for process control execution W
548. to 180 40 1 C step ENG 100 to 160 150 1 C step 321 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Specifies the temperature of the low power mode for the heading roller Low Power Pressure 30 to 160 100 1 C step 018 Specifies the temperature of the low power mode for the pressure roller Off Mode Center 0 to 180 0 1 C step 019 Specifies the temperature of the off mode for the heading roller Off Mode Ends 0 to 180 0 1 C step 020 Specifies the temperature of the off mode for the heading roller Off Mode Pressure 0 to 170 0 1 C step 021 Specifies the temperature of the off mode for the pressure roller The following SPs except SP1105 085 set the target operating temperatures of the heating roller in various modes 3 NO 2 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 062 120 to 200 165 1 C step Target Temp After 082 ENG _ 120 to 180 170 1 C step Ready 083 Recovery Target Temp 120 to 180 160 1 C step Target Temp After 084 ENG 120 to 180 170 1 C step Recovery Specifies the paper feed start temperature This value is the offset temperature in ENG relation to the target temperature for the ready condition 0 to 30 10 1 C step 323 085 Print Start Offset Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 089 Thick 3 FC Simplex 120 to 180 180 1 C step 091 Thick 3 BW Simplex 120 to 180 170 1 C step Middle Thick FC
549. to 400 100 5 step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Page ENG Separation DC Fine 1st ENG Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Special 3 Switch Timing Lead Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge ENG plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area 438 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Page 0 to 30 0 2 mm step Separation DC Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Page Separation DC Fine 1st Page Not used Separation DC Fine 2nd Page Special 3 Trailing Edge Correction Special 3 Paper Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode SP2852 and SP2857 are multiplied by these SP values 3 The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2874 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 ENG 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used 439 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Special 3 Switch Timing Trail Edge Adjust
550. to detect toner end during toner recovery 001 Repeat Bk ENG 002 Repeat M ENG 1 to 20 5 1 time step 003 Repeat C ENG 004 Repeat Y ENG TE Count m Display Display the number of toner end detections for each color Bk ENG M ENG 0 to 99 0 1 time step C ENG Y ENG TD Sensor Vt Display 3201 Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 0 to 5 5 0 01 0 01 V step 462 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Vt Shift Display Set Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed 001 Thick 1 Shift Bk ENG 002 Thick 1 Shift M ENG O to 5 0 21 0 01 V step 003 Thick 1 Shift C ENG 004 Thick 1 Shift Y ENG 005 Thick 2 amp FINE Shift Bk ENG 006 Thick 2 amp FINE Shift M ENG O to 5 0 21 0 01 V step 007 Thick 2 amp FINE Shift C ENG 008 Thick 2 amp FINE Shift Y ENG Vtcnt Display Set Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color 001 Current Bk ENG 002 Current M ENG 2 to 5 4 0 01 V step 003 Current C ENG 004 Current Y ENG 005 008 Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization DFU Initial Bk ENG 2 to 5 4 0 01 V step Initial M ENG Initial C ENG 463 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Vtref Display Set 3222 Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value
551. to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL 206 Register Execute Executes Cumin Registration Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result Succeeded Registration in progress Proxy error proxy enabled Proxy error proxy disabled Proxy error Illegal user name or password Communication error Certification update error Other error O ON Oo Ci Ba C DN O Registration executing Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed o Je ft Illegal Modem 11001 Chat parameter error 558 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Parameter 11002 Chat execution error 11003 Unexpected error Inquiry registration attempted without 12002 B acquiring device status Operation Error Attempted registration without execution 12003 of an inquiry and no previous Incorrect Setting registration Attempted setting with illegal entries for 12004 certification and ID2 Attempted dial up overseas without the 2385 correct international prefix for the telephone number 2390 Program out of service URL 559 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 5821 Remote Service Address Sets the PI device code After you change this setting you must turn the machine off 001 CSS PI Device Code and on 0 t
552. to the paper transfer roller current for the paper 396 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 trailing edge in each mode SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2524 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 400 100 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Thick 1 Switch Timing Trail Edge Adjusts the bias voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller discharge plate ENG at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 100 to 0 0 2 mm step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side ENG Paper Transfer FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Paper Transfer FINE 2nd Side Thick 1 LL Thick 1 Paper LL Environment Coefficient Adjustment ENG Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as LL SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values 397 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Paper Transfer Thick 1 77 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Paper Transfer FINE ENG 2nd Side Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is
553. tomatically detects that the new unit is installed Then the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PM Counter Previous SP7 906 11 to 20 and is reset to 0 The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7 906 11 to 20 7803 31 Rotation PCU Bk ENG 0 to 999999999 1 mm step 7803 32 Rotation Rotation PCU M M 7803 33 Rotation Rotation PCU C C 601 Service Tables 7803 34 Rotation PCU Y 7803 35 7803 36 7803 37 7803 38 7803 43 7803 44 Rotation Cleaning Unit 7803 45 Rotation Fusing Unit Rotation Paper Transfer 7803 46 7803 47 Rotation Development Unit Bk Rotation Development Unit M Rotation Development Unit C Rotation Development Unit Y Rotation Image Transfer Belt Unit Measurement Toner Collection bottle Displays the value given by the following formula 21 Apr 2006 Current revolution Target revolution x 100 This shows how much of the unit s expected lifetime has been used up The Rotation counter is based on rotations not prints If the number of rotations reaches the limit the machine enters the end condition for that unit If the print count lifetime is reached first the machine also enters the end condition even though the R counter is still less than 100 602 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 7803 61 Rotation PCU Bk ENG 0 to 255
554. toner pump unit on the sheet of paper which has been put in step 4 with its opening F up 11 Keep the opening G of the toner supply tube up and then clip the opening of the toner supply When you install the new toner pump unit Before installing the new toner pump unit mask the opening of the old toner pump unit with tape Dispose of it following local rules 134 4 5 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Put a sheet of paper A3 DLT inside the machine Turn up the opening of the toner supply tube and then remove the object that was used to clip the opening of the toner supply tube Insert the opening of the toner pump unit A into the opening of the toner supply tube B as far as possible Connect the harness C to the connector of the machine On the above picture the magnified picture of the connector shows the easiest way to connect it Clamp the harness C 3 x 1 for YCM x 3 for K 135 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Avoid touching these spring terminals D 6 Passthe harness of the toner pump unit behind the hook E while pressing at F 7 Secure the toner supply tube with the holder G lifting up the edge of the holder very gently Be careful when you lift the edge of the holder because the holder is easily broken 8 Insert the toner pump unit H into the rear frame of the machine P x 2 136 Replacement and Adjustment Toner
555. tor mechanism 3 Replace the stack feed HP sensor and or stack feed motor 4 Replace the finisher main board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 1000 sheet booklet finisher Tray lift motor error 1 Check the connections to the shift tray motor 2 Defective shift tray motor Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Finisher punch motor error The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the punch motor turned on The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Punch HP sensor disconnected defective Punch motor disconnected or defective Punch motor overload due to obstruction Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP sensor Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism Replace the punch HP sensor and or punch motor Replace the finisher main board Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures i Finisher folder plate motor error The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time Ihe 1st detection failure issues a Jam error and the Troubles No 164 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 2nd failure issues this SC code Folder plate HP sensor disconnected defectiv
556. trance sensor does not turn on after the stopper S HP sensor has turned on 21 Apr 2006 Jam Code in LCD Display Description SP Display o e R1 R3 R1 R3 R1 R3 Staple tray exit sensor does not turn on after the entrance sensor has turned on R4 R6 Staple tray exit sensor does not turn off after it has turned on Shift tray exit sensor does not turn on while the stack feed out roller has turned on R4 R6 Shift tray exit sensor does not turn off after the stack feed out roller has returned to its home position R7 R11 Fold unit exit sensor does not turn on after the folding has been done R7 R11 Fold unit exit sensor does not turn off after it has turned on Exit guide plate HP sensor does not R1 R3 turn off after the exit guide plate has 299 Troubleshooting Jam Code SP 7504 138 7504 139 7504 140 7504 141 Display Finisher Staple Moving Motor B793 Finisher Punch Motor B793 Finisher Tray Lift Motor B793 Finisher Jogger Motor B793 21 Apr 2006 Description opened Exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn on after the exit guide plate has closed Staple unit HP sensor does not turn off after the staple unit has moved from its home position Staple unit HP sensor does not turn on after the staple unit has returned to its home position Punch HP punch movement HP or paper position slide HP sensor does not turn off after each unit has moved
557. troller Software error Turn the main switch off and on Reinstall the controller and or engine main firmware See Note 1 at the end of the SC table Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Software continuity error The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation However unlike SC 990 the object of the error is continuity of the software Software program error Internal parameter incorrect insufficient working memory 1 This SC is not displayed on the LCD logging only No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 992 Undefined error 281 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective software program An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Operation panel management records exceeded CTL C An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for images managed in the service layer of the firmware This can occur if there if there are too many application screens open on the operation panel No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Controller Board Mismatch C The information on the controller board does not match that of the machine Wrong controller board installed Reinstall
558. ubleshooting Procedures 15FF Self diagnostic Error RTC optional NVRAM The RTC device is not detected RTC defective NVRAM without RTC installed Backup battery discharged 1 Replace the NVRAM with another NVRAM with an RTC device Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Self diagnostic error Standard SDRAM DIMM XXXX Detailed error code 269 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Error detected during a write verify check for the standard RAM SDRAM DIMM Loose connection Defective SDRAM DIMM Defective controller Turn the main switch off and on Replace the SDRAM DIMM Replace the controller Resident memory error The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable 0202 Defective RAM DIMM Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM Defective 12C bus 1 Replace the RAM DIMM Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Self diagnostic error ROM XXXX Detailed error code Check sum error 1 The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is 0101 checked If the check sum of the program is incorrect this SC code is displayed Check sum error 2 All areas of the ROM DIMM are checked If the check sum of all 0104 programs stored in the ROM DIMM is incorrect this SC code is displayed Defective ROM DIMM Defective controller 270 Troubleshooting
559. ubleshooting Procedures The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the ventilation fan motor front rear Defective ventilation fan motor front or rear Replace the ventilation fan at the left side of the machine motor front or rear Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Toner supply tube fan error The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the toner supply tube fan motor Defective toner supply tube fan motor front or rear 1 Replace the toner supply tube fan motor Fusing exit sensor fan error Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the fusing fan motor Defective fusing fan motor 1 Replace the fusing exit sensor fan motor at the front right side of the machine Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures PSU fan 1 2 error The BICU does not receive the lock signal 10 seconds after turning on the PSU fan 1 2 motor 239 Troubleshooting 4 2f1 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Defective PSU fan motor 1 2 Replace the PSU fan motor 1 2 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 7 Controller fan error The motor lock signal error is detected for 10 seconds after the motor lock signal was first detected Defective controller fan moto
560. ue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request The notification of the request for certification update has completed successfully and the system is waiting for the certification update request from the rescue GW URL The notification of the certification request has been received from the rescue GW controller and the certification is being stored The certification has been stored and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event The storing of the certification has failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event The certification update request has been received from the GW URL 551 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was completed but an certification error has been received and the rescue certification is being recorded The rescue certification of No 17 has been recorded and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of the certification update CERT Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification Normal There is no request for certification update in progress Request for certification update in progress The current certification has e
561. un Simulates standby conditions during 003 Free Run 3 shipping FIN TIG INPUT Check Finisher B793 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher W Input Check Table FIN KIN INPUT Check Finisher B408 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher WE Input Check Table FIN KAN INPUT Check Finisher B792 Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher M Input Check Table FIN TIG OUPUT Check Finisher B793 Output Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher Mi Output Check Table FIN KIN OUPUT Check Finisher B408 Output Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher Mi Output Check Table 592 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 FIN KAN OUPUT Check Finisher B792 Output Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher Mi Output Check Table SP7 XXX Data Log Total SC Counter Displays the number of SC codes detected 7401 1 SC Counter 0 to 9999 0 1 step SC History Logs the SC codes detected The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen but can be seen on the SMC oe outputs 7403 1 latest 7403 2 latest 1 7403 4 tatest3 00000 3 7403 s Latest4 00 tatest4 0 4 74
562. until the thermistor detects the standby temperature Then the CPU raises the temperature to the printing temperature The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows These are set by SP 1105 Temperature of Heating Roller Temperature of Pressure C Roller C Machine ready 170 SP1105 001 50 SP1105 007 Paper feed ready Machine ready 10 804 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Temperature of Heating Roller Temperature of Pressure C Roller C SP1105 085 Machine ready 10 Print ready SP1105 002 Standby mode 165 SP1105 010 011 150 SP1105 012 Energy saver panel 140 SP1105 013 014 150 SP1105 015 off mode Low power mode 100 SP1105 018 Off mode Lamps off SP1105 021 Middle thick paper Thick 1 paper 165 SP1105 046 050 one sided Thick 1 paper 170 SP1105 048 052 B duplex side 2 Thick 2 paper 175 SP1105 054 055 a Thick 3 paper full 180 SP1105 089 color Thick 3 paper black and white OHP full color 175 SP1105 056 OHP black and white opecial paper 165 SP1105 058 to 080 170 SP1105 090 165 SP1105 057 805 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 Paper Weights Thin paper Below 60 g m 16 Ib Normal plain paper 60 81 g m 16 22 Ib Middle Thick 82 105 g m 22 28 Ib Thick 1 106 169 g m 28 5 44 9 Ib Thick 2 170 219 g m 45
563. ure correction that is set with SP1116 010 and 011 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has 018 passed after feeding the paper Control Time 2 226 0 to 250 0 1 sec step Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 012 and 013 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has 019 passed after feeding the paper Control Time 3 226 0 to 250 30 1 sec step Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 014 and 015 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has 020 passed after feeding the paper Control Time 4 226 0 to 250 60 1 sec step Specifies the start time of the temperature correction that is set with SP1116 016 and 017 The temperature correction is added when the time specified with this SP has 021 passed after feeding the paper Center Temp 1 Duplex 30 to 0 0 1 C step 226 022 Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller center when the paper width is 226 mm or more in duplex mode 328 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 The start time of this SP can be adjusted with SP1116 026 Ends Temp 1 Duplex 256 ENG 30 to 0 0 1 C step Specifies the temperature correction for the heating roller ends when the paper width is 226 mm or more in duplex mode
564. ures Heating roller Heating roller fusing lamp consecutive ful power 1 lamp consecutive Heating roller fusing lamp consecutive ful power 1 power 1 When the fusing unit is not running in the ready condition the heating roller ger lamp keeps on full power for 8 seconds Broken Broken heating roller thermistor 0 roller thermistor Related SC code SC 555 242 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures WT 1 Replace the heating roller thermistor No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power The zero cross signal is not detected for 2 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal Pu detections This error is defined when the detected zero cross signal is less than 45 Defective fusing lamp relay Defective fusing lamp relay circuit Unstable power supply Check the power supply source Replace the PSU 1 Check that the pressure roller thermistor is firmly connected 2 Replace the thermopile Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures Pressure roller thermistor error The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor does not reach O C for 6 sec
565. use Troubleshooting Procedures 247 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 610 DE Mechanical counter error Bk 611 EN Mechanical counter error FC This SC is only for NA models The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5987 001 is set to 1 Disconnected mechanical counter Defective mechanical counter m 1 Check or replace the mechanical counter No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 620 ARDF communication error After the ARDF is detected the break signal occurs or communication timeout occurs Incorrect installation of ARDF ARDF defective BICU board defective External noise Check the cable connection of the ARDF Shut out the external noise Replace the ARDF Replace the BICU board No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures av o NN 622 ES Paper tray unit communication error While the BICU communicates with an optional unit an SC code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs 248 Troubleshooting 21 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures The BICU receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on When the BICU does not receive an OK signal from a peripheral 100ms after sending a command to it The BICU resends the command The BICU
566. utch C Pump C Toner Supply 5804 39 Toner Supply Clutch Y Pump Y Drive Unit Cooling Fan High Speed 5804 46 Drive Unit Fan 690 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Electrical Section 5804 47 Cooling Fan High Controller Fan Speed 5804 48 Fan 1 High Speed Ventilation Fan Front 5804 49 Fan 2 High Speed Ventilation Fan Front Fusing Exit Fan 5804 50 Fusing Paper Exit Fan 138 mm s High Speed Fusing Exit Fan 5804 51 Fusing Paper Exit Fan 77 mm s Low Speed Fusing Exit S Fan 5804 52 Fusing Fan 138 mm s High Speed Fusing Exit S Fan 5804 53 Fusing Fan 77 mm s Low Speed PSU Fan1 High 5804 54 PSU Fan 1 138 mm s Speed Dust Shield Shutter 5804 56 biet Shutter Motor Laser Optics Housing Unit otor TM Sensor Shutter 5804 57 ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid SOL TM Sensor LED 5804 58 ID Sensor LED Output Front Output F TM Sensor LED 5804 59 ID Sensor LED Output Center Output C TM Sensor LED 5804 60 ID Sensor LED Output Rear Output R P Sensor LED 5804 61 ID Sensor mirror reflection K LED Output Output Bk 5804 62 P Sensor LED ID Sensor mirror reflection M LED Output 691 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 P Sensor LED 5804 63 ID Sensor mirror reflection C LED Output Output C P Sensor LED 5804 64 ID Sensor mirror reflection Y LED Output Output Y ST Sensor Output mE 5804 65 ID Sensor diffusion K LED Output Bk ST Senso
567. ve to pack the machine and move it a longer distance Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT 15 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Transporting the Machine Main Frame 1 Do SP 4806 001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position This prevents dust from falling into the machine during transportation 2 Remove the toner cartridges This prevents toner flow into the toner supply tube which is caused by vibration during transport This can also cause the tube to be clogged with toner 3 Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays Then fix down the bottom plates with a sheet of paper and tape 4 Empty the toner collection bottle Then attach securing tape to stop the toner bottle from coming out 5 Do one of the following Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors Shrink wrap the machine tightly After you move the machine Make sure you do the Auto Color Registration as follows This optimizes color registration 1 Dothe Forced Line Position Adj Mode c SP2 111 3 2 Then do the Forced Line Position Adj Mode a SP2 111 1 To check if SP 2 111 1 was successful watch the screen during the process A message is displayed at the end Also you can check the result with SP 2 194 10 to 12 Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to prevent color registration errors 1000 sheet Booklet Finisher Before the 1000 sheet booklet finisher is transp
568. verview There are three types of self diagnostics for the controller 21 Apr 2006 1 Power on self diagnostics The machine automatically starts the self diagnostics just after the power has been turned on 2 Detailed self diagnostics The machine does the detailed self diagnostics by using a loop back connector P N G0219350 3 SC detection The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power on or during operation The following shows the workflow of the power on and detailed self diagnostics C Power ON E Y Diagnostic RAM Check NG Notinitialized Y CPU Check NG gt SC820 Y ASIC Check NG gt SC821 v Standard RAM Connection Check NG gt SC827 v Optional RAM Connection Check NG gt SC829 v Clock Generator Check NG gt SC838 Standard NVRAM Check v Optional NVRAM Check NG gt SC824 v Font Header Check NG Y Error Logged Real Time Clock Check NG gt SC826 Y Network Check NG 4 E rror Logged Engine I F Check NG y E rror Logged Interrupt Check NG y rror Logged Memory Chip Check NG T rror Logged Detailed ROM Sum Check v Standard RAM Detailed Check Optional RAM D
569. ving already logged on to log off if they try to log on Allows disallows an initiator to exclusively log on Dor 1 0 0 OFF Disallows 1 ON Allows opecifies the maximum initiators able to log on 0 to 63 8 1 step 5840 IEEE 802 11b 006 Channel Max CTL 1 to 11 or 13 11 or 13 1 step 965 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 004 Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels DFU Do not change the setting 1 to 11 or 13 1 1 step Channel Min CTL Europe 1 to 13 NA Asia 1 to 11 Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless LAN The number of channels available varies according to location The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels DFU Do not change the setting Selects the WEP key 00 to 11 00 1 binary 00 Key 1 01 Key 2 Reserved 10 Key 3 Reserved 11 Key 4 Reserved Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting Specifies supply names These appear on WEP key Select Black the screen when the user presses the Inquiry button in the user tools screen Toner Name Setting Cyan To
570. vironment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as MH SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain ENG 10 to 250 150 5 step 138 mm s 1st Side Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Separation DC FINE 1st ENG Side Not used Separation DC FINE ENG 2nd Side Thin HH Thin Paper HH Environment Coefficient Adjustment ENG 10 to 250 90 5 step Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these SP values Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 120 5 step Paper Transfer Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side Paper Transfer FINE 1st ENG Side Not used 004 Paper Transfer FINE ENG 391 ENG Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode When the environment is detected as HH SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 10 to 250 80 5 step Separation DC Plain 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Separation DC FINE 1st Side ENG Not used Separation DC FINE 2nd Side ENG Thick 1 Bias Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper Separation DC Thick 1 138 mm s 1st Side ENG 0 to 5000 0 10 V step Separation DC Thick 1 138 mm s 2nd Side ENG Separation DC Fine 1st
571. when Exit 0 shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen or press the button on the operation panel of the copier 713 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update procedure Updating Firmware Preparation 1 If the SD card is blank copy the entire romdata folder onto the SD card 2 Ifthe card already contains the romdata folder copy the B230 folder onto the card If the card already contains folders up to B230 copy the necessary firmware files e g B230xxxx fwu into this folder Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card Copy the only model firmware you want Y a So IDI N Fa B Turn the main power switch off Remove the slot cover A x 1 Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3 Make sure the label on the SD card B faces the rear side of the machine 4 Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place You will hear it click Make sure the SD card locks in place To remove the SD push it in to unlock the spring lock Then release it so it pops out of the slot 5 Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network 714 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 6 Switch the main power switch on After about 4
572. x 1 189 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Electrical Components Controller Unit 1 Controller unit A x 5 Controller Box Cover 1 Rear cover W Rear Cover 2 Loosen the eight screws 3 Slide up the controller box cover A and then remove it 190 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Controller Box po Al ee ee Eek VN EN i k To e P Lia P a P 3 1 Rear cover if Rear Cover Controller box cover Controller Box Cover Disconnect all the connectors on the BICU and release the clamps amp x 5 E x 3 4 Remove the ground cable P X 1 and one flat cable Make sure that the flat cable is removed If not the flat cable can be damaged 191 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 5 Open the controller box A x 6 m LEE E I bmi 6 Release all the clamps on the top and bottom of the controller box top LJ x 3 bottom x 5 8 Controller box C 192 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 BICU Rear cover i Rear Cover Controller box cover Controller Box Cover Mother board bracket A x 4 BICU B x 5 x 10 one flat cable m wo I When installing the new BICU Remove the NVRAM from the old BICU Then install it on the new BICU after you replace the BICU Replace the NVRAM iM NVRAM Replacement Procedure
573. x Unit Fusing unit i Fusing Unit Image transfer belt unit up Image Transfer Belt Unit ID sensor unit A x 2 E x 2 23 x 1 ID sensor board B x 6 on 2 Wr ow c Io 148 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require a cleaning procedure every 320K Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning K PCU W PCU Fusing unit Mf Fusing Unit Image transfer belt unit Mf Image Transfer Belt Unit Slide the ID sensor shutter A to the left side Clean the ID sensors keeping the ID sensor shutter to the left or Ee qe ox After installing a new ID sensor unit board Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit board 1 Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier 2 Enter the SP mode 3 Inputall correction coefficients A for the ID sensor with the SP modes referring to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit board For example input 1 00 with SP3 362 013 4 Exit the SP mode RSA150729001AXR SP3 362 016F0 212 SP3 362 01311 00 SP3 362 017F0 234 SP3 362 01411 11 SP3 362 018F0 256 SP3 362 01540 99 149 Replacement and Adjustment 21 Apr 2006 Drive Unit Fusing paper exit motor 7 Paper feed clutch Tray 1 ITB drive motor 8 Drum Development drive motor K Paper transfer contact motor 9 Development drive motor CMY Registration motor 10 Toner transport motor Paper feed motor 11 Im
574. x10 amp x 1 each One of the securing brackets is used as a securing tool the cutout F is used in step 6 But the cutout G is for attaching the tray heater Therefore attach the securing brackets E after installing the tray heater if you will install the tray heater 19 Installation 21 Apr 2006 10 Attach the front stand cover I right stand cover J and rear stand cover K to the correct sides of the machine M3x6 amp x 2 each 11 Load paper into the paper feed unit 12 Turn on the main power switch of the machine 13 Check the paper feed unit operation and copy quality 20 Installation LCT B801 Accessory Check Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list No Description Q ty Caster stand 2 Securing bracket 2 O 3 Screw M3x6 x 6 M4x10 x 2 8 4 Spring washer screw 1 5 Rear stand cover 1 Right stand cover T Front stand cover 1 O 21 Apr 2006 21 Installation 21 Apr 2006 Installation Procedure A CAUTION Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure You need two or more persons to lift the copier The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one person and may cause human injury or property damage Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed Otherwise
575. xit Sensor Duplex exit sensor does not turn off 1 Bin Exit ON 1 bin tray exit sensor does not turn off C Tray exit sensor bridge unit does not Relay Exit Sensor turn off Duplex Entrance Duplex entrance sensor does not turn Sensor off Finisher Entrance Paper does not reach to the entrance SG B408 sensor or stay at the entrance sensor Paper does not reach to the lower tray Finisher Shift Tray Exit B408 exit sensor or stay at the lower tray exit R1 R2 Sensor Paper does not reach to the staple tray Finisher Staple B408 entrance sensor or stay at the staple tray R3 R5 entrance sensor Lower tray exit sensor does not detect paper after the stack feed out belt has fed paper Finisher Exit B408 R3 R5 Lower tray exit sensor still detects paper after the stack feed out belt has returned to the home position Finisher Drive Motor Exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn B408 on or off for specified time 297 Troubleshooting Jam Code SP 7504 105 7504 106 7504 107 7504 108 7504 109 Display Finisher Tray Lift Motor B408 Finisher Jogger Motor B408 Finisher Shift Motor B408 Finisher Staple Motor B408 Finisher Exit Motor B408 21 Apr 2006 LCD Description Display Stack height sensor does not detect paper after the lower tray has lifted up Stack height sensor still detects R1 R2 paper after the lower tray has
576. xpired 068 a An SSL error notification has been issued Issued after the certification has expired Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual certification 4 Notification of a common certification without ID2 5 Notification that no certification was issued e Notification that GW URL does not exist 069 CERT Up ID The ID of the request for certification 083 Firmware Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update This setting determines if the firmware can be updated even without the HDD installed 084 Non HDD Firm Up 0 Not allowed update 1 Allowed update This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware before 085 Firm Up User Check the firmware update execution If the option to confirm the previous version is selected a 952 Service Tables 21 Apr 2006 notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware files from the URL Allows the service technician to confirm the size of 086 Firmware Size the firmware data files during the firmware update execution 087 CERT Macro Version Displays the macro version of the NRS certification 088 CERT PAC Version Displays the PAC version of the NRS certification Displays ID2 for the NRS certification Spaces are 089 CERT ID2 Code displayed as underscores Asteriskes indicate that no NRS certificatio
577. y lift motor stops If the upper limit does not go off for 1 5 seconds even the tray lift motor turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at power on For the paper feed unit Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection 236 Troubleshooting 2f1 Apr 2006 21 Apr 2006 Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures For the LCT Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection Defective tray motor or connector disconnection Defective end fence home position sensor or connector disconnection Check the cable connections Check and or replace the defective component No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 504 01 Tray 4 error Paper Feed Unit or LCT For the two tray paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds If this condition occurs three consecutive times the SC is generated For the LCT If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection Check the cable connections Check and or replace the defective component No Details Symptom Possible Cause Troubleshooting Procedures 504 02 Tray 4 error 3 Tray Paper Feed Unit Th
578. y pass tray the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area Information from the original size sensors is disregarded Refer to the ARDF manual for more information on original size detection with the ARDF Anti Condensation Heater The anti condensation heater is available as an optional unit The anti condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors Condensation can occur when the scanner unit is for example moved from a cold room to a warm room Condensation can cause abnormal images 756 Detailed Section Descriptions Image Processing Overview Scan Line Correction PCI IF NFC1 Lupus tb as Lb HVP SBU Sensor Board Unit SBU The VPU Video Processor Unit does the following functions Black level correction White level correction Gradation calibration ADS control Background Density Creating the SBU test pattern Operation Summary 21 Apr 2006 The signals from the 3 line CCD one line for each color R G B and 2 analog signals per line ODD EVEN are sampled by the ASIC and converted to digital signals in the 10 bit A D converter This is the first phase of processing the data scanned from the original Storing Operation Settings The controller stores the SBU settings These values must be restored after the lens block is replaced 157 Detailed Section Descriptions 21 Apr 2006 SP4 008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment SP4 010 001

Service Manual - Photocopieur professionnel d`occasion RICOH

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents